INSTRUCTION MANUAL

8835-01

MEMORY HiCORDER
 Contents

Introduction i
Inspection i
Safety Notes iii
Notes on Use v
Chapter Summary ix

Chapter 1 Product Overview 1

1.1 Major Features 1
1.2 Basic and Advanced Versions 4
1.2.1 Additional Features 4
1.3 Identification of Controls and Indicators 6

Chapter 2 Installation and Preparation 11

2.1 Installation of the Unit 12
2.2 Power Supply and Ground Connection 14
2.3 Power On/Off 18
2.4 Probe Connection 19
2.4.1 8936 ANALOG UNIT, 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT and
8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT 19
2.4.2 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT 20
2.4.3 8939 STRAIN UNIT 22
2.4.4 8940 F/V UNIT 23
2.4.5 8947 CHARGE UNIT 25
2.5 Logic Probe Connection 26
2.6 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE Connection 27
2.7 Loading Recoding Paper 27
2.8 Storage and Handling Precautions 30
2.9 Notes on Measurement 31
2.9.1 Using a Voltage Transformer 33
2.9.2 Maximum Input Voltage 33

Chapter 3 Basic Operation and Measurement 35

3.1 Basic Operation 35
3.1.1 Basic Display Operation 35
3.1.2 Setting Items 36
 3.1.3 JOG/SHUTTLE Control and Select Key 37
3.1.4 Measurement Start and End 38
3.1.5 Basic Input Operation 38
3.1.6 Printer Key Operation 39
3.1.7 Other Keys Operation 39
3.1.8 On-line Help 41
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures 42
3.2.1 Basic Operation Flow 42
3.2.2 Measuring and Recording a Voltage
(Memory Recorder Function) 43
3.2.3 Measuring and Recording a Voltage
(Recorder Function) 45
3.2.4 Measuring and Recording an RMS Value
(RMS Recorder Function) 47

Chapter 4 Memory Recorder Function 49

4.1 Outline 49
4.1.1 Outline of the Memory Recorder Function 49
4.1.2 Operation Sequence 50
4.2 Making Settings 51
4.2.1 Setting the Function Mode 51
4.2.2 Setting the Time Axis Range 52
4.2.3 Setting the Recording Length 53
4.2.4 Setting the Format 55
4.2.5 Using the X-Y Waveform Plots 57
4.2.6 Setting the Printer Format 59
4.2.7 Setting the Roll Mode 61
4.2.8 Setting the Auto Print Function 61
4.2.9 Setting the Auto Save Function 62
4.2.10 Overlay 64
4.2.11 Setting the Trigger 65
4.2.12 Input Channel Settings 65
4.3 Settings on the Display Screen 66
4.3.1 Setting Magnification/Compression Along the Time Axis 66
4.3.2 Automatic Setting of Time Axis and Voltage Axis 67
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing) 68
4.4.1 Summary of the Processing Functions 68
4.4.2 Processing Method 69
4.4.3 Waveform Parameter Calculation Details 71
 4.5 Start and Stop Measurement Operation 75
4.6 Print Examples 76

Chapter 5 Recorder Function 79

5.1 Outline 79
5.1.1 Outline of the Recorder Function 79
5.1.2 Operation Sequence 80
5.2 Making Settings 81
5.2.1 Setting the Function Mode 81
5.2.2 Setting the Time Axis Range and Sampling 82
5.2.3 Setting the Recording Length 84
5.2.4 Setting the Format 86
5.2.5 Setting the Printer Format 89
5.2.6 Setting the Additional Recording Function 91
5.2.7 Setting the Printer Function (Real Time Printing) 92
5.2.8 Setting the Auto Save Function 93
5.2.9 Setting the Trigger 94
5.2.10 Input Channel Settings 94
5.3 Settings on the Display Screen 95
5.3.1 Setting Compression Along the Time Axis 95
5.4 Start and Stop Measurement Operation 96
5.5 Print Examples 97

Chapter 6 RMS Recorder Function 99

6.1 Outline 99
6.1.1 Outline of the RMS Recorder Function 99
6.1.2 Operation Sequence 100
6.2 Making Settings 101
6.2.1 Setting the Function Mode 101
6.2.2 Setting the Time Axis Range 102
6.2.3 Setting the Frequency 103
6.2.4 Setting the Recording Length 104
6.2.5 Setting the Format 106
6.2.6 Setting the Printer Format 108
6.2.7 Setting the Additional Recording Function 110
6.2.8 Setting the Printer Function (Real Time Printing) 111
6.2.9 Setting the Auto Save Function 112
6.2.10 Setting the Trigger 113
6.2.11 Input Channel Settings 113
 6.3 Settings on the Display Screen 114
6.3.1 Setting Compression Along the Time Axis 114
6.4 Start and Stop Measurement Operation 114
6.5 Print Examples 115

Chapter 7 Input Channel Settings 117

7.1 Overview 117
7.2 Selecting Channels (Memory Recorder Function Only) 117
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT 118
7.3.1 Setting the Waveform Display Color 118
7.3.2 Setting the Waveform Display Graph Type 120
7.3.3 Setting the Voltage Axis Range 121
7.3.4 Setting the Input Coupling 122
7.3.5 Setting the Magnification/Compression Ratio Along the
Voltage Axis 123
7.3.6 Setting the Zero Position 124
7.3.7 Zero Adjustment 126
7.3.8 Configuring Baseline Offset 127
7.3.9 Setting the Low-Pass Filter 129
7.4 Making the Settings of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT 130
7.4.1 Setting Input for the VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT 130
7.4.2 Making the Settings of Voltage Measurement 131
7.4.3 Making the Settings of Temperature Measurement 132
7.5 Making the Settings of the 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT 135
7.5.1 Settings 135
7.5.2 Setting the Anti-aliasing Filter (Advanced Version) 135
7.6 Making the Settings of the 8939 STRAIN UNIT 137
7.6.1 Setting the Waveform Display Color 137
7.6.2 Setting the Waveform Display Graph Type 137
7.6.3 Setting the Measurement Range 137
7.6.4 Auto-balancing 138
7.6.5 Setting the Magnification/Compression Ratio Along the
Measurement Range 139
7.6.6 Setting the Zero Position 140
7.6.7 Setting the Low-Pass Filter 140
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT 141
7.7.1 Settings 141
7.7.2 Setting for Measuring Frequency 142
 7.7.3 Setting Integral Measurement 146
7.7.4 Setting for Measuring Pulse Duty Ratio 148
7.7.5 Setting for Measuring Voltage 149
7.7.6 Setting for Measuring Current 150
7.8 Making the Settings of the 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT 152
7.8.1 Settings 152
7.8.2 Setting the Input Coupling 153
7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT 154
7.9.1 Settings 154
7.9.2 Setting for Measuring Acceleration 155
7.9.3 Setting for Measuring Voltage 159
7.10 Making Logic Input Settings 160
7.11 Copying Channels 162
7.12 Arbitrary Setting of Voltage Axis Magnification/
Compression and Display Range 163
7.13 Input Level Monitor Function 166
7.14 Channel Guide 168

Chapter 8 Trigger Functions 169

8.1 Overview 169
8.2 Setting the Trigger Mode 171
8.3 Setting the Pre-trigger
(Memory Recorder and RMS Recorder Functions) 172
8.4 Trigger Timing (Recorder Function) 175
8.5 Setting Trigger Source AND/OR Linking 176
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function 177
8.6.1 Level Trigger (RMS Recorder Function Excluded) 178
8.6.2 Window-In, Window-Out Trigger
(RMS Recorder Function Excluded) 182
8.6.3 Voltage Drop Trigger (Memory Recorder Function Only) 185
8.6.4 Period Trigger (RMS Recorder Function Excluded) 187
8.6.5 RMS Level Trigger (RMS Recorder Function Only) 191
8.7 Using the Logic Trigger Function 194
8.8 Using the Timer Trigger Function 196
8.9 Using the External Trigger Function 199
8.10 Manual Trigger 200
8.11 Trigger Output Connector 200
Chapter 9 SYSTEM Screen Settings 201
9.1 Overview 201
9.2 How to Use the SYSTEM Screen 202
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ] 203
9.3.1 Channel Selection (Memory Recorder Function) 204
9.3.2 Start Key Backup 204
9.3.3 Setting the Grid 205
9.3.4 Channel Marker Function 205
9.3.5 Displaying the Time from the Trigger Point
(Time Display) 206
9.3.6 List and Gauge Functions 206
9.3.7 Setting the Printer Density 207
9.3.8 Setting Backlight Saver Function 207
9.3.9 Setting the Display Colors 208
9.3.10 Setting the Beep Sound 209
9.3.11 Setting the Language 209
9.3.12 Setting PRINT/EXT.SMPL 210
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ] 211
9.4.1 Conversion Ratio Scaling 212
9.4.2 2-Point Scaling 215
9.4.3 Unit Entry Procedure 219
9.4.4 Copy Settings 220
9.4.5 Scaling Setting Example 221
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ] 222
9.5.1 Title Comment Input 223
9.5.2 Analog Channel Comment Input 224
9.5.3 Moving to the Analog Channel Comment Input Screen
or the Logic Channel Comment Input Screen 225
9.5.4 Logic Channel Comment Input 226
9.5.5 Character Entry Procedure 227
9.5.6 Description of Window Contents 228
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings) 229
9.6.1 Setting the Output Destination by the COPY Key 230
9.6.2 Setting the Output Destination by the PRINT Key 231
9.6.3 GP-IB Interface Settings 232
9.6.4 RS-232C Interface Settings 233
9.6.5 Setting the LAN Interface 235
9.7 Initialization [ INITIALIZE ] 239
 9.7.1 Setting the Clock [ TIME SET ] 239
9.7.2 Clear Waveform Data [ WAVE DATA CLEAR ] 240
9.7.3 System Reset [ SYSTEM RESET ] 241
9.8 Self Check 242
9.8.1 ROM/RAM Check 242
9.8.2 Printer Check 243
9.8.3 Display Check 243
9.8.4 Key Check 244
9.8.5 PC Card Check 244

Chapter 10 Printout of Waveform Data 245

10.1 Overview 245
10.2 Selecting Waveform or Numeric Print 246
10.3 Using the Smooth Print Function
(Memory Recorder Function Only) 248
10.4 Setting the Grid 250
10.5 Channel Marker Function 250
10.6 Adding Comment to Printout 251
10.7 Printing Procedure 252
10.7.1 Manual Print (All Functions) 252
10.7.2 Auto Print (Memory Recorder) 253
10.7.3 Real-Time Print (Recorder, RMS Recorder) 254
10.7.4 Partial Print (All Functions) 255
10.7.5 Screen Hard Copy (All Functions) 256
10.7.6 List Print (All Functions) 256
10.7.7 Report Print (All Functions) 257
10.7.8 External Printer (Color Print) 258

Chapter 11 Using the A/B Cursors / Waveform Scrolling 259

11.1 Overview 259
11.2 Using the A/B Cursors 260
11.2.1 Line Cursor (Vertical, Horizontal) (All Functions) 260
11.2.2 Trace Cursor 260
11.2.3 Using the Cursors 261
11.3 Scrolling the Waveform 264
11.4 Zoom Function 265
11.5 Vernier Function 267
Chapter 12 External Input/Output Connectors /
Key Lock Function 269
12.1 Overview 269
12.2 External Start/Stop 270
12.3 External Printing/Sampling 272
12.4 Using the External Trigger Input (EXT TRIG) 273
12.5 Using the External Trigger Output (TRIG OUT) 274
12.6 Using the Evaluation Outputs (GO), (NG) 275
12.7 Using the Key Lock Function 276

Chapter 13 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Waveform Data

and Measurement Settings 277
13.1 Outline 277
13.2 Handling the Floppy Disk 278
13.2.1 Floppy Disk 278
13.2.2 Using the Floppy Disk Drive 279
13.2.3 Initializing (Formatting) the Floppy Disk 280
13.3 Handling the PC Card 281
13.3.1 PC Card 282
13.3.2 Using the PC Card Slot (PC Card with a Cable Only) 283
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk
or PC Card 286
13.4.1 Overview 286
13.4.2 FILE Screen 286
13.4.3 What Can Be Recorded and How Much 286
13.4.4 Selecting the Media Type 287
13.4.5 Detailed Explanation of the Commands 288
13.5 Using a PC Card on a Personal Computer 303
13.5.1 Windows 95 303
13.5.2 Windows 3.1 and MS-DOS 303

Chapter 14 Specifications 305

14.1 General Specifications 305
14.1.1 Basic Specifications 305
14.1.2 Recorder 307
14.1.3 Display 307
14.1.4 External Data Storage 308
14.1.5 Interface 308
 14.1.6 Others 309
14.2 Trigger Unit 310
14.3 Memory Recorder Function 311
14.4 Recorder Function 312
14.5 RMS Recorder Function 313
14.6 Recorder & Memory Function (Advanced Version) 314
14.7 FFT Function (Advanced Version) 315
14.8 Advanced Version 316
14.9 Auxiliary Function 316
14.10 Others 317
14.11 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER Specifications 318
14.12 System Operation 319

Chapter 15 Logic and Analog Inputs 323

15.1 Logic Inputs 323
15.1.1 Logic Probes 324
15.2 Analog Inputs 326
15.2.1 8936 ANALOG UNIT 326
15.2.2 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT 327
15.2.3 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT 329
15.2.4 8939 STRAIN UNIT 330
15.2.5 8940 F/V UNIT 331
15.2.6 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT 333
15.2.7 8947 CHARGE UNIT 334
15.3 Replacement Procedure 336
15.3.1 Replacement Procedure 1 337
15.3.2 Replacement Procedure 2 337
15.4 Input Cables 338
15.4.1 Connection Cable 338
15.4.2 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE Connection 339
15.4.3 9018-10/9132-10 CLAMP-ON PROBE 340
15.5 Measurement Errors Caused by Signal Source Internal
Resistance 341
Chapter 16 Maintenance 343
16.1 Printer Head Cleaning 344
16.2 Removing the Battery Before Discarding the 8835-01 345
16.3 Troubleshooting 347
16.4 Cleaning the Unit 348
16.5 Service 348

Appendix APPENDIX1
Appendix 1 Error and Warning Messages APPENDIX1
Appendix 1.1 Error Messages APPENDIX2
Appendix 1.2 Warning Messages APPENDIX2
Appendix 2 Glossary APPENDIX5
Appendix 3 Reference APPENDIX7
Appendix 3.1 Sampling APPENDIX7
Appendix 3.2 Aliasing APPENDIX7
Appendix 3.3 Measurement Limit Frequency APPENDIX8
Appendix 3.4 Recorder Function APPENDIX9
Appendix 3.5 RMS Recorder Function APPENDIX10
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File APPENDIX11
Appendix 4.1 Binary Data APPENDIX11
Appendix 4.2 Text File APPENDIX15
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv) APPENDIX19
Appendix 5.1 Waveform Viewer Menus APPENDIX21
Appendix 5.2 Using the Waveform Viewer APPENDIX23
Appendix 5.3 Conversion to CSV Format APPENDIX26
Appendix 5.4 Batch Conversion APPENDIX28
 i
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing this HIOKI "8835-01 MEMORY HiCORDER."

To get the maximum performance from the unit, please read this manual first,
and keep this at hand.

Inspection

・When the unit is delivered, check and make sure that it has not been
damaged in transit. In particular, check the accessories, panel switches, and
connectors.
・If the unit is damaged, or fails to operate according to the specifications,
contact your dealer or HIOKI representative.

Accessories
Grounded three-core power cord 1
Ground adapter 1
Recording paper 1
Protective cover 1
Roll paper attachment 2
PC card protector 1
Instruction Manual 1
Application Disk (CD-R) 1

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Introduction
 ii
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Options
9540-01 FUNCTION UP DISK
8936 ANALOG UNIT
8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT
8939 STRAIN UNIT
8940 F/V UNIT
8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT
8947 CHARGE UNIT
9439 DC POWER ADAPTER
9221 RECORDING PAPER (10 rolls)
9557 RS-232C CARD
9558 GP-IB CARD
9559 PRINTER CARD
9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR
9335 WAVE PROCESSOR
9626 PC CARD 32 M
9627 PC CARD 64 M
9726 PC CARD 128 M
9727 PC CARD 256 M
9728 PC CARD 512 M
9729 PC CARD 1 G
9578 10BASE-T LAN CARD
9388 CARRYING CASE
9320 LOGIC PROBE
9321 LOGIC PROBE
9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE
9324 POWER CORD (for logic connector)
9325 POWER CORD (for the 8940 F/V UNIT sensor connector)
9303 PT *
9197 CONNECTION CORD (for high voltage, maximum input voltage 500 V)
9198 CONNECTION CORD (for low voltage, maximum input voltage 300 V)
9199 CONVERSION ADAPTOR
9217 CONNECTION CORD (insulated BNC to insulated BNC)
9318 CONVERSION CABLE (for 9270, 9271, 9272, 9277, 9278 and 9279)
9319 CONVERSION CABLE (for 3273)
9305 TRIGGER CORD
220H PAPER WINDER
3273 CLAMP ON PROBE
3273-50 CLAMP ON PROBE
9018-10 CLAMP ON PROBE (10 to 500 A, 40 Hz to 3 kHz)
9132-10 CLAMP ON PROBE * (20 to 1000 A, 40 Hz to 1 kHz)
9270 CLAMP ON SENSOR * (20 A, 5 Hz to 50 kHz)
9271 CLAMP ON SENSOR * (200 A, 5 Hz to 50 kHz)
9272 CLAMP ON SENSOR * (20/200 A, 5 Hz to 10 kHz)
9277 UNIVERSAL CLAMP ON CT (20 A, DC to 100 kHz)
9278 UNIVERSAL CLAMP ON CT (200 A, DC to 100 kHz)
9279 UNIVERSAL CLAMP ON CT * (500 A, DC to 20 kHz)
9555 SENSOR UNIT * (used with the 9270 to 9272, and the 9277 to 9279)
*: Not complied with the CE marking

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Inspection
 iii
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Safety Notes

DANGER This product is designed to conform to IEC 61010 Safety Standards, and
has been thoroughly tested for safety prior to shipment. However,
mishandling during use could result in injury or death, as well as damage
to the product. Be certain that you understand the instructions and
precautions in the manual before use. We disclaim any responsibility for
accidents or injuries not resulting directly from product defects.

This manual contains information and warnings essential for safe operation of
the product and for maintaining it in safe operating condition. Before using
the product, be sure to carefully read the following safety notes.

Safety symbols

・This symbol is affixed to locations on the equipment where the

operator should consult corresponding topics in this manual
(which are also marked with the symbol) before using relevant
functions of the equipment.
・In the manual, this mark indicates explanations which it is
particularly important that the user read before using the
equipment.

Indicates a grounding terminal.

Indicates AC (Alternating Current).

Indicates DC (Direct Current).

Indicates both DC (Direct Current) and AC (Alternating Current).

Indicates the ON side of the power switch.

Indicates the OFF side of the power switch.

Accuracy
We define measurement tolerances in terms of f.s. (full scale), with the
following meanings:

f.s. (maximum display value or scale length)

The maximum displayable value or scale length. This is usually the name of
the currently selected range.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Safety Notes
 iv
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Conventions used in this manual

The following symbols are used in this Instruction Manual to indicate the
relative importance of cautions and warnings.

DANGER
Indicates that incorrect operation presents extreme danger of
accident resulting in death or serious injury to the user.

Indicates that incorrect operation presents significant danger of

WARNING
accident resulting in death or serious injury to the user.

Indicates that incorrect operation presents possibility of injury to the

CAUTION
user or damage to the equipment.

Denotes items of advice related to performance of the equipment or

NOTE
to its correct operation.

Measurement categories (Overvoltage categories)

This instrument complies with CAT II safety requirements.
To ensure safe operation of measurement instruments, IEC 61010 establishes
safety standards for various electrical environments, categorized as CAT I to
CAT IV, and called measurement categories. These are defined as follows.
CAT : Secondary electrical circuits connected to an AC electrical outlet
through a transformer or similar device.
CAT : Primary electrical circuits in equipment connected to an AC electrical
outlet by a power cord (portable tools, household appliances, etc.)
CAT : Primary electrical circuits of heavy equipment (fixed installations)
connected directly to the distribution panel, and feeders from the
distribution panel to outlets.
CAT : The circuit from the service drop to the service entrance, and to the
power meter and primary overcurrent protection device (distribution
panel).
Higher-numbered categories correspond to electrical environments with
greater momentary energy. So a measurement device designed for CAT III
environments can endure greater momentary energy than a device designed
for CAT II. Using a measurement instrument in an environment designated
with a higher-numbered category than that for which the instrument is rated
could result in a severe accident, and must be carefully avoided.
Never use a CAT I measuring instrument in CAT II, III, or IV environments.
The measurement categories comply with the Overvoltage Categories of the
IEC60664 Standards.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Safety Notes
 v
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Notes on Use

Follow these precautions to ensure safe operation and to obtain the full
benefits of the various functions.

(1) Installation environment

WARNING Do not use the product where it may be exposed to corrosive or

combustible gases. The product may be damaged or cause an explosion.

CAUTION
・This product should be installed and operated indoors only, between 5 and
40℃ and 35 to 80% RH.
・Do not store or use the product where it could be exposed to direct sunlight,
high temperature or humidity, or condensation. Under such conditions, the
product may be damaged and insulation may deteriorate so that it no longer
meets specifications.
・This product is not designed to be entirely water- or dust-proof. To avoid
damage, do not use it in a wet or dusty environment.

(2) Power supply connections

WARNING Before turning the product on, make sure the source voltage matches
that indicated on the product’s power connector. Connection to an
improper supply voltage may damage the product and present an
electrical hazard.
Before making connections, make sure the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER
is turned off. The 8835-01 could be damaged by a spark if it is
connected to a voltage source while its power supply is on.

・Check that the power supply is correct for the rating of the unit. (The AC
fuse is integrated in the unit.)
・The AC power power switch on 8835-01 is for AC power. If DC power is
being supplied and the switch on DC power adapter is set to ON, the 8835-
01 will operate also if the power switch is set to OFF.

(3) Grounding the unit

WARNING To avoid electric shock and ensure safe operation, connect the power
cable to a grounded (3-contact) outlet.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Notes on Use
 vi
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(4) Probe Connection, Measurement Voltage Input

DANGER Maximum input voltage ratings for the 8936 ANALOG UNIT, 8937
VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT, 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT, 8939 STRAIN UNIT 8940
F/V UNIT, 8946 4ch ANALOG UNIT, 8947 CHARGE UNIT and input
terminals of the 8835-01 are shown below. To avoid the risk of electric
shock and damage to the unit, take care not to exceed these ratings.
The maximum rated voltage to earth of the 8936, 8937, 8938, 8939, 8940,
8946 and 8947 (voltage between input terminals and 8835-01 frame
ground, and between inputs of other input units) is shown below. To
avoid the risk of electric shock and damage to the unit, take care that
voltage between channels and between a channel and ground does not
exceed these ratings.
The maximum rated voltage to earth rating applies also if an input
attenuator or similar is used. Ensure that voltage does not exceed these
ratings.
When measuring power line voltages, 8936 or 8938 should only be
connected to the secondary side of a breaker, so the breaker can
prevent an accident if a short circuit occurs. Connections should never
be made to the primary side of a breaker, because unrestricted current
flow could cause a serious accident if a short circuit occurs.
Always use the optional connection cables. Any exposed metal sections
in a connection cable consist a risk of electric shock.

Input/output terminal Maximum input voltage Maximum rated voltage

to earth
8936 inputs 400 VDC max. 370 V AC/DC
8937 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC 30 V rms or 60 VDC
8938 inputs 400 VDC max. 370 V AC/DC
8939 inputs 10 VDC max. 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
8940 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC
30 V rms or 60 VDC (BNC terminal)
(BNC and sensor
connector terminals) Not insulated
(Sensor connector terminal)
8946 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC 30 V rms or 60 VDC
8947 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC 30 V rms or 60 VDC
EXT TRIG
START/STOP -5 to +10 VDC
PRINT/EXT SMPL
Not insulated
TRIG OUT -20 V to +30 VDC
GO 100 mA max.
NG 200 mW max.

The external I/O terminal and the 8835-01 have a common GND.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Notes on Use
 vii
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

DANGER Logic probe input and 8835-01 share the same GND. Separate power
supply sources applied to the testing device and 8835-01 may result in
risk of electric shock and damage to the unit.
Even with the same power supply source, certain ways of wiring may
cause a variance in electric potential sending current that may damage
testing device and 8835-01. The following shows proper wiring to avoid
damage. For details, see Section 2.5.
(1) Before connecting logic probe to testing device, connect grounded
three-core power cord (attachment) to the device to be tested and
8835-01 and supply power from the same outlet.
(2) Before connecting logic probe to device to be tested, connect GND of
device to be tested with 8835-01 functional ground terminal. Make
sure that power is supplied from the same outlet.
When using grabber clips, the 9322’s maximum rated voltage to earth is
1500 V AC/DC; when using alligator clips, it is 1000 VAC/DC. To avoid
electrical shock and possible damage to the unit, never apply voltages
greater than these limits between the input channel terminals and
chassis, or across the inputs of two 9322s.
Maximum input voltage is 1000 VAC/2000 VDC. Do not measure voltage
in excess of these limitations, as doing so may damage the unit or
cause an accident that might result in injury or death.

CAUTION
・Use designated connection cables only. Other cables may interfere with
proper connection and measurement accuracy.
・Maximum charge input for miniature connecter terminal in 8947 CHARGE
UNIT is +, - 500 pC (at range 6 high sensitivity) and +, - 50000 pC (at range
6 low sensitivity).

NOTE Use only the specified connection cord. Using a non-specified cable may result
in incorrect measurements due to poor connection or other reasons.

(5) Replacing the input units (see Section 15.3)

WARNING To avoid electric shock accident, before removing or replacing an input

module, confirm that the instrument is turned off and that the input
cords and power cords are disconnected.
To avoid the danger of electric shock, never operate the product with an
input module removed. To use the product after removing an input
module, install a blank panel over the opening of the removed module.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Notes on Use
 viii
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(6) Recording paper

･ This unit uses a thermal printer. The recording paper supplied has
NOTE
characteristics finely tuned for use with the printer.
Using recording paper of a different specification may not only result in
impaired printing quality, but even prevent the printer from operating.
Always use the HIOKI specified product.
･ Insert the paper with correct orientation (see Section 2.7).

(7) Using a printer

NOTE Avoid using the printer in hot, humid environments, as this can greatly reduce
printer life.

(8) Storing

CAUTION
For shipping or long-term storage, be certain that the recording head is in the
raised position. Otherwise the rollers could be deformed and cause uneven
printing.

(9) Shipping

CAUTION
・Remove the printer paper from the unit. If the paper is left in the unit, paper
support parts may be damaged due to vibrations.
・To avoid damage to the product, be sure to remove the PC card and floppy
disk before shipping.
・Use the original packing materials when reshipping the product, if possible.

(10) Others

NOTE
･ In the event of problems with operation, first refer to Section 16.3,
"Troubleshooting."
･ Carefully read and observe all precautions in this manual.

Preliminary Checks

Before using the product the first time, verify that it operates normally to
ensure that the no damage occurred during storage or shipping. If you find
any damage, contact your dealer or HIOKI representative.

WARNING Before using the product, make sure that the insulation on the cords and
probes is undamaged and that no bare conductors are improperly
exposed. Using the product under such conditions could result in
electrocution. Replace the cords and probes specified by HIOKI.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Notes on Use
 ix
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter Summary
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Contains an overview of the unit and its features.

Chapter 2 Setup and Preparations

Explains how to set the unit up for measurement.

Chapter 3 Operation Steps for Basic Measurement

Explains how to operate the keys and JOG/SHUTTLE control for carrying out
basic measurement functions.

Chapter 4 Memory Recorder Function Settings

Explains how to use the memory recorder functions of the unit.

Chapter 5 Recorder Function Settings

Explains how to use the recorder functions of the unit.

Chapter 6 RMS Recorder Function Settings

Explains how to use the RMS recorder functions of the unit.

Chapter 7 Input Channel Settings (For all functions)

Explains how to make settings using the channel setting screen.

Chapter 8 Trigger Functions

Explains how to use the trigger functions of the unit.

Chapter 9 System Screen Settings

Explains how to make settings using the system setting screen.

Chapter 10 Printout of Waveform Data

Explains how to print out waveform data and how to read printed charts.

Chapter 11 Using the A/B Cursors / Waveform Scrolling

Explains how to use the A/B cursors and how to perform waveform scrolling.

Chapter 12 External Input/Output Connectors / Key Lock Function

Gives specifications and usage details of the external input/output connectors,
and explains how to use the key lock function.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Chapter Summary
 x
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 13 Storing, Recalling and Deleting Waveform Data and Measurement

Settings
Explains how to store, recall, and delete waveform data and measurement
settings.

Chapter 14 Specifications
Contains general specifications and detailed function specifications.

Chapter 15 Logic Input Section and Analog Input Unit

Contains specifications and precautions for logic input section and input
amplifier units.

Chapter 16 Maintenance
Describes maintenance procedures.

Appendix
Contains information that is necessary for using this unit, including a
description of error messages and a glossary.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Chapter Summary
 1
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 1 2
Product Overview 3

5
1.1 Major Features
6
(1) Easy to read, TFT color display
The 6.4-inch TFT color screen with a resolution of 640 × 480 dots shows all
information at a glance.
7
(2) Three functions to meet a huge range of applications
・Memory recorder with up to 1 μs (all channels simultaneously) (1 MS/s) 8
・Real-time recording capability to paper in recorder function
・RMS recorder function for recording rms values of AC power supply lines and
DC sources.
9
(3) Flexible trigger function
・Digital trigger circuit
・Trigger types: level trigger, window-in trigger, window-out trigger, voltage
10
drop trigger, RMS level trigger, logic trigger

11
(4) Built-in thermal printer
・Thermal line head
・The built-in printer delivers waveform printouts on the spot.
・The printer can also be used to print screen shots and parameter information.
12

(5) 1 μs (1 MS/s) recording capability 13

Using the 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT (unbalanced), waveform recording can be
performed in up to 8 channels with 12-bit resolution.

14
(6) Simple function key interface (GUI)
Thanks to its GUI-inspired design using large function key graphics, the unit
is easy to set up and operate. A

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.1 Major Features
 2
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(7) On-line help

On-line help guides the user through operation steps and various functions.

(8) Scaling function

By setting the physical amount and the unit to be used for 1 V input, the
measurement result can be converted into any desired scale.

(9) Additional recording function

When enabled, the memory is regarded as printer paper.
New data is recorded without erasing the previous data.

(10) Floating input units

The analog inputs are floating, and so each input can be connected to its own
independent potentials.

(11) Portable
The 8835-01 weighs only 4.5 kg and has an A4-size form factor, making it
extremely portable.

(12) Floppy disk, PC card (external storage)

Waveform data and measurement settings can be stored on floppy disk or PC
card.

(13) Easy-to-use control panel

Measurement conditions can be easily set while looking at the color display.
Operation keys are few, making setting easy.

(14) External interface

The PC card slot is compatible with GP-IB, RS-232C and 10BASE-T LAN
cards. Remote control is possible.

(15) Dual-language capability

Display language is switchable between Japanese and English.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.1 Major Features
 3
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Enhancements over the 8835 1

(1) Supports the 8946 4ch ANALOG UNIT
The 8946 4ch ANALOG UNIT, which is not compatible with the Model 8835,
can be used to provide up to eight analog measurement channels with the 2
8835-01.
8835 Max 4 analog channels and 16 logic channels
8835-01 Max 8 analog channels and 16 logic channels
3

(2) Supports the current measurement mode of the 8940 F/V UNIT 4
Current measurement modes not available with the 8835 can be used. The
available 8940 measurement modes are as follows.
5
8835 (1) Frequency, (2) Count, (3) Pulse duty ratio, (4) Voltage
8835-01 (1) Frequency, (2) Count, (3) Pulse duty ratio, (4) Voltage (5) Current
6
(3) Eight times the memory capacity of the 8835

The installed memory capacity of the 8835-01 is eight times that of the 8835. 7
8835 Installed Memory: 500K words (expandable to 2M words)
8835-01 Installed Memory: 4M words (not expandable)
8
(4) External sampling provided as standard
9
The external sampling function is provided as standard with the 8835-01.
Specification Changes from the 8835

10
Specification Changes from the 8835
Waveform backup time for the 8835-01 is shorter than for the 8835. When
power is turned off after being on for more than two minutes, the waveforms 11
are backed up for about one hour.
8835 Waveform: Approx. 10 years, Settings: Approx. 10 years (at 25℃)
8835-01 Waveform: Approx. 1 hour, Settings: Approx. 10 years (at 25℃)
12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.1 Major Features
 4
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1.2 Basic and Advanced Versions

This section explains the features of the basic version and the advanced
version. It is possible to upgrade the basic version to the advanced version,
using the feature upgrade disk available as an option.

1.2.1 Additional Features

The following features and functions can be added to the basic version.

Measurement functions
Measurement functions are listed in the table below.
Measurement function Feature Version
Memory recorder High-speed data saving Basic version
Recorder Real time recording
RMS recorder For commercial power supplies
Recorder & Memory Real time recording & High- Advanced version
speed data saving (incorporates the
basic version)
FFT Frequency analysis

The basic version incorporates the "memory recorder function", "recorder

function", and "RMS recorder function". In addition to these functions, the
advanced version incorporates "recorder & memory" and the "FFT function".

Computation functions
Waveform processing calculation:
Arithmetic operations, absolute value, exponents, common logarithms, moving
average, 1st and 2nd derivatives, 1st and 2nd integrals, time axis parallel
shift
Averaging function:
Additive averaging, exponential averaging (2, 4, 8 to 256 samples) (memory
recorder)
Simple averaging, exponential averaging, peak hold (2, 4, 8 to 4096 samples)
(FFT)

Waveform decision function

Waveform area decision:
Waveform decision based on reference area for Y-T waveform, X-Y waveform,
or FFT results
Waveform parameter decision:
Decision based on setting minimum and maximum values for waveform
parameter calculation results

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.2 Basic and Advanced Versions
 5
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Memory segmentation function 1

Memory can be segmented among channels. (255 segments)
Sequential save function
This function does not update the display indication or record data on the 2
printer or external storage. Input signal capture is carried out continuously
using the trigger.
Multi-block function 3
Waveform data can be stored in a selected block.
Waveform data in specified blocks can be superimposed.
4

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.2 Basic and Advanced Versions
 6
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1.3 Identification of Controls and Indicators

Controls and indicators of the unit are listed on the following pages, along
with a simple explanation of their function.

16 15 14 7 4 1 2 3

6
8

9
17
10

11

12

18
13
19

20 21 22 23

Front panel

1 STATUS key Causes the display to show the STATUS screen which
serves for setting most measurement parameters.
2 CHAN key Causes the display to show the CHANNEL screen which
serves for making input channel settings.
3 DISP key Causes the display to show measurement and analysis
results.
4 SYSTEM key Causes the display to show the SYSTEM screen which
serves for making system-wide settings such as for the
scaling function.
5 FILE key Causes the display to show the FILE screen which
serves for reading, storing, etc. the waveform data etc.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.3 Identification of Controls and Indicators
 7
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6 HELP key Provides on-line help. 1

7 PRINT key Serves to print out stored waveforms.
8 COPY key Serves to print out a hard copy of the current screen
display.
2
9 FEED key Causes the printer paper to advance for as long as the
key is pressed.
3
10 CURSOR keys These keys serve to move the flashing cursor in the four
directions.
Open auto range function. 4
11 Select key Selects the function that is controlled by the
JOG/SHUTTLE knob. With each push of the key, the
functions is toggled between WAVE and A.B CSR. The 5
respective LED lights up.
12 JOG key Rotary control knob that serves to change values, move
the A/B cursors, and scroll the waveform. 6
13 SHUTTLE key Concentric ring that serves to move the A/B cursors, and
to scroll the waveform. The speed of movement is
proportional to the rotation angle. 7
14 MANU TRIG key Serves to cause manual triggering.
15 VIEW key Serves to indicate the position of the currently displayed 8
screen information in relation to the entire recording
length.
16 F1 - F5 keys Serve to select setting items. 9
17 LCD screen
18 START key Initiates the measurement and analysis. During
measurement, the LED above the key is lit.
10
19 STOP key Stops measurement and analysis.
20 INPUT RANGE key Serves to set the voltage axis range for each channel. 11
21 POSITION key Serves to set the zero position for each channel.
22 CH SELECT key Switches selected channel window.
12
23 TIME/DIV key Serves to set the speed for inputting and storing the
input signal.
13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.3 Identification of Controls and Indicators
 8
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Left side view

8
10

4 2 3 15 9 11 12 16 14 13

Right side view

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.3 Identification of Controls and Indicators
 9
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1 Printer
2 AC POWER switch Serves to turn the unit on and off.
3 Functional ground Connects to the earth.
terminal (GND)
4 AC connector The supplied power cord must be plugged in here.
5 Input unit slots These slots accept input units.
6 Analog input connector (on ANALOG UNIT) Unbalanced analog input
7 Ventilation slots
8 Fastening screw Secures the plug-in unit.
9 Trigger connectors Can be used to synchronize multiple units, using the
EXT TRIG input and TRIG OUT output.
10 KEY LOCK switch When this switch is set to ON, all keys of the 8835-01
are inactive. The key lock condition is maintained also
when the power is switched off and on again.
11 External start/stop Start and stop operation can be controlled via external
terminals signals.
12 External print/ Controls printing or sampling via external signals.
sampling terminal Switches automatically with time axis range settings.
13 NG evaluation output When the waveform evaluation based on waveform
terminal parameters has resulted in NG, a signal is output from
this terminal.
14 GO evaluation output When the waveform evaluation based on waveform
terminal parameters has resulted in GO, a signal is output from
this terminal.
15 DC power supply Allows use of an external DC source to power the unit
connector (with dedicated DC POWER ADAPTER).
16 Ground terminal Common GND ( 3 Function ground terminal) with the
(GND) 8835-01. Use with 11 to 14 terminals.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.3 Identification of Controls and Indicators
 10
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2 1

Top view

Bottom view

1 Ventilation slots
2 Handle Serves for transporting the 8835-01.
3 Logic probe connectors Input connector for the logic input section, designed for
the dedicate logic probes (CH A, CH B, CH C, CH D).
4 Ventilation slots
5 Tilt support

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1.3 Identification of Controls and Indicators
 11
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 2 2
Installation and Preparation 3

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
 12
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.1 Installation of the Unit

Installation orientation
Install the unit on a flat, level surface.

The unit can also be propped up at an angle, using the stand.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.1 Installation of the Unit
 13
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Ambient conditions 1
Temperature 5 to 40℃, 23±5℃ recommended for high-precision
measurements
Humidity 35 to 80%RH (no condensation); 50±10%RH (no 2
condensation) recommended for high-precision measurements
Ventilation Take care not to block the ventilation openings and assure
proper ventilation. When using the unit in an upright 3
position, take care not to block the openings on the bottom, as
it could overheat and be damaged, or cause a fire.
Ventilation 4

NOTE Avoid the following locations: 9

・Subject to direct sunlight
・Subject to high levels of dust, steam, or corrosive gases
(Avoid using the equipment in an environment containing corrosive gases
(e.g., H2S, SO2, NI2, and CI2) or substances that generate harmful gasses
10
(e.g., organic silicones, cyanides, and formalins)).
・Subject to vibrations
・In the vicinity of equipment generating strong electromagnetic fields 11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.1 Installation of the Unit
 14
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.2 Power Supply and Ground Connection

WARNING Take care never to exceed the power supply ratings given below, to avoid
the risk of electric shock and damage to the unit.

NOTE
The fuse is incorporated in power supply. It is not user-replaceable. If a
problem is found, contact your dealer or HIOKI representative.

Power supply, fuse

Rated power supply voltage 100 to 120 V AC / 200 to 240 V AC
(auto-switching)
(Voltage fluctuations of 10% from the rated
supply voltage are taken into account.)
Rated AC power supply frequency 50/60 Hz
Fuses AC incorporated in power supply
(not user-replaceable)

Grounding

WARNING The 8835-01 has no protective ground terminal, but is intended to be

connected to a ground wire via the grounded three-core power cord
supplied. To avoid electric shock and ensure safe operation, connect the
power cable to a grounded (3-contact) outlet.

・When the AC outlet is of the grounded three-pin type:

Use the grounded three-core power cord supplied. The unit will be grounded
automatically.
・When the AC outlet is not of the grounded three-pin type:
Use the ground adapter supplied. In this case, be absolutely sure to connect
the green ground wire which protrudes from the adapter to a ground line,
and connect the power cord supplied.

Check the following points before connecting the unit to a power supply:
・The power supply matches the ratings shown above.
・The AC power switch of the 8835-01 and the switch of the 9439 DC POWER
ADAPTER are set to OFF.
・Use only the supplied AC power cord.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.2 Power Supply and Ground Connection
 15
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Connecting the unit to a power supply and grounding it: 1

(1) AC power supply

2
WARNING Make sure that the AC power switch of the 8835-01 is set to OFF.
3
1. Verify that the AC power switch of the 8845 is set to OFF.
2. Plug the grounded three-core power cord supplied into the AC power connector
on the right side of the 8835-01. 4
3. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet corresponding to the rating of the 8835-
01.
5
Rated voltage:
100 - 120 V AC / 200 - 240 V AC AC power switch

Rated line frequency:

6
AC power connector
50/60 Hz

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.2 Power Supply and Ground Connection
 16
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(2) DC power supply

DANGER Before connecting the unit to a battery or other DC source, make sure
that the switch of the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER is set to OFF. If the
switch is ON, there is a risk of sparks, and the unit may be damaged.

WARNING Before making connections, make sure the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER
is turned off. The 8835-01 could be damaged by a spark if it is
connected to a voltage source while its power supply is on.
The rated supply voltage of the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER is 10 to
28 VDC. If an attempt is made to use an improper supply voltage, there
is danger of damage to this unit and of life-threatening risk to the
operator.
The 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER is a power supply and therefore
generates heat. Do not place any object on this equipment nor force it
in to a narrow area for operation.
When connecting the input cable of the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER,
take care not to mix up the red (+) and black (-) leads. If polarity is
reversed, the 9439 may be damaged.
When wishing to extend DC cable, use a cable of identical or better
rating as the input cable.
The 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER an option specifically designed for the
MEMORY HiCORDER 8835-01. Do not connect this adapter to any other
products.
The switch on the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER doubles as the breaker.
Accordingly, ensure that there is ample space to operate the switch.

1. Verify that the switch of the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER is set to OFF.
2. Align the ridge of the connector on the unit with the groove in the plug, insert
the plug fully and rotate it to fix it firmly.
3. Connect the red input cable to the positive side (+) and the black input cable
to the negative side (-) of the power supply.
4. The red LED lights while the unit is operating (outputting).
5. To remove the plug of the DC cable, rotate it as shown in the illustration.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.2 Power Supply and Ground Connection
 17
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2
LED
3

4
Rated voltage: 10 to 28 V DC
NOTE ･ This unit is not equipped to charge an external battery.
･ When using a battery, take care not to deplete it completely.
5
･ When an overcurrent or overvoltage is detected in the output, this
equipment cuts off the output. In such an event, turn off the 9439 DC
POWER ADAPTER, wait for approximately one minute, and then turn the
6
adapter on again.
･ If an overcurrent flows through the input cord for any reason, this
equipment is automatically turned off to stop operation. 7
･ Estimated battery operation hours (at room temperature)
Battery type: 12 V, 38 Ah, fully charged
PC card not installed 8
Operation condition 8936 installed 8940 installed 8940 2 ch
in 4 channels in 4 channels current testing
Printer not used (trigger waiting) Approx. 12 h Approx. 6 h Approx. 8 h 9
Printer used
Recorder function Approx. 5 h Approx. 4 h
500 ms/DIV, all store
10
Actual running time may differ, depending on battery age, charge condition,
ambient temperature, and other factors.
･ Input cable specifications
Permissible current: 15 A
11
Functional ground terminal
12

13

14
Functional ground terminal
When measuring in a "noisy" environment, noiseproofing can be improved by A
grounding the functional ground terminal.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.2 Power Supply and Ground Connection
 18
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.3 Power On/Off

(1) Check before power-on
・Unit is correctly installed ( Section 2.1).
・Power cord is correctly connected and unit is properly grounded ( Section
2.2).
(2) Power switch on/off
・There is no need for the user to manually select AC or DC power.
・When both AC and DC power are connected, AC power has priority.
・When AC power is disconnected (or falls under 90 V), the 8835-01
automatically switches to DC. (If the switch of the 9439 is set to ON, the
8835-01 automatically switches to DC even if AC power is disconnected.)

AC power switch

(3) To assure high measurement precision

Turn the unit on and let it warm up for about 30 minutes, to allow internal
temperature to fully stabilize. Then carry out zero adjustment (see Section
7.3.7) and start the measurement.
(4) Power-off
When the unit is turned off, it memorizes the currently used settings and
reestablishes the same settings the next time the unit is turned on again.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.3 Power On/Off
 19
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.4 Probe Connection

2.4.1 8936 ANALOG UNIT, 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT and

8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT

WARNING Never connect the probe to the 8835-01 while the probe is already
connected to the measurement object. Otherwise there is a risk of
electric shock.
Use only the specified connection cables. An insulated BNC connector
is used for the specified connection cables to prevent electric shock. If
a metal BNC connector is used, electric shock may result, as the input
L-terminal and the metal part of the BNC connector will have the same
potential.

CAUTION
When disconnecting the BNC connector, be sure to release the lock before
pulling off the connector. Forcibly pulling the connector without releasing the
lock, or pulling on the cable, can damage the connector.

NOTE Use only the specified connection cables. Using a non-specified cable may
result in incorrect measurements due to poor connection or other reasons.
In addition, the BNC connector may be damaged.
For analog input connection, use optional 9197, 9198 CONNECTION CORDs.
Use of any other cables may result in risk of electric shock.
For connecting 8946, use 9198 CONNECTION CORD.

9197 CONNECTION CORD 9198 CONNECTION CORD 9217 CONNECTION CORD

（Maximum input voltage: 500 V） （Maximum input voltage: 300 V） （Maximum input voltage: 300 V）

Connecting to the main unit

1. Align the BNC connector with the guide groove of the unit input connector,
and turn clockwise while pressing in to lock the connector.
2. To remove from the unit, turn the BNC connector counterclockwise to release
the lock, then pull it.

Connector ridge

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.4 Probe Connection
 20
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Setting Channels in 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT

When using 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT, input channels are not numbered in
numeric order as 1,2,3,4. Channel number is determined by connection to
units. (See below.) To verify position of channels, see Channel Guide.

1 2 5 6
3 4 7 8

2.4.2 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT

WARNING Never connect the connection cable to the 8835-01 while the connection
cable is already connected to the measurement object. Otherwise there
is a risk of electric shock.
A common GND is used for voltage and temperature input on all
channels. Never input voltage and temperature simultaneously, since
doing so could result in damage to the sample being tested.
When an uninsulated thermocouple is used to measure temperature at a
point carrying electric potential, take care not to touch the terminals.
Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock.
The voltage and temperature input and the 8835-01 frame are insulated.

CAUTION
・When disconnecting the BNC connector, be sure to release the lock before
pulling off the connector. Forcibly pulling the connector without releasing the
lock, or pulling on the cable, can damage the connector.
・Use a screwdriver or similar to attach and remove the thermocouple.

Connection cable connection (Voltage measurement)

For measuring voltage with 8937, use 9198 CONNECTION CORD.
1. Align the BNC connector with the guide groove of the unit input connector,
and turn clockwise while pressing in to lock the connector.
2. To remove from the unit, turn the BNC connector counterclockwise to release
the lock, then pull it.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.4 Probe Connection
 21
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Thermocouple connection (Temperature measurement)

1. Strip off the insulation as shown in the illustration.
25 mm
Outer insulation (mantle)
10 mm

Thermocouple leads
Inner insulation
2. Push the tab with a screwdriver or similar.
3. While keeping the tab depressed, insert a stripped thermocouple into the
connector openings.
4. Release the tab to lock the thermocouple.
5. While keeping the tab depressed, remove the thermocouple.

NOTE
・The press-button type terminal board of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT is
only for connection to a thermocouple. Do not use thermocouples other than
the specified types (K, J, E, T, N, R, S, B).
・If the thermocouple is connected in reverse, the temperature reading will
not be correct.
・If the temperature input terminal is exposed to a strong draft, loss of
thermal equilibrium at the input may result in measurement error. When
taking measurements under such conditions, arrange the unit in such a
manner that the input terminal is protected for direct exposure to drafts.
・If ambient temperature changes suddenly, loss of thermal equilibrium can
result in measurement error. When this occurs, allow the unit to acclimate
to the new temperature for about one hour, then take measurements after
thermal equilibrium is reached.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.4 Probe Connection
 22
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.4.3 8939 STRAIN UNIT

CAUTION
・Connect only the sensor to the conversion cable supplied with the 8939
STRAIN UNIT.
・To disconnect the conversion cable, always unlock the plug and pull out the
cable.

Connecting to the main unit

1. Align the projection on the unit connector with the cutout on the conversion
cable, and insert the plug into the connector.
2. Turn the fixing guide (the colored area in the figure below) so that it engages
with the connector guides on the unit, fully insert the fixing guide, and turn it
clockwise to lock the plug.
3. To remove the conversion cable from the unit, turn the fixing guide (the
colored area in the figure below) counterclockwise to unlock the plug, and pull
out the plug.

Cutout on the conversion cable

Fixing guide
Projection on the unit connector
Connector ridge

Connector
＋

Bridge voltage：2 V
(Apply voltage)

− Input voltage ＋

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.4 Probe Connection
 23
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.4.4 8940 F/V UNIT

To avoid electrical accidents, make sure that the MEMORY HiCORDER

DANGER
and the equipment being measured are powered off before making
connections. Do not make connections with the power turned on.
When using the 9318 or 9319 CONVERSION CABLE, there is no isolation
between GND the MEMORY HiCORDER and GND of the clamp on
sensor/probe. Exercise extreme care in connection to avoid possible
damage to the equipment or personal injury.
When connecting 8940 F/V UNIT to 3273 or 3273-50, and conductors
being measured carry in excess of the safe voltage level (SELV-E) and
not more than 300 V, to prevent short circuits and electric shock while
the core section is open, make sure that conductors to be measured
are insulated with material conforming to (1) Overvoltage Category l, (2)
Double Insulation (Reinforced insulation) Requirements for Working
Voltage of 300 V, and (3) Pollution Degree 2. For safeties sake, never
use this sensor on bare conductors. The core and shield case are not
insulated.
When connecting 8940 F/V UNIT to 3273 or 3273-50, do not damage
insulation sheathing on testing device.
Refer to the following standards regarding the meanings of underlined
terms. IEC 61010-1, IEC 61010-2-031, IEC 61010-2-032

When using the clamp-on sensor or clamp-on probe, be sure to use the
WARNING optional 9318 or 9319 CONVERSION CABLE.

CAUTION
・When disconnecting the BNC connector, be sure to release the lock before
pulling off the connector. Forcibly pulling the connector without releasing the
lock, or pulling on the cable, can damage the connector.
・When using the Model 3273-50 with the 8940, bear in mind that the
maximum input of the 3273-50 is 15 Arms. Exceeding this measurement
level could damage the instrument.

Connection cable connection (Frequency, count, pulse duty ratio and voltage measurement)
Use the optional 9198 CONNECTION CORD for
Groove of the BNC
connection to the F/V UNIT.
1. Align the BNC connector with the guide groove of the
8826 input connector, and turn clockwise while pressing
Connector guide in to lock the connector.
2. To remove from the unit, turn the BNC connector
counterclockwise to release the lock, then pull it.

Clamp connection (Current measurement)

The following clamp-on sensors and clamp-on probes can be connected using
the 9318 and 9319 CONVERSION CORDs.
9318：9270, 9271, 9272, 9277, 9278, 9279, 9319：3273

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.4 Probe Connection
 24
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Connecting to 9318 CONVERSION CABLE

1. Align the groove on the conversion cable plug with the sensor connector on the
F/V unit and push inward until the connector locks into place.
2. Align the groove on the conversion cable connector with the adapted clamp on
sensor plug and push inward until the connector locks into place.
3. To unplug the cables, slide the lock ring on each plug outward to unlock it,
then pull out the plug. When disconnecting the connector and the plug, hold
the connector or the plug, and pull carefully. Pulling on the cable instead of
the connector or the plug may damage the connector and cable.

Unit’s sensor connector

Conversion cable plug

Conversion cable connector

Adapted clamp’s plug

Connecting to 9319 CONVERSION CABLE

1. Align the groove on the 3273 or 3273-50*1 CLAMP ON PROBE’s termination
connector with the pin on the BNC connector on the F/V unit, then slide the
termination connector over the BNC connector and turn to lock it in place.
2. Align the groove on the conversion cable plug with the sensor connector on the
F/V unit and push inward until the connector locks into place.
3. To unplug the cables, unlock the conversion cable connector and the power
plug on the 3273 or 3273-50*1 before unplugging the cable.
4. Slide the lock ring on each plug outward to unlock it, then pull out the plug.
When disconnecting the connector and the plug, hold the connector or the
plug, and pull carefully. Pulling on the cable instead of the connector or the
plug may damage the connector and cable.
Unit’s BNC connector
3273 or 3273-50*1 connector

Unit’s sensor
connector

Conversion
cable plug

*1: When using the Model 3273-50 with the 8940, bear in mind that the maximum
input of the 3273-50 is 15 Arms.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.4 Probe Connection
 25
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.4.5 8947 CHARGE UNIT

WARNING DO NOT connect connection cable to the 8947 CHARGE UNIT when
connected to measuring unit to avoid risk of electric shock.
BNC terminal and miniature connecter terminal of each channel share
same GND. Do not connect both at once.
During measuring with measurement mode set to PREAMP or when
level monitor function is in use, electric current (2 mA, +15 V) output is
active. In order to avoid risk of electric shock and damage to testing
device, examine channel mode for connecting sensor and probe to BNC
terminal and either cancel PREAMP or shut down power.
Voltage measurement and internal acceleration pick up sensor share
same terminal. Make sure to check measurement mode before
measuring.
Before using internal acceleration pickup sensor, verify that sensor
ratingis compatible with 8947 CHARGE UNIT rated output (2 mA, +15 V).
Use of Non compatible sensor may cause damage to sensor.

Connection cable connection (Preamp and voltage measurement)

In preamp mode when connecting unit with pick-up sensor, match BNC cable
to BNC connector.
1. Align the BNC connector with the guide groove of the unit input connector,
and turn clockwise while pressing in to lock the connector. (For connecting
8947, use 9198 CONNECTION CORD.)
2. To remove from the unit, turn the BNC connector counterclockwise to release
the lock, then pull it.

Connector ridge

Miniature connecter connection (Charge mode)

For charge testing when connecting unit with pick-up sensor, match cable
connecter to miniature connecter. (miniature connecter terminal 10-32)
1. Plug miniature connecter cable into the cable connecter on the unit.
Tighten the connecter by turning clockwise.
2. To remove connecter, turn the connecter counterclockwise.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.4 Probe Connection
 26
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.5 Logic Probe Connection

DANGER Logic probe input and 8835-01 share the same GND. Separate power
supply sources applied to the testing device and 8835-01 may result in
risk of electric shock and damage to the unit.
Even with the same power supply source, certain ways of wiring may
cause a variance in electric potential sending current that may damage
testing device and 8835-01. The following shows proper wiring to avoid
damage.
(1) Before connecting logic probe to testing device, connect grounded
three-core power cord (attachment) to the device to be tested and 8835-
01 and supply power from the same outlet (see fig. 1).
(2) Before connecting logic probe to device to be tested, connect GND of
device to be tested with 8835-01 functional ground terminal (see fig. 2).
Make sure that power is supplied from the same outlet.
For the functional ground terminal, see Section 2.2.

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Testing Testing
device 8835-01 device 8835-01

GND
Functional
ground terminal
Make sure that power is supplied from
the same outlet.

Power

Earth
Outlet

Connecting to the main unit

Connect the probe by aligning the groove on the plug with the ridge on the
connector.

Groove

NOTE
・If no logic probe is connected, the corresponding logic waveform is displayed
on the screen at high level.
・For the 9320 and 9321 LOGIC PROBEs, carefully read the documentations
supplied with them.
・Do not connect logic probes other than supplied by HIOKI to the logic
inputs.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.5 Logic Probe Connection
 27
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.6 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE Connection

DANGER When using grabber clips, the 9322’s maximum rated voltage to earth is
1500 VAC/DC; when using alligator clips, it is 1000 V AC/DC. To avoid
electrical shock and possible damage to the unit, never apply voltages
greater than these limits between the input channel terminals and
chassis, or across the inputs of two 9322s.
Maximum input voltage is 1000 VAC/2000 VDC. Do not measure voltage
in excess of these limitations, as doing so may damage the unit or
cause an accident that might result in injury or death.

9322 is a differential probe that connects to input of 8835-01 MEMORY

HiCORDER input unit. For more details, refer to its instruction manual.

Grabber clips

Alligator clips

2.7 Loading Recoding Paper

1. Press the stock cover and open it.

Stock cover

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.6 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE Connection
 28
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2. Raise the head up/down lever.

Head up/down
lever

Printer exit slot

3. Insert the attachments into the ends of the roll of recording paper and set
the paper into its holder.

Holder

9221 Attachment
RECORDING PAPER

4. Insert the leading edge of the recording paper from above into the gap
behind the printer roller, and pull it out to the other side.

Printer roller

5. Pull the end of the recording paper out at least 10 cm, and make sure that
it is positioned quite straight.
6. Put down the head up/down lever.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.7 Loading Recoding Paper
 29
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7. Pull the recording paper to the outside through the printer exit slot in the
stock cover.
Head up/down
lever

8. Close the stock cover, and finish by tearing off the recording paper against
the edge of the printer exit slot.

NOTE
･ Always put the unit in the head up condition when it is to be transported or if
it is to be stored for a long period of time. If the unit is left to lie in the state
where the roller is being subjected to pressure by the head, then the roller
may become deformed or the characters may become uneven.
･ Particularly care should be taken not to put the recording paper in back to
front by mistake, because if this happens the waveform cannot be drawn.
･ Printing is not possible if the recording paper is loaded wrong-side up.
･ Do not insert it into the gap between the roller and the black sheet metal
portion.
･ Refer to the illustration to make sure that the correct side of the recording
paper is facing up.
･ Do this very carefully, because if the recording paper is slanted with respect to
the roller there is a danger that later a paper jam will occur.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.7 Loading Recoding Paper
 30
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.8 Storage and Handling Precautions

Store rolls of thermal paper at no more than 40℃.

The paper will change color if exposed to light over a long period, so do not
unwrap a roll of paper until you are ready to use it.

Storing data recordings

As the recording paper is thermally sensitive, be aware of the following points:
・To avoid paper discoloration, do not expose it to direct sunlight, and store at
no more than 40℃ and 90% RH.
・For permanent storage of important recorded data, photocopy the recording
paper.
・If the thermal paper is exposed to an organic solvent such as alcohol or
ketone, it may no longer develop properly, and recorded data may fade.
・Also, the thermal recording paper is ruined by contact with wet Daizo copy
paper.

Direct sunlight Organic solvent

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.8 Storage and Handling Precautions
 31
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.9 Notes on Measurement

DANGER Maximum input voltage ratings for the 8936 ANALOG UNIT, 8937
VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT, 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT, 8939 STRAIN UNIT 8940
F/V UNIT, 8946 4ch ANALOG UNIT, 8947 CHARGE UNIT and input
terminals of the 8835-01 are shown below. To avoid the risk of electric
shock and damage to the unit, take care not to exceed these ratings.
The maximum rated voltage to earth of the 8936, 8937, 8938, 8939, 8940,
8946 and 8947 (voltage between input terminals and 8835-01 frame
ground, and between inputs of other input units) is shown below. To
avoid the risk of electric shock and damage to the unit, take care that
voltage between channels and between a channel and ground does not
exceed these ratings.
The maximum rated voltage to earth rating applies also if an input
attenuator or similar is used. Ensure that voltage does not exceed these
ratings.
When measuring power line voltages, 8936 or 8938 should only be
connected to the secondary side of a breaker, so the breaker can
prevent an accident if a short circuit occurs. Connections should never
be made to the primary side of a breaker, because unrestricted current
flow could cause a serious accident if a short circuit occurs.

Input/output terminal Maximum input voltage Maximum rated voltage

to earth
8936 inputs 400 VDC max. 370 V AC/DC
8937 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC 30 V rms or 60 VDC
8938 inputs 400 VDC max. 370 V AC/DC
8939 inputs 10 VDC max. 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
8940 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC
30 V rms or 60 VDC (BNC terminal)
(BNC and sensor
connector terminals) Not insulated
(Sensor connector terminal)
8946 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC 30 V rms or 60 VDC
8947 inputs 30 V rms or 60 VDC 30 V rms or 60 VDC
EXT TRIG
START/STOP -5 to +10 VDC
PRINT/EXT SMPL
Not insulated
TRIG OUT -20 V to +30 VDC
GO 100 mA max.
NG 200 mW max.

The external I/O terminal and the 8835-01 have a common GND.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.9 Notes on Measurement
 32
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

DANGER In order to avoid accidents from electric shock, before removing or

replacing an input unit, check that the connection cables are
disconnected, turn off the power, and remove the power cable.
Normally keep all input units installed permanently. If a unit is not fitted,
it must be replaced by a blanking panel. If the unit is operated with an
input unit not in place it poses a shock hazard.
When using grabber clips, the 9322’s maximum rated voltage to earth is
1500 V AC/DC; when using alligator clips, it is 1000 V AC/DC. To avoid
electrical shock and possible damage to the unit, never apply voltages
greater than these limits between the input channel terminals and
chassis, or across the inputs of two 9322s.
Maximum input voltage is 1000 VAC/2000 VDC. Do not measure voltage
in excess of these limitations, as doing so may damage the unit or
cause an accident that might result in injury or death.

WARNING Before using the product, make sure that the insulation on the connection
cords is undamaged and that no bare conductors are improperly
exposed. Using the product under such conditions could result in
electrocution. Replace the connection cords with the specified HIOKI
Model 9197 or 9198.

CAUTION
・When making measurements on an AC power line for example, using a
voltage transformer, be sure to connect the voltage transformer ground
terminal to ground.
・Maximum charge input for miniature connecter terminal in 8947 CHARGE
UNIT is +, - 500 pC (at range 6 high sensitivity) and +, - 50000 pC (at range
6 low sensitivity).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.9 Notes on Measurement
 33
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2.9.1 Using a Voltage Transformer

When making measurements on an AC power line for example, using a
voltage transformer, be sure to connect the voltage transformer ground
terminal to ground.

When the voltage transformer has a ground terminal

8835-01 8936 or Ｈ
8938 Ｌ
GND terminal PT Input

Voltage transformer
(PT) ground terminal
Ground

When the voltage transformer has no ground terminal

8835-01 8936 or Ｈ
8938 Ｌ
GND terminal PT Input

Ground

2.9.2 Maximum Input Voltage

8936 ANALOG UNIT, 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT
8835-01 8936 or H 400 VDC max.
8938 Ｌ 370 VAC, DC
GND 370 VAC, DC

8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT, 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT

8835-01 8937 H 30 Vrms or 60 VDC 30 Vrms or
8946 Ｌ
GND 30 Vrms or 60 VDC 60 VDC

8939 STRAIN UNIT

8835-01 8939 H 10 VDC max. 30 Vrms or
Ｌ
GND 30 Vrms or 60 VDC 60 VDC

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.9 Notes on Measurement
 34
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8940 F/V UNIT

8835-01 Sensor H
connector 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
Ｌ
8940
H 30 Vrms or DC60 V
BNC 30 Vrms or
Ｌ
GND 30 Vrms or DC60 V 60 VDC

8947 CHARGE UNIT

8835-01 BNC H 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
Ｌ
8947 30 Vrms or
Common
Miniature H 60 VDC
connector Ｌ ＊
GND 30 Vrms or 60 VDC

＊: +, - 500 pC (at range 6 high sensitivity),

+, - 50000 pC (at range 6 low sensitivity)

Difference between "370 V AC, DC" and "400 V DC max." indication

370 V AC, DC: Rms value is displayed.
400 V DC max.: Instantaneous value is displayed.
The maximum input voltage (400 V DC max.) is defined as the superposition
of DC component and AC peak, as shown in the figure below.
AC DC DC+AC
+400 V DC

-400 V DC

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
2.9 Notes on Measurement
 35
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 3 2
Basic Operation and 3
Measurement
4

3.1 Basic Operation 6

This section explains basic steps and settings for measurement.
7
3.1.1 Basic Display Operation
8
STATUS key CHAN key DISP key

10
SYSTEM key HELP key

FILE key
11
STATUS key Calls up the STATUS screen.
Serves to switch pages of the STATUS screen.
Serves to make main settings for various functions on the
12
STATUS screen.

CHAN key Calls up the CHANNEL screen. 13

Serves to set voltage axis range, zero position, etc. for input
channels.
Serves to switch pages of the CHANNEL screen. 14
Using the variable function, you can adjust size and position
of waveform display as desired, even without changing the
range or position settings. A
DISP key Calls up the display screen.
Serves to display and observe waveforms.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.1 Basic Operation
 36
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

SYSTEM key Calls up the SYSTEM screen.

Serves to switch pages of the SYSTEM screen.
Serves to make common settings for all functions (clock
setting, comment input, etc.) on the SYSTEM screen.

HELP key On-line help

An explanation of the display screen or the item currently
selected by the cursor appears.

FILE key Calls up the FILE screen.

Serves to read and store waveform data on the FILE screen.

3.1.2 Setting Items

Cursor keys

Function keys

CURSOR keys Serve to move the flashing cursor.

Pressing the and keys simultaneously opens auto range
function screen. (Memory recorder)

F1 to F5 Select items.
(Function key) The respective items are shown in the function key display.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.1 Basic Operation
 37
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
3.1.3 JOG/SHUTTLE Control and Select Key

2
LEDs Select key

Jog control
4

5
Shuttle control

6
Entering numbers and setting items (except on the DISPLAY screen)
Function key display
（GUI）
7
Value up Move the flashing item selection cursor up in
the selection window.
1
Move the flashing item selection cursor down
8
Value down
in the selection window.
Value up, Value up, 10-units
large step 9
Value up, Value up, 1-units
small step
2
Value down, Value down, 1-units
small step 10
Value down, Value down, 10-units
large step
11
Scroll waveform, move A/B cursors
JOG/SHUTTLE control can be used to scroll the waveform and to move the A and
B cursors (for details, refer to Chapter 11).
12
Switch between waveform scroll and cursor movement
Use the select key when the screen is in measurement display mode. 13
Lit LED JOG/SHUTTLE control function
WAVE Waveform scrolling
14
A.B CSR Movement of A/B cursors

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.1 Basic Operation
 38
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3.1.4 Measurement Start and End

LED

START key

STOP key

Measure
Press the START key and the LED lights.

Stop measurement
Press the STOP key and the LED goes out after measurement has finished.

3.1.5 Basic Input Operation

INPUT RANGE keys CH SELECT key

POSITION keys TIME/DIV key

INPUT RANGE key

Serves to set the voltage axis range for each channel.
POSITION key
Serves to set the zero position for each channel.
CH SELECT key
Serves to set selected channel window.
TIME/DIV key
Serves to set the input signal capture speed (how many seconds, minutes,
hours for 1 DIV on the time axis).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.1 Basic Operation
 39
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
3.1.6 Printer Key Operation

PRINT key 2
COPY key

FEED key 3

4
PRINT key
Serves to print the waveform. The output destination by this key can be
selected.
5
COPY key
Produces a hard copy of the display content. The output destination by this 6
key can be selected.
FEED key
Forwards the paper while the key is held down. 7

8
3.1.7 Other Keys Operation

9
MANU TRIG key

10
VIEW key
11
MANU TRIG key
When the unit is in trigger standby mode, pressing this key causes manual
triggering.
12
Refer to Section 8.10.

VIEW key
13
1. Horizontal scroll bar
Pressing this key on the display screen shows at the bottom of the screen the
position with respect to the recording length of the displayed part of the
14
waveform. The positions of the trigger and the A and B cursors (vertical or
trace), if they are being used, are also shown.
A

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.1 Basic Operation
 40
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

〔When the recording length is 100 divisions〕

Trigger position A cursor B cursor

T A B
･Time axis magnification ratio: × 1
Displyed part (10 divisions)

･Time axis magnification ratio: × 2

Displyed part

･Time axis magnification ratio: × 1/2

Displyed part

Shifting the display position

Upper limit value of the displayed channel The new waveform display position can be
specified, and the waveform can be shifted.
: Displays the level monitor (see Section 7.11).
: Shifts the destination to the left.

: Shifts the destination to the right.

: Executes the dislocation.

Lower limit value of the displayed channel

A cursor position

Trigger position B cursor position

Currently displayed Destination
screen
Whole recording length

The record is divided into four equal sections.

NOTE
・Dislocation can be specified for the following eight sections of the record.
1. Front sections of four equally divided sections of the record
2. End section of record
3. A and B cursor positions
4. Trigger position
・If the recording length is equal to or less than four times the width of the
waveform display screen, the dislocation function is not enabled.
・You can escape from the position display or level monitor display by
pressing the VIEW key. Since the last mode is stored in memory, the mode
can be recalled by pressing the VIEW key again. (When you have escaped
from the level monitor display by pressing the VIEW key, when the key is
pressed again, the level monitor display reappears.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.1 Basic Operation
 41
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2. Back Space
Back Space is used for backspacing when comments are input.
1
3. Channel guide
Indicates channels for specific position of input units (see Section 7.14). 2
4. List print
Prints file list displayed on the file screen to output destination designated by 3
PRINT key (see Section 9.6.2).

NOTE
・When using the memory segmentation function in the enhanced version (see 4
Section 1.2), the F5 key switches between the Position and Block displays.
・The Position display is not available with the FFT function (enhanced
version).
5

3.1.8 On-line Help 6

HELP key
8

HELP display 9
A brief explanation of the item currently selected by the flashing cursor is
displayed by pressing the HELP key
10
Turn off the HELP display
Press any key to cancel the help screen.
Example
11

12

Press the HELP key

13

14

A
Press any key

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.1 Basic Operation
 42
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures

This section uses some representative examples to describe basic measurement

steps and settings.

3.2.1 Basic Operation Flow

The basic operation flow is shown below.

Panel key Setting screen Setting item Description

STATUS Status 1 Time axis Sets data capture Various
Recording length conditions (see chapters settings
Format on various functions).
Printer format
etc.
Status 2 Trigger mode Sets the triggers (see
Pre-trigger Chapter 8).
Trigger source
External trigger
Analog trigger
Logic trigger
Timer trigger
etc.
CHAN Channel Voltage axis range Sets the voltage axis
Input coupling range, input coupling, and
Low pass filter filter (see chapters on
etc. various functions).

↓
Panel key Setting screen Setting item Description
START Starts data capture. Waveform
data
capture

↓
Panel key Setting screen Setting item Description
SELECT Display Cursor type Uses the cursor to read Viewing/
key Cursor movement measurement values (see storing
etc. Chapter 11). waveform
data
DISP Display Select waveform Sets the magnification
Magnification ratio ratio for waveform data
along the vertical/ (see chapters on various
horizontal axis functions).
etc.
FILE FD, PC card Store file type Stores waveform data
Store range (see Chapter 13).
Comment
etc.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures
 43
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3.2.2 Measuring and Recording a Voltage (Memory Recorder

Function)
Example A 2 Vp-p 1 kHz sine wave input is measured.
(1) Input connection
Connect a signal generator to the 8835-01.
(2) Set the signal generator so that it outputs a 2 Vp-p 1 kHz sine wave.
(3) Settings on the STATUS 1 screen
Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
time/div: 500 μs/DIV
shot: 20 DIV
format: SINGLE
print mode: WAVE
smooth print: OFF
roll mode: OFF
auto print: ON
auto save: OFF
overlay: OFF

(4) Settings on the STATUS 2 screen

Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
trigger mode: SINGLE
pre-trigger: 0%
trigger source: OR
manual trigger: OFF
analog trigger: level trigger
trigger level: 0.000 V
trigger direction (slope): rising
trigger filter: OFF
Logic Trigger: OFF
timer trigger: OFF
external trigger: OFF

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures
 44
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(5) Settings on the CHANNEL 1 screen

Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
range: 500 mV/DIV
zoom: 1
zero position: 50%
low-pass filter: OFF

(6) Measurement

・Press the START key, and the LED above the START key lights. In this
case the input is already present, so the trigger will take effect immediately.
・When the waveform has been captured for the specified recording length,
the LED goes off, the unit enters the stop state, and the auto print function
set in step (3) operates, and the waveform is printed. (The waveform below
is printed, with the gauge function enabled on the SET UP (SYSTEM 1)
screen.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures
 45
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3.2.3 Measuring and Recording a Voltage (Recorder Function)

Example A 2 Vp-p 1 Hz sine wave input is measured.
(1) Input connection
Connect a signal generator to the 8835-01.
(2) Set the signal generator so that it outputs a 2 Vp-p 1 Hz sine wave.
(3) Settings on the STATUS 1 screen
Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
time/div: 500 ms/DIV
sampling: 1 μs
shot: 20 DIV
format: SINGLE
print mode: WAVE
additional recording: OFF
printer: ON
auto save: OFF

(4) Settings on the STATUS 2 screen

Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
trigger mode: SINGLE
timing: START
trigger source: AND
manual trigger: OFF
analog trigger: level trigger
trigger level: 0.000 V
trigger direction (slope): rising
trigger filter: OFF
Logic Trigger: OFF
timer trigger: OFF
external trigger: OFF

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures
 46
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(5) Settings on the CHANNEL 1 screen

Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
range: 500 mV/DIV
zoom: 1
zero position: 50%
low-pass filter: OFF

(6) Measurement

・Press the START key, and the LED above the START key lights. In this
case the input is already present, so the trigger will take effect immediately.
・The real-time print function set in step (3) operates, and the waveform is
printed when it has been captured.
・When the waveform has been recorded for the specified recording length, the
LED goes off, and the unit enters the stop state. (The waveform below is
printed, with the gauge function enabled on the SET UP (SYSTEM 1)
screen.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures
 47
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3.2.4 Measuring and Recording an RMS Value (RMS Recorder

Function)
Example A signal going below 5 Vrms is captured.
(1) Input connection
Connect a signal generator to the 8835-01.
(2) Set the signal generator so that it outputs a sine wave of 50 Hz and 5 Vrms or
more.
(3) Settings on the STATUS 1 screen
Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
time/div: 5 s/DIV
frequency: 50 Hz
shot: 10 DIV
format: SINGLE
print mode: WAVE
additional recording: OFF
printer: OFF
auto save: OFF

(4) Settings on the STATUS 2 screen

Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
trigger mode: SINGLE
pre-trigger: 5 DIV
trigger source: AND
manual trigger: OFF
analog trigger: RMS level
trigger level: 5.00 V
trigger direction (slope): falling
Logic Trigger: OFF
timer trigger: OFF
external trigger: OFF

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures
 48
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(5) Settings on the CHANNEL 1 screen

Make the following settings with the CURSOR keys and function keys.
range: 1 V/DIV
zoom: 1
zero position: 0%
low-pass filter: OFF

(6) Measurement

・Press the START key, and the LED above the START key lights. Since
triggering does not occur, waveforms are not displayed. Change the signal
generator amplitude to reduce the RMS value to 5 V or less. Once the RMS
value is set to the required level, triggering occurs immediately. (When the
RMS recorder function is used, triggering occurs even before pretriggering is
set. In the example shown below, waveforms equivalent to 2 DIV
(approximately 10 s) counted from initiation of measurement are recorded
prior to triggering.
・When the waveform has been recorded for the specified recording length, the
LED goes off, and the unit enters the stop state. (The waveform below is
printed, with the gauge function enabled on the SET UP (SYSTEM 1)
screen.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3.2 Basic Measurement and Setting Procedures
 49
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 4 2
Memory Recorder Function 3

5
4.1 Outline
6
4.1.1 Outline of the Memory Recorder Function
The memory recorder function has the following features.
(1) After being stored in the internal memory, input signal data can be displayed and
7
printed.
(2) All input channel data are recorded on the same time axis. 8
Since data for all channels can be superimposed, the relative relationship
between input signals can be observed visually.
(3) Time axis setting 9
100 μs/DIV to 5 min/DIV
(4) Time axis resolution 100 points/DIV
(5) Storage capacity
10
40,000 DIV
(6) Waveform magnification/compression display and print
・Time axis direction: ×10 to ×1/5000
11
・Voltage axis direction: ×10 to ×1/2
With the variable function
(7) Display format 12
・Time axis waveform: single, dual, quad screen display
・X-Y waveform: dot, line
(8) Printing 13
・Manual print, partial print, screen hard copy.
・Multiple printing possible.
(9) High-quality print 14
Smooth print function approximates analog waveform.
(10) Logging function
Numeric printout of waveform data A
(11) Pre-trigger function
Allows monitoring of signal also before triggering.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.1 Outline
 50
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.1.2 Operation Sequence

The flowchart below illustrates the sequence of operations involved in using
the memory recorder function.

Start Turn on the power.

Connect the inputs.

Status 1 screen Select function. Select the memory recorder function.

Set the time axis range

(TIME/DIV). Determine the speed with which the input
signal waveform is captured.

Set the recording length. Determine the length of the data sample
for a single measurement.
Select the format. Select the format type for the waveform
display screen.
Select the printer format. Select whether the result of waveform
calculation is printed as waveform or as
numeric data.
Set smooth print function. Smooth printing close to analog can be
performed.
Set the roll mode. Select whether or not to display the
waveform at the same time as it is
captured.
Set auto print function. Select whether or not to print the
waveform automatically after it is
captured.
Set auto save function. Select whether or not to save the
waveform automatically after it is
captured.
Set the overlay function.

Status 2 screen Make trigger settings. Set the trigger source, trigger types and
conditions, the pre-trigger, etc.

Channel 1 screen Set the voltage axis range, Set the waveform display color for each
input coupling, etc. channel, voltage axis range, input
coupling, zero position, and filter.
Channel 2 screen Set the variable function. The waveform display position for each
channel can be set to any position.

Measurement Start measurement. Press the START key to start

measurement.
Printed recording After the data capture, print the result.

End

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.1 Outline
 51
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
4.2 Making Settings

4.2.1 Setting the Function Mode

2
The 8835-01 has three function modes: the memory recorder function mode,
the recorder function mode, and the RMS recorder function mode. 3
Select the memory recorder function.

Method Screen: STATUS 1, 2, CHANNEL, DISPLAY

4
1. Call up the STATUS 1, 2, CHANNEL or
DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position 5
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press F1 [ MEMORY ].
: Memory recorder function
6
: Recorder function
: RMS recorder function 7

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 52
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.2.2 Setting the Time Axis Range

・Set the speed for inputting and storing the waveform of the input signal.
・Time axis range setting expresses the time for 1 DIV.
・The sampling period is 1/100th of the set value for the time axis range. (100
samples/DIV)
・When external sampling is set, sampling is performed in synchronization with
an external signal. (see Section 12.4)

Method 1 Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the time/div item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
: Set external sampling.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot be

made with the JOG control.

Method 2 Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY06-05

1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Use the TIME/DIV key to make the selection.

NOTE
The TIME/DIV key can be used regardless of where the flashing cursor is
located, if the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen is displayed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 53
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Data points per division are set when external sampling is selected. 1
1. Move the flashing cursor to the samples/DIV
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
2
2. Use the JOG/SHUTTLE control or the function
keys to make the selection.
Setting range is 10 to 1000.
3

5
4.2.3 Setting the Recording Length
・The length of recording for one measurement operation (number of DIV) can
be set.
6
・Two types of recording length can be set.
Fixed recording length mode: Select the desired recording length from among
types 1, 2, and 5. 7
Any recording length mode: Any recording length can be selected by the user.
The recording length can be changed in intervals
of 1 DIV. 8
Method 1 (Fixed recording length mode)
Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
9
2. Move the flashing cursor to the shot item, as
shown in the figure on the left.
10
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window. 11
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
: Set the fixed recording length mode. 12
: Set the any recording length mode.

13

14
Shows the measurement time in the set
time axis range and recording length. A

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 54
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

NOTE

・Depending on the number of channels, the

recording length is limited (see Section 14.3).
(For setting the number of channels, see
Section 9.3.1.)
・On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window
is not displayed.

Method 2 (Any recording length mode)

Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the shot item, as
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Set the any recording length mode.
4. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection. Use the cursor keys to
change the column.
: Value up
: Value down

: Set the fixed recording length mode.

: Set the any recording length mode.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot be

made with the JOG control.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 55
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
4.2.4 Setting the Format
・The style can be set for showing input signals on the screen display and
recording them on the printer. 2
・The styles single, dual, quad, X-Y (dot), and X-Y (line) are available.
(1) Single
Display and record as one graph. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
3
Input waveform

6
(2) Dual
・Display and record as two graphs. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals) 7
・Specify which input channel to use for waveform graph display and recording.
Input waveform
8
Graph 1

9
Graph 2
10
(3) Quad
・Display and record as four graphs. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
11
・Specify which input channel to use for waveform graph display and recording.
Input waveform
12
Graph 1
13
Graph 2

Graph 3
14

Graph 4 A

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 56
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(4) X-Y (dot), (line)

Assign any analog channel to the X axis and the other seven channels to the Y
axis to form the combined plot.

Method Screen: STATUS 1

1. Call up the STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the format item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the display
format.
: Single
: Dual

: Quad
: X-Y (dot)
: X-Y (line)

4. Set the graph display position and the X-Y

plot. See Section 7.7.2.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 57
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.2.5 Using the X-Y Waveform Plots

・Setting the display format to X-Y in Section 4.2.4 allows X-Y waveforms to be
combined.
・Assign any analog channel to the X axis and the other seven channels to the Y
axis to form the combined plot.
・Voltage axis magnification/compression is active also when using X-Y
combined plotting.
・Using the A/B cursors, it is possible to specify the data between the cursors for
partial plotting.

(1) X-Y (dot)

・The sampled data is displayed and recorded just as it comes.
・Linear interpolation is not performed.
Input waveform

Y-axis
→Ｘ

X-Y plot

→Ｙ

X-axis

(2) X-Y (line)

・Linear interpolation is performed.
・The display becomes easier to read, but display speed is slower compared to
dot display.
Input waveform

Y-axis
→Ｘ

X-Y plot

→Ｙ

X-axis

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 58
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method
1. Call up the STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the format item.
3. Use the function keys to select X-Y (dot) or
X-Y (line).

4. Press the CHAN key to call up the

CHANNEL 1 screen.
5. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
6. Specify waveform color (see Section 7.3.1).10
7. Specify the X-axis channel.
Move the cursor to the channel to be used as
X axis, as shown at left.
Use the function keys to select X axis.
8. The channels other than the channel
assigned to the X axis are automatically
assigned to the Y axis.

Partial X-Y plot

Using the A/B cursors, it is possible to specify a range for partial X-Y plotting.
(Normal X-Y plotting covers all data of the recording length.)

Method
1. Display the captured waveform data, using a
format other than X-Y.
2. Use the A/B cursors to specify the desired
portion for plotting, as shown in the figure
on the left (see Section 11.2).
3. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
4. Carry out combined plotting as described
above.

NOTE When the horizontal cursor is used, partial X-Y plotting is not implemented.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 59
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.2.6 Setting the Printer Format

・Selects whether waveform data are printed as waveform or as numeric data.
・When numeric data are selected, the print interval also must be set.

Printing as a waveform

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select waveform.
: Waveform data and the result of
calculation are printed as a waveform.
: Waveform data and the result of
calculation are printed as numeric data.

4. Move the flashing cursor to the smooth print

item.
: Normal printing is carried out.

: Smooth printing is enabled.

(For details, see Section 10.3.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 60
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Printing as numeric data

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the STATUS
1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select numeric data.
: Waveform data and the result of calculation
are printed as a waveform.
: Waveform data and the result of calculation
are printed as numeric data.

4. Move the flashing cursor to the print interval

item.
5. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select the print interval.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

NOTE
When the print interval longer than the recording length is set, only the first
dot is printed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 61
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.2.7 Setting the Roll Mode

・This mode can be used at a time axis range setting of 10 ms/DIV or slower.
・When roll mode is set to ON, the waveform is displayed immediately at the
start of recording (the screen scrolls).

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the roll mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Normal recording is carried out.
: The waveform is displayed immediately at
the start of recording.

NOTE ・When the time axis range of 10 ms/DIV or faster is set, normal recording is
carried out even if roll mode is set to ON.
・Roll mode cannot be set together with the overlay function. (When the
display format is set to "X-Y," you can turn ON Overlay with Roll Mode
ON.)

4.2.8 Setting the Auto Print Function

When the function is enabled, print is carried out automatically after a
waveform is captured.

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the auto print
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Auto print is disabled.

: Auto print is enabled.

: Print data is automatically transferred to
the data collection server on the LAN
(when connected to a LAN).

NOTE
If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is applied (see Section 10.7.4).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 62
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.2.9 Setting the Auto Save Function

When the function is enabled, waveform data are automatically stored on a
floppy disk or PC card after they are captured.

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the auto save
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the media.
: Auto save is disabled.
: Waveform data are automatically stored on
floppy disk
: Waveform data are automatically stored on
PC card.

4. Selecting Media displays saving data options.

:Cancels automatic save when media is full.
: Deletes old files and automatically saves
when media is full.

NOTE

In delete save, file is saved as MEM. extension

file in binary format and TXT. extension file in
text format.

5. File naming
See Section 9.5.5 for entry options.
In automatic save, file is titled with a
number following the file name.
When file is left untitled during processing,
AUTO automatically executes.

NOTE

・File name contains eight alphanumeric

characters. In automatic save the last
character may be replaced with a number to
designate the file.
・When the characters below are used in a file,
the file cannot be handled on a PC running
Windows 2000 or XP. Do not use these
characters when handling a file on your PC.
+, =, [, ]

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 63
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6. Use the function keys to select the data store

principle.
: Data are stored as binary data.
: Data are stored as text data.

NOTE

The TEXT format is intended for reading by a

PC. Select BINARY for reading by the 8835-01.

7. Selected TEXT in save options opens

Thinning.
Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

NOTE
・In automatic save channels cannot be selected. Only current channel
displaying waveform is saved.
・A file is stored in the directory currently selected on the file screen.
・Only a limited number of directories and files can be stored in the directory.
Use Report Print to print overlaid waveforms. (see Section 10.7.7)
・If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is applied (see Section 13.4.5
Detailed Explanation of the Commands 1. SAVE).
・If the data quantity is too large, it may not fit on a floppy diskette or PC
Card. For the size of a file, see Section Appendix 4. (When the display
format is set to "X-Y," you can turn ON Overlay with Roll Mode ON.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 64
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.2.10 Overlay
・Overlay is performed without clearing the currently displayed waveform (if
trigger mode is REPEAT or AUTO).
・This allows comparison to the immediately preceding waveform. 0

Method Screen: STATUS 1

1. Move the flashing cursor to the overlay item.
2. Use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Overlay is not performed.
: Overlay is performed.

NOTE
･ If trigger mode is SINGLE, measurement terminates after one set of data has
been collected. Therefore overlay is impossible.
･ While the overlay function is being used, waveform scrolling cannot be carried out.
･ When manual printing (see Section 10.7.1) is carried out, only the last waveform
will be printed. Use Report Print to print overlaid waveforms. (see Section 10.7.7)
･ If one of the following settings is changed, the overlay waveform display
terminates and only the last waveform is shown (the settings cannot be
changed on the DISPLAY screen):

Screen zoom ratio (along time axis or voltage axis)

Display format
Waveform display or store channel
X axis or Y axis during X-Y display
･ For dark waveform colors (the six lower-half colors), the most recently used
colors are indistinguishable from previous ones.
･ The overlay function cannot be set together with roll mode. (When the display
format is set to "X-Y," you can turn ON Overlay with Roll Mode ON.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 65
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.2.11 Setting the Trigger

Select the trigger that is suitable for the signal to be captured.
For details, see Chapter 8.

4.2.12 Input Channel Settings

The settings differ for each unit.
See the settings for each unit in Chapter 7.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.2 Making Settings
 66
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.3 Settings on the Display Screen

Explains the setting items on the Display screen and the setting of the voltage
axis and time axis.

4.3.1 Setting Magnification/Compression Along the Time Axis

・The magnification/compression ratio along the time axis can be set.
・By magnifying the waveform, detailed observations can be made. By
compressing the waveform, an entire change can be promptly apprehended.
・Magnification/compression of the screen uses the left edge as reference,
regardless of the status of the A/B cursor.
Method -19
1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to select the
magnification/compression ratio.
: Ratio up

: Ratio down

NOTE
The magnification/compression factor can be changed also after measurement
is completed.

Reference
・The HELP key can be used to check which position within the entire
recording length is occupied by the currently shown waveform (see VIEW key
in Section 3.1.7).
・It is possible to divide the display screen into two screens (upper and lower),
and magnify the waveform on the upper screen along the time axis and
display it on the lower screen (see Section 11.4).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.3 Settings on the Display Screen
 67
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.3.2 Automatic Setting of Time Axis and Voltage Axis

(Auto Range Function)

This function automatically selects the time axis range, voltage axis range and
zero position.

Method Screen: DISPLAY

1. Press the and cursor keys simultaneously.
2. Use the function keys to execute or cancel the function.

NOTE
・Because the auto-range function performs automatic setting for the input
signal present at the time the function is executed, input a signal before
executing the function.
・Taking the lowest numbered channel among the channels for which
waveform display is on, 1 to 2.5 cycles are automatically set to be recorded
as 10 DIV.
・If for the input signal for this channel there is only a small difference
between the maximum value and the minimum value in the range of
highest sensitivity (10 mV/DIV), the setting is made by taking the next
higher channel.
・If the range cannot be determined, for all channles for which the waveform
display is on. a warning message appears, and measurement is abandoned.
・If measurement has started using the auto-range function:
a. Conditions related to the input units:
・Voltage axis range, zero position: value set automatically
・Low-pass filter: OFF
・Input coupling: DC
(8 channels)
b. Trigger conditions:
・AND/OR for internal trigger and external trigger...OR
・Internal trigger............ only ON for the lowest numbered one of the
channels for which waveform display is on. OFF for the other seven
channels. (However, only in the case that the difference between the
maximum and minimum values is significant.)
・Trigger type: Level....・Slope: (rising)
・Trigger level: value set automatically
・Filter: OFF
(For one channel only)
・Trigger mode: AUTO
・Pre-trigger: 20%
・External trigger: OFF
・Timer trigger: OFF
c. Status conditions:
・Time axis range (time/div): value set automatically
・Magnification/compression ratio along the voltage axis: ×1
・Magnification/compression ratio along the time axis: ×1

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.3 Settings on the Display Screen
 68
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter

Processing)

4.4.1 Summary of the Processing Functions

・The function is available only when using the memory recorder function.
・The following 14 processing functions are available for the captured waveform
data.
・Processing results are shown in numerical form.
・If the A/B cursors are turned off, processing is carried out for all data.
・If the A/B cursors are used, processing is carried out for data between the A/B
cursors.
・If only the A cursor is used, processing is carried out for data after the A
cursor.
1 Average value 8 Period
2 Effective value (RMS) 9 Frequency
3 Peak to peak value 10 Rise time
4 Maximum value 11 Fall time
5 Time to maximum value 12 Standard deviation
6 Minimum value 13 Area value
7 Time to minimum value 14 XY area

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing)
 69
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.4.2 Processing Method

Settings for the processing method are made with the status 3 screen.

Method Screen: STATUS 3

1. Call up the STATUS 3 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Parameter processing is disabled.
: Parameter processing is enabled.
: Processing is performed for the already
captured waveform. Processing can be
stopped with the STOP key.

NOTE

When parameter processing is disabled, the

other setting items are not displayed at all.

4. If parameter processing is set to ON, the

various setting items are displayed.

5. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown

in the figure on the left, and enable or
disable printout of parameter processing
results. Use the function keys to make the
selection
: Processing results are not printed.
: Processing results are printed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing)
 70
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown

in the figure on the left, and enable or disable
storing of parameter processing results. Use
the function keys to make the selection.
: Processing results are not stored.
: Processing results are stored on floppy disk.

: Processing results are stored on PC card.

NOTE

・Processing results are stored as text data.

・A file is stored in the directory currently
selected on the file screen.
・The LAN selection is available only when a
LAN is connected.
7. Select processing functions and set the
channel for processing. Four processing
functions can be performed simultaneously.
(1) Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure.
Use the function keys to select processing
functions.

(2) Move the flashing cursor to the point shown

in the figure, and set the channel.
Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing)
 71
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.4.3 Waveform Parameter Calculation Details

(1) Average value
・Calculates the average value (V) of the waveform data.
・Equation:

AVE: average value

n: number of data samples
di : i-th data of the source channel

(2) RMS value

・Calculates the RMS (effective) value (V) of the waveform data.
・When scaling is used, the value is calculated after scaling.
・Equation:

RMS: effective value

n: number of data samples
di: i-th data of the source channel

(3) Peak-to-peak value

Calculates the peak-to-peak (maximum-minimum) value of the waveform data.

(4) Maximum value

Calculates the maximum value of the waveform.

(5) Time to maximum value

・Calculates the time interval from the triggering point to the maximum value
of the waveform (in seconds).
・If there are two maximum value points, the time to the first point is
calculated.

(6) Minimum value

Calculates the minimum value of the waveform.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing)
 72
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(7) Time to minimum value

・Calculates the time interval from the triggering point to the minimum value
of the waveform (in seconds).
・If there are two minimum value points, the time to the first point is
calculated.

(8) Period
(9) Frequency
・Displays the period (s) and frequency (Hz) of the signal waveform.
・The calculation is performed by determining the middle point of the signal
amplitude and then measuring the interval from the point when that level
is crossed (in rising or falling direction) to the point when it is next crossed.

(10) Rise time

(11) Fall time
・From the captured waveform data, the 0% and 100% level is determined
using the histogram, and the rise time (s) is taken as the time required to
go from 10% to 90% (fall time: from 90% to 10%).
・In the captured waveform data, the first rising slope (or falling slope) is
used to make the calculation.
・If the A/B cursors (vertical, trace) are used, the first rising slope (or falling
slope) within the range defined by the cursors is used.

90%

10%

Rise time
Fall time

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing)
 73
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(12) Standard deviation

・Calculates the standard deviation (V) of the waveform data.
・Equation:

σ: standard deviation
AVE: average value
n: number of data samples
di: i-th data of the source channel
(13) Area value
・Calculates the area bordered by the signal waveform and the zero position
(potential 0 V).
・If the A/B cursors (vertical, trace) are used, the area between the cursors is
calculated.
・Equation:

S: Area value
n: number of data samples
di: i-th data of the source channel
h = Δt: sampling period

Shaded area is calculated

A cursor B cursor

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing)
 74
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(14) X-Y area value

・Calculates the area (V2) after X-Y plotting.
・The waveform is plotted on the X-Y screen, and the area enclosed by the plot
lines is calculated.
・In single, dual, or quad screen, the A/B cursors (vertical, trace) can be used to
specify the range for X-Y plotting and area calculation.
・On the X-Y screen of the memory recorder function, it is not possible to specify
the range with the A/B cursors.
・Refer to Section 11.2 Using the A/B Cursors, for more information on cursor
operation.

X-Y waveform

Shaded area is
calculated

X-Y waveform (no enclosed range)

Line area is
calculated

NOTE
･ Depending on the signal waveform, values for parameters (8), (9), (10), and
(11) may not be displayed.
･ When the scaling function is used, scaling is first applied to waveform data,
and then the parameters are calculated. The parameter unit is determined by
the scaling unit ( Section 9.4).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.4 Processing Functions (Waveform Parameter Processing)
 75
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.5 Start and Stop Measurement Operation

Method
1. Press the START key to initiate measurement or set the unit to trigger
standby.
2. Press the STOP key during measurement to stop the measurement.
(see Section 3.1.4.)

LED
Lights during measurement

When the STOP key is pressed once, triggering occurs, waveforms are
displayed and printed out, and measurement is stopped.
When the STOP key is pressed twice, the 8835-01 is forcibly stopped.

・When measurement is forcibly stopped following trigger generation,

waveform data collected up to the point of termination remains after
measurement is stopped.
・There will be no waveform data if measurement is forcibly stopped prior to
trigger generation. However, during continuous measurement, any
waveform data remaining from a prior trigger will be displayed.
・When the auto save function is ON, waveform data collected up to the point
of termination is automatically stored.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.5 Start and Stop Measurement Operation
 76
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.6 Print Examples

Single screen (The list and gauge functions are enabled.)

Dual screen (The gauge function is enabled.)

Quad screen (The gauge function is enabled.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.6 Print Examples
 77
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Report

List

Numeric data

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.6 Print Examples
 78
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

X-Y (The gauge function is enabled.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
4.6 Print Examples
 79
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 5 2
Recorder Function 3

5
5.1 Outline
6
5.1.1 Outline of the Recorder Function
The recorder function has the following features.
(1) Real time display and printing of the input signal
7
(2) Real time continuous recording of the input signal
(3) All input channel data are recorded on the same time axis. 8
Since data for all channels can be superimposed, the relative relationship
between input signals can be observed visually.
(4) Time axis setting
10 ms//DIV to 1 h/DIV
9
(5) Time axis resolution 100 points/DIV (printer)
(6) High-speed sampling 10
The setting range is max. 1 MS/s. The available range depends on the selected
time axis range (input signal waveform capture rate).
(7) Waveform magnification/compression display and printout
・Time axis direction: ×1 to ×1/200
11
・Voltage axis direction: ×10 to ×1/2
With the variable function
(8) Display format 12
・Time axis waveform: single, dual, quad screen display
・X-Y waveform: dot, line
(9) Scrollable display 13
・The most recent 2000 divisions(*1) of the data are stored in memory.
・It is possible to scroll back for easy review.
(10) Additional recording function
(11) Logging function
14
Numeric printout of waveform data
(12) Reprint function
The most recent 2000 divisions(*1) of the data stored in memory can be printed
A
as many times as required.
*1: See "Waveform storage" in Section 14.4.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.1 Outline
 80
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.1.2 Operation Sequence

The flowchart below illustrates the sequence of operations involved in using
the recorder function.

Start Turn on the power.

Connect the inputs.

Status 1 screen Select function. Select the recorder function.

Set the time axis range

(TIME/DIV). Determine the speed with which the input
signal waveform is captured.

Set the sampling period.

Set the recording length. Determine the length of the data sample
for a single measurement.
Select the format. Select the format type for the waveform
display screen.
Select the printer format. Select whether the result of waveform
calculation is printed as waveform or as
numeric data.
Set the additional recording Select whether or not to enable additional
function. recording.
Make printer settings.

Set auto save function. Select whether or not to save the

waveform automatically after it is
captured.
Status 2 screen Make trigger settings. Set the trigger source, trigger types and
conditions, the trigger timing, etc.

Channel 1 screen Sets the voltage axis range,

input coupling, etc. Set the waveform display color for each
channel, voltage axis range, input
coupling, zero position, and filter.
Channel 2 screen Sets the variable function. The waveform display position for each
channel can be set to any position.

Measurement Start measurement. Press the START key to start

measurement.
Printed recording After the data capture, print the result.

End

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.1 Outline
 81
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
5.2 Making Settings

5.2.1 Setting the Function Mode

2
The 8835-01 has three function modes: the memory recorder function mode,
the recorder function mode, and the RMS recorder function mode. 3
Select the recorder function.

Method Screen: STATUS 1, 2, CHANNEL, DISPLAY

4
1. Call up the STATUS 1, 2, CHANNEL or
DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position 5
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press F2 [ RECORDER ].
: Memory recorder function
6
: Recorder function
: RMS recorder function 7

10

07-01 11
07-02
07-03
12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 82
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.2.2 Setting the Time Axis Range and Sampling

・Set the speed for inputting and storing the waveform of the input signal.
・Time axis range setting expresses the time for 1 DIV.
・Sampling period settings start at 1 μs (and range up to a maximum of
1 MS/s). The available range depends on the selected time axis range (input
signal waveform capture rate).

Method 1 Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the time/div item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot be

made with the JOG control.

4. Set the sampling period (STATUS 1 screen

only).
(Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left. Use the JOG
control or the function keys to make the
selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 83
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 2 Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY 1

1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Use the TIME/DIV key to set the time axis range.
2
NOTE
・The TIME/DIV key can be used regardless of where the flashing cursor is
located, if the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen is displayed.
・The sampling period cannot be changed on the DISPLAY screen. 3
・While the printer always outputs the data at the measurement
magnification in recording mode, the waveform on the screen is reduced in
size at the ratio shown in the table below, depending on the time-axis range. 4
Range Compression ratio
50 ms/DIV × 1/2
20 ms/DIV × 1/10 5
10 ms/DIV × 1/20

・When the printer is ON, the recording length, "continuous" cannot be set at
a time axis range setting of 10 ms to 200 ms/DIV.
6
Setting value of the sampling period
Time axis range Sampling period
7
（/DIV） 1μs 10μs 100μs 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms
10 ms ● ● ●
20 ms ● ● ● 8
50 ms ● ● ●
100 ms ● ● ● ●
200 ms ● ● ● ● 9
500 ms ● ● ● ●
1s ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ●
2s
5s ● ● ● ● ●
10
10 s ● ● ● ● ● ●
30 s ● ● ● ● ● ●
1 min ● ● ● ● ● ● 11
2 min ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 min ● ● ● ● ● ●
10 min ● ● ● ● ● ● 12
30 min ● ● ● ● ● ●
1 hour ● ● ● ● ● ●

●: can be set, : can not be set 13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 84
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.2.3 Setting the Recording Length

・The length of recording for one measurement operation (number of DIV) can
be set.
・Two types of recording length can be set.
Fixed recording length mode:
Any recording length mode: Any recording length can be selected by the user.

Method 1 (Fixed recording length mode)

Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the shot item, as
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
: Set the fixed recording length mode.
: Set the any recording length mode.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window is

not displayed.

Shows the measurement time in the set

time axis range and recording length.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 85
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 2 (Any recording length mode) 1

Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2
2. Move the flashing cursor to the shot item, as
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Set the any recording length mode. 3
4. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection. Use the cursor keys to
change the column. 4
: Value up
: Value down
5
: Set the fixed recording length mode.
: Set the any recording length mode.
6
NOTE

・On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot be 7

made with the JOG control.
・When time axis range is between 10 ms -
200 ms/DIV and recording length is set to
CONTINUOUS, printer defaults to OFF.
8

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 86
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.2.4 Setting the Format

・The style can be set for showing input signals on the screen display and
recording them on the printer.
・The styles single, dual, and quad are available.
(1) Single
Display and record as one graph. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
Input waveform

(2) Dual
・Display and record as two graphs. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
・Specify which input channel to use for waveform graph display and
recording.
Input waveform

Graph 1

Graph 2

(3) Quad
・Display and record as four graphs. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
・Specify which input channel to use for waveform graph display and
recording.
Input waveform

Graph 1

Graph 2

Graph 3

Graph 4

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 87
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method Screen: STATUS 1

1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the format item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the display
format.
: Single
: Dual

: Quad
: XY (dot)
: XY (line)

4. If dual or quad screen display was chosen in

step 3, determine which input channel to
display on which graph. This setting is made
with the CHANNEL 1 screen.
Press the CHAN key to call up the
CHANNEL 1 screen.
Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the illustration at left.
・The illustration shows the setting for CH1.
・Settings for CH2 - CH8 should be made in
the same way.
Use the function keys to select the graph.
: Display the waveform on graph 1.
: Display the waveform on graph 2.

: Display the waveform on graph 3. (*)

: Display the waveform on graph 4. (*)
*: when the quad screen display is selected

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 88
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Continuous X-Y plot

・Setting the display format to X-Y allows X-Y waveforms to be combined
continuously.
・Selecting the X-Y display format changes the setting screen as shown in the
figure below.
1. Use the function keys to select the display
format.
: Single
: Dual

: Quad
: XY (dot)
: XY (line)

2. Select whether or not to clear any existing X-Y

plot.
: Do not clear the display window. The new
recording is overlayed the existing one.
: Clear the display window.

3. Press the CHAN key to call up the CHANNEL

1 screen.

4. Specify the X-axis channel.

Move the cursor to the channel to be used as X
axis, as shown at left.
Use the function keys to select X axis.
The remaining channel automatically becomes
the Y-axis input.
NOTE

X-Y waveforms in the recorder function cannot be

saved in TEXT format. Also, the waveforms
cannot be saved automatically.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 89
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.2.5 Setting the Printer Format

・Selects whether waveform data are printed as waveform or as numeric data.
・When numeric data are selected, the print interval also must be set.

Printing as a waveform

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the STATUS
1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left
3. Use the function keys to select waveform.
: Waveform data are printed as a waveform.

: Waveform data are printed as numeric data.

NOTE In the recorder, the trigger mark is written as the start position mark. In an
additional recording (see Section 5.2.6), the trigger mark is displayed in front
of the most recently entered data.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 90
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Printing as numeric data

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left
3. Use the function keys to select numeric data.
: Waveform data are printed as a waveform.

: Waveform data are printed as numeric data.

4. Move the flashing cursor to the print interval

item.
5. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select the print interval.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

NOTE
・When the print interval longer than the recording length is set, only the
first dot is printed.
・The maximum and minimum values are printed (see Section Appendix 3.4).
・The print intervals of 0.01 to 0.5 DIV can be selected, only when there are
wavefom data present.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 91
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.2.6 Setting the Additional Recording Function

・This records, regarding the memory as though it were recording paper.
・The last 2000 divisions of waveform can be held in memory.
・The waveform can be scrolled and printed.
Switching the additional recording on and off affects the use of memory as
shown below.
Additional recording OFF Additional recording ON
1. Recording 20 divisions of waveform 1. Recording 20 divisions of waveform

2000 divisions 2000 divisions

20 divisions 20 divisions

2. Recording another 20 divisions of 2. Recording another 20 divisions of

waveform waveform
The first set of measurement data is discarded, The first set of measurement data is preserved,
and recording of the second set of measurement and recording of the second set of measurement
data starts again from the beginning of memory. data starts after the first set.

20 divisions 20 divisions 20 divisions

The first and second sets of waveforms can be

observed by scrolling or printing the waveform.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 92
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the additional
recording item, as shown in the figure on the
left
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Additional recording is disabled.
: Additional recording is enabled.

NOTE ・Time values output to the printer and displayed on the screen with the
additional recording function enabled are equal to those of the most recently
acquired waveforms. Therefore, when measuring waveforms in a different
time axis range, always take that difference into consideration.
・The voltage axis range is determined by the most recently acquired
waveforms.

5.2.7 Setting the Printer Function (Real Time Printing)

The input waveform is continuously printed in real time.

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the printer item,
as shown in the figure on the left
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Printing is disabled.
: Printing is enabled.

NOTE See Section 10.7.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 93
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.2.8 Setting the Auto Save Function

When the function is enabled, waveform data are automatically stored on a
floppy disk or PC card after they are captured.
Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the auto save
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the media.
: Auto save is disabled.
: Waveform data are automatically stored on
floppy disk
: Waveform data are automatically stored on
PC card.
NOTE

The LAN selection is available only when a

LAN is connected.
4. Selecting Media displays saving data options.
:Cancels automatic save when media is full.
: Deletes old files and automatically saves
when media is full.
NOTE

In delete save, file is saved as REC. extension

file in binary format and TXT. extension file in
text format.
5. File naming
See Section 9.5.5 for entry options.
In automatic save, file is titled with a
number following the file name.
When file is left untitled during processing,
AUTO automatically executes.

NOTE

・File name contains eight alphanumeric

characters. In automatic save the last
character may be replaced with a number to
designate the file.
・If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is
applied (see Section 13.4.5). However, when
additional recording is enabled, partial save
cannot be performed. A/B cursors are
disabled automatically.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 94
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6. Use the function keys to select the data store

principle.
: Data are stored as binary data.
: Data are stored as text data.

NOTE

・Data stored in the text format is not readable

by the 8835-01.
・When the characters below are used in a file,
the file cannot be handled on a PC running
Windows 2000 or XP. Do not use these
characters when handling a file on your PC.
+, =, [, ]

7. Selected TEXT in save options opens

Thinning.
Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.

NOTE
・In automatic save channels cannot be selected. Only current channel
displaying waveform is saved.
・A file is stored in the directory currently selected on the file screen.
・Only a limited number of directories and files can be stored in the directory.
・When the recording length is "continuous", the auto save function is
disabled.
・When the auto save function is used while the additional recording function
is ON, only newly acquired waveform data is stored. (In this case, the A/B
cursors are set OFF.)
・X-Y combined waveforms cannot be stored automatically.
・If the data quantity is too large, it may not fit on a floppy diskette or PC
Card. For the size of a file, see Section Appendix 4.

5.2.9 Setting the Trigger

Select the trigger that is suitable for the signal to be captured.
For details, see Chapter 8.

5.2.10 Input Channel Settings

The settings differ for each unit.
See the settings for each unit in Chapter 7.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.2 Making Settings
 95
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.3 Settings on the Display Screen

Explains the setting items on the Display screen.

5.3.1 Setting Compression Along the Time Axis

・The compression ratio along the time axis can be set.
・By compressing the waveform, an entire change can be promptly apprehended.
Method 6-19
1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to select the
compression ratio.
: Ratio up
: Ratio down

NOTE
・The compression factor can be changed also after measurement is
completed.
・While the printer always outputs the data at the measurement
magnification in recording mode, the waveform on the screen is reduced in
size at the ratio shown in the table below, depending on the time-axis range.
Range Compression ratio
50 ms/DIV × 1/2
20 ms/DIV × 1/10
10 ms/DIV × 1/20

Reference The VIEW key can be used to check which position within the entire
recording length is occupied by the currently shown waveform (see Section
3.1.7).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.3 Settings on the Display Screen
 96
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.4 Start and Stop Measurement Operation

Method
1. Press the START key to initiate measurement or set the unit to trigger
standby.
2. Press the STOP key during measurement to stop the measurement.
(see Section 3.1.4.)

LED
Lights during measurement

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.4 Start and Stop Measurement Operation
 97
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.5 Print Examples

Single screen (The list and gauge functions are enabled.)

Dual screen (The gauge function is enabled.)

Quad screen (The gauge function is enabled.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.5 Print Examples
 98
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Report

List

Numeric data

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
5.5 Print Examples
 99
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 6 2
RMS Recorder Function 3

5
6.1 Outline
6
6.1.1 Outline of the RMS Recorder Function
The RMS recorder function has the following features.
(1) The voltage value and DC signal for the commercial power supplies are displayed
7
and recorded as the rms value.
(2) Real time continuous recording 8
(3) The 8835-01 is designed to measure commercial power supplies (50/60 Hz) and
DC signal.
(4) Time axis setting 9
5 s/DIV to 1 h/DIV
(5) Time axis resolution 100 points/DIV (printer)
(6)Sampling speed
10
20 rms data/s (200 μs fixed)
(7) Waveform magnification/compression display and printout
・Time axis direction: ×1 to ×1/200
11
・Voltage axis direction: ×10 to ×1/2
With the variable function
(8) Display format 12
Time axis waveform: single, dual, quad screen display
(9) Scrollable display
・The most recent 2000 divisions(*1) of the data are stored in memory. 13
・It is possible to scroll back for easy review.
(10) Additional recording function
(11) Logging function
14
Numeric printout of waveform data
(12) Reprint function
The most recent 2000 divisions(*1) of the data stored in memory can be printed
A
as many times as required.
*1: See "Waveform storage" in Section 14.5.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.1 Outline
 100
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.1.2 Operation Sequence

The flowchart below illustrates the sequence of operations involved in using
the RMS recorder function.

Start Turn on the power.

Connect the inputs.

Status 1 screen Select function. Select the RMS recorder function.

Set the time axis range

(TIME/DIV). Determine the speed with which the
input signal waveform is captured.
Set the frequency. Set the frequency of the measuring object.

Set the recording length. Determine the length of the data sample
for a single measurement.
Select the format. Select the format type for the waveform
display screen.
Select the printer format. Select whether the result of waveform
calculation is printed as waveform or as
numeric data.
Set the additional recording
function. Select whether or not to enable additional
recording.
Make printer settings.

Set auto save function. Select whether or not to save the

waveform automatically after it is
captured.
Status 2 screen Make trigger settings. Set the trigger source, trigger types and
conditions, the pre-trigger, etc.

Channel 1 screen Set the voltage axis range, Set the waveform display color for each
input coupling, etc.
channel, voltage axis range, input
coupling, zero position, and filter.

Channel 2 screen Set the variable function. The waveform display position for each
channel can be set to any position.

Measurement Start measurement. Press the START key to start

measurement.
Printed recording After the data capture, print the result.

End

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.1 Outline
 101
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
6.2 Making Settings

6.2.1 Setting the Function Mode

2
The 8835-01 has three function modes: the memory recorder function mode,
the recorder function mode, and the RMS recorder function mode. 3
Select the RMS recorder function.

Method Screen: STATUS 1, 2, CHANNEL, DISPLAY

4
1. Call up the STATUS 1, 2, CHANNEL or
DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position 5
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press F3 [ RMS ].
: Memory recorder function
6
: Recorder function
: RMS recorder function 7

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 102
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.2.2 Setting the Time Axis Range

・Set the speed for inputting and storing the waveform of the input signal.
・Time axis range setting expresses the time for 1 DIV.
・The sampling interval is constant, regardless of the time axis range.

Method 1 Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the time/div item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window

is not displayed.

07-04
07-05

Method 2 Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Use the TIME/DIV key to make the selection.

NOTE
The TIME/DIV key can be used regardless of where the flashing cursor is
located, if the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen is displayed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 103
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
6.2.3 Setting the Frequency
Serves to set the frequency of the signal to be measured.
2
Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
3
2. Move the flashing cursor to the frequency
item, as shown in the figure on the left. 4
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Measure rms value of 50 Hz signal
: Measure rms value of 60 Hz signal
5

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 104
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.2.4 Setting the Recording Length

・The length of recording for one measurement operation (number of DIV) can
be set.
・Two types of recording length can be set.
Fixed recording length mode:
Any recording length mode: Any recording length can be selected by the user.

Method 1 (Fixed recording length mode)

Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the shot item, as
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
: Set the fixed recording length mode.
: Set the any recording length mode.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window

is not displayed.

Shows the measurement time in the set

time axis range and recording length.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 105
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 2 (Any recording length mode) 1

Screen: STATUS 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the STATUS 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2
2. Move the flashing cursor to the shot item, as
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Set the any recording length mode. 3
4. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection. Use the cursor keys to
change the column. 4
: Value up
: Value down
5
: Set the fixed recording length mode.
: Set the any recording length mode. 07-06
6
NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot be 7

made with the JOG control.

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 106
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.2.5 Setting the Format

・The style can be set for showing input signals on the screen display and
recording them on the printer.
・The styles single, dual, and quad are available.
(1) Single
Display and record as one graph. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
Input waveform

(2) Dual
・Display and record as two graphs. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
・Specify which input channel to use for waveform graph display and
recording.
Input waveform

Graph 1

Graph 2

(3) Quad
・Display and record as four graphs. (At the most, 8 analog + 16 logic signals)
・Specify which input channel to use for waveform graph display and
recording.
Input waveform

Graph 1

Graph 2

Graph 3

Graph 4

NOTE
Waveform displayed and recorded with RMS recorder is specified as RMS
waveform.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 107
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method Screen: STATUS 1

1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the format item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the display
format.
: Single
: Dual

: Quad

4. If dual or quad screen display was chosen in

step 3, determine which input channel to
display on which graph. This setting is
made with the CHANNEL 1 screen.
Press the CHAN key to call up the
CHANNEL 1 screen.
Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the illustration at left.
・The illustration shows the setting for CH1.
・Settings for CH2 - CH8 should be made in
the same way.
Use the function keys to select the graph.
: Display the waveform on graph 1.
: Display the waveform on graph 2.

: Display the waveform on graph 3. (*)

: Display the waveform on graph 4. (*)
*: when the quad screen display is selected

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 108
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.2.6 Setting the Printer Format

・Selects whether waveform data are printed as waveform or as numeric data.
・When numeric data are selected, the print interval also must be set.

Printing as a waveform

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the STATUS
1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Waveform data are printed as a waveform.

: Waveform data are printed as numeric data.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 109
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Printing as numeric data

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left
3. Use the function keys to select numeric data.
: Waveform data are printed as a waveform.

: Waveform data are printed as numeric data.

4. Move the flashing cursor to the print interval

item.
5. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select the print interval.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

NOTE ・When the print interval longer than the recording length is set, only the
first dot is printed.
・The maximum and minimum values are printed in the time axis range other
than 5 s/DIV (see Section Appendix 3.4).
・The print intervals of 0.01 to 0.5 DIV can be selected, only when there are
wavefom data present.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 110
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.2.7 Setting the Additional Recording Function

・This records, regarding the memory as though it were recording paper.
・The last 2000 divisions of waveform can be held in memory.
・The waveform can be scrolled and printed.
Switching the additional recording on and off affects the use of memory as
shown below.
Additional recording OFF Additional recording ON
1. Recording 20 divisions of waveform 1. Recording 20 divisions of waveform

2000 divisions 2000 divisions

20 divisions 20 divisions

2. Recording another 20 divisions of 2. Recording another 20 divisions of

waveform waveform
The first set of measurement data is discarded, The first set of measurement data is preserved,
and recording of the second set of measurement and recording of the second set of measurement
data starts again from the beginning of memory. data starts after the first set.

20 divisions 20 divisions 20 divisions

The first and second sets of waveforms can be

observed by scrolling or printing the waveform.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 111
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the additional
recording item, as shown in the figure on the
left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Additional recording is disabled.
: Additional recording is enabled.

NOTE
・Time values output to the printer and displayed on the screen with the
additional recording function enabled are equal to those of the most recently
acquired waveforms. Therefore, when measuring waveforms in a different
time axis range, always take that difference into consideration.
・The voltage axis range is determined by the most recently acquired
waveforms.

6.2.8 Setting the Printer Function (Real Time Printing)

The rms value of the input signal is continuously printed in real time.

Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS screen (page 1).
2. Move the flashing cursor to the printer item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Printing is disabled.
: Printing is enabled.

NOTE See Section 10.7.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 112
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.2.9 Setting the Auto Save Function

When the function is enabled, waveform data are automatically stored on a
floppy disk or PC card after they are captured.
Method
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the auto save
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the media.
: Auto save is disabled.
: Waveform data are automatically stored on
floppy disk
: Waveform data are automatically stored on
PC card.
NOTE
The LAN selection is available
only when a LAN is connected.
4. Selecting Media displays saving data options.
:Cancels automatic save when media is full.
: Deletes old files and automatically saves
when media is full.
NOTE

・In delete save, file is saved as RMS.

extension file in binary format and TXT.
extension file in text format.
・If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is
applied (see Section 13.4.5). However, when
additional recording is enabled, partial save
cannot be performed. A/B cursors are
disabled automatically.
5. File naming
See Section 9.5.5 for entry options.
In automatic save, file is titled with a
number following the file name.
When file is left untitled during processing,
AUTO automatically executes.

NOTE

・File name contains eight alphanumeric

characters. In automatic save the last
character may be replaced with a number to
designate the file.
・When the characters below are used in a file,
the file cannot be handled on a PC running
Windows 2000 or XP. Do not use these
characters when handling a file on your PC.
+, =, [, ]

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 113
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6. Use the function keys to select the data store

principle.
: Data are stored as binary data.
: Data are stored as text data.

NOTE

Data stored in the text format is not readable

by the 8835-01.

7. Selected TEXT in save options opens

Thinning.
Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.

NOTE
・In automatic save channels cannot be selected. Only current channel
displaying waveform is saved.
・A file is stored in the directory currently selected on the file screen.
・Only a limited number of directories and files can be stored in the directory.
・When the recording length is "continuous", the auto save function is
disabled.
・When the auto save function is used while the additional recording function
is ON, only newly acquired waveform data is stored. (In this case, the A/B
cursors are set OFF.)
・If the data quantity is too large, it may not fit on a floppy diskette or PC
Card. For the size of a file, see Section Appendix 4.

6.2.10 Setting the Trigger

Select the trigger that is suitable for the signal to be captured.
For details, see Chapter 8.

6.2.11 Input Channel Settings

The settings differ for each unit.
See the settings for each unit in Chapter 7.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.2 Making Settings
 114
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.3 Settings on the Display Screen

Explains the setting items on the Display screen.

6.3.1 Setting Compression Along the Time Axis

・The compression ratio along the time axis can be set.
・By compressing the waveform, an entire change can be promptly apprehended.
Method 6-19
1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to select the
compression ratio.
: Ratio up
: Ratio down

NOTE
The compression factor can be changed also after measurement is completed.

Reference The HELP key can be used to check which position within the entire
recording length is occupied by the currently shown waveform (see Section
3.1.7).

6.4 Start and Stop Measurement Operation

Method
1. Press the START key to initiate measurement or set the unit to trigger
standby.
2. Press the STOP key during measurement to stop the measurement.
(see Section 3.1.4.)
LED
Lights during measurement

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.3 Settings on the Display Screen
 115
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.5 Print Examples

Single screen (The list and gauge functions are enabled.)

Dual screen (The gauge function is enabled.)

Quad screen (The gauge function is enabled.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.5 Print Examples
 116
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Report

List

Numeric data

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
6.5 Print Examples
 117
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 7 2
Input Channel Settings 3

(For all functions) 5

7.1 Overview
6
・Input channel settings are made with the CHANNEL screen of each function.
・The 8835-01 can use up to 8 analog and 16 logic channels.
・Settings are made separately for one analog channel or four logic channels (1 7
probe).
・Before making input channel settings, use the SYSTEM screen to select the
channels to be used (see Section 9.3.1). 8
7.2 Selecting Channels (Memory Recorder Function
Only) 9

・Perform this setting before making the input channel settings in the memory
recorder function.
10
・This setting on the SYSTEM 1 screen determines the channels in use.
Use the menu items SETUP and (1) using channel.
・For details, see Section 9.3.1. 09-01 11

12

13

14

NOTE
Depending on the channels in use, the recording length of the memory A
recorder function differs.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.1 Overview
 118
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT

This section explains the settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT.

The 8936 ANALOG UNIT is a unit for measuring the voltage waveforms.

Displays the type of the installed unit

7.3.1 Setting the Waveform Display Color

Set the display color for the waveform.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the arrow up in the selection window.
: Move the arrow down in the selection
window.
: Waveform display is enabled.
: Waveform display is disabled.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 119
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

・On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window is not displayed.

NOTE
・Depending on the waveform display color, the color of the printer output for
1
either the print function or the hard copy function changes. See the
following table.
Waveform Print function Hard copy function
2
display color

NORMAL
3
DARK
4
DARK

LIGHT LIGHT
6

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 120
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.3.2 Setting the Waveform Display Graph Type

Set which graph type to use when display format has been set to DUAL or
QUAD screen display on the STATUS 1 screen.
(1) DUAL or QUAD screen display

Method
1. Press the CHAN key to call up the
CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the illustration at left.
・The illustration shows the setting for CH1.
・Settings for CH2 - CH8 should be made in
the same way.
3. Use the function keys to select the graph.
: Display the waveform on graph 1.
: Display the waveform on graph 2.

: Display the waveform on graph 3. (*)

: Display the waveform on graph 4. (*)
*: when the quad screen display is selected

(2) X-Y combined plotting

Set the channel to be used as X axis when display format has been set to X-Y
(dot) or X-Y (line) display on the STATUS 1 screen.

Method
1. Press the CHAN key to call up the
CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
3. Move the cursor to the channel to be used as
X axis, as shown at left.
4. Use the function keys to select X axis.
The channels other than the channel
assigned to the X axis are automatically
assigned to the Y axis.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 121
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
7.3.3 Setting the Voltage Axis Range
・The voltage axis range for each channel is set.
・The set value denotes the voltage value for 1 DIV along the voltage axis 2
(vertically).
・When waveform data is out of range limit, that waveform portion is displayed
in another color in the display window. 3
Method 1 Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen. 4
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
3. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown in
5
the figure on the left.
4. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
6
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection 7
window.

The full-span voltage range is displayed. NOTE

8
・On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window
is not displayed.
・When out of range, waveform may not appear 9
even if it is indicated within the range based
on zero position settings.
10

11

12

Method 2 Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY 13

1. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected channel screen.
2. Press the INPUT RANGE key to set the range for each channel.
14
NOTE
・The INPUT RANGE key can be used regardless of where the flashing cursor
is located, if the selected channel is displayed on the CHANNEL 1 or
DISPLAY screen. A
・If the variable function is enabled, the size of a waveform on the screen does
not change, even if the voltage axis range is changed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 122
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.3.4 Setting the Input Coupling

The input coupling for the input signal is set.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
3. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
4. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: DC coupling
: AC coupling
: The input signal is not connected.
This allows the zero position to be checked.

NOTE Input coupling is determined by type of input unit or measurement mode.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 123
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
7.3.5 Setting the Magnification/Compression Ratio Along the
Voltage Axis
・Specifies the magnification/compression ratio for each channel to be used for 2
display and recording.
・Performs magnification/compression using the center of the screen as
reference. 3
Method 1 Screen: CHANNEL 1
1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen. 4
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
3. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
5
in the figure on the left.
4. Use the function keys to make the selection.
6
: Display is compressed to 1/2.
: Display is shown as is.

: Display is magnified by factor 2.

7
: Display is magnified by factor 5.
: Display is magnified by factor 10. 8
NOTE
Magnification/compression is performed using the center of the screen as
reference, if the magnification /compression ratio is changed.
9
Method 2 Screen: DISPLAY
1. Call up the DISPLAY screen.
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
10
channel screen.
3. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown 11
in the figure on the left.
4. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Ratio up 12
: Ratio down

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 124
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.3.6 Setting the Zero Position

The position of the zero voltage is set.

Method 1 Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
3. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
4. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Changes the +10% zero position.
: Changes the +1% zero position.

: Changes the -1% zero position.

: Changes the -10% zero position.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot be

made with the JOG control.

On the DISPLAY screen, flashing cursor at zero

indicates zero position.

Method 2 Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected channel screen.
3. Press the front-panel POSITION key for the channel whose zero position
you want to adjust.

NOTE
・The POSITION key can be used regardless of where the flashing cursor is
located, if the selected channel is displayed on the CHANNEL 1 or
DISPLAY screen.
・Magnification/compression along the voltage axis is performed using the
center of the screen as reference,

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 125
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Reference
・The zero positions are shown in the figure below.
・It is possible to display the hidden portion of the waveform by setting "0 V"
to a proper percentage on the display.

RMS recorder function

4095

2047
Displayed screen
(zero position: 0%)
100% Displayed screen
(zero position: 50%)
1600
LSB 50% 100%

0 0V 0% 50% 100%

0% 50%

0%
Displayed screen
(zero position: 100%)
-2048
Memory recorder function Magnification ratio: ×1
Recorder function
A/D data

Magnification ratio ×1/2 ×1 ×2 ×5 ×10

No. of full-scale
3200 1600 800 320 160
LSBs
Zero position
adjustment area
0 to 100 -50 to 150 -150 to 250 -450 to 550 -950 to 1050
(Memory,
recorder)
Zero position
adjustment area -50 to 100 -150 to 150 -350 to 250 -950 to 550 -1950 to 1050
(RMS recorder)

NOTE
・Available measurement range of each range is approximately +, - 12.5 times
voltage axis range setting. Any part beyond available voltage measurement
range is not loaded as waveform but indicated as out of range.
・According to zero position and magnification/compression ratio of voltage
axis, voltage range displayed in waveform display screen varies but
available measurement range does not.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 126
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.3.7 Zero Adjustment

・This function calibrates the 0 V position (ground position) to the selected
zero position. Use it to assure precise results.
・Allow the unit to warm up for at least 30 minutes to ensure that the
internal temperature of the input units has stabilized.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the zero position
item, and select zero setting.
: Opens baseline offset and zero adjustment
setting screen.

3. Press 0 Adjust. All channels will be calibrated

together.
: Applies baseline offset to all channels.

: Applies baseline offset to selected channel

only.
: Cancels baseline offset to selected channel.
: Disengages from zero adjustment setting
screen.
: Executes zero adjustment.

NOTE

・Zero adjustment cannot be performed during

measurement.
・Repeat the zero adjustment when the voltage
axis range was changed, when the input unit
was changed, when the power is on/off, or
when the system is set to reset.
・When there is a sudden change in ambient
temperature, the zero position may drift. To
assure continued measurement precision,
perform the zero adjustment again.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 127
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.3.8 Configuring Baseline Offset

・Adjusts voltage value to 0 V. Baseline offset is not available when range is set
above +,-10 DIV.
・Baseline offset is available for measuring voltage and amperage. Not available
for any other measuring.
・Configuration is not reset to initial settings when power is turned OFF.
New entry input resets settings.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the zero position
item, and select zero setting.
: Opens baseline offset and zero adjustment
setting screen.

3. Use the function keys to make the selection.

: Applies baseline offset to all channels.

: Applies baseline offset to selected channel

only.
: Cancels baseline offset to selected channel.
: Disengages from zero adjustment setting
screen.
: Executes zero adjustment. Cancels baseline
offset to all channels.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 128
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Input Voltage at Baseline Offset

Baseline offset requires consistent input voltage. When input voltage is
variable, baseline offset timing determines values adjusted to 0 V.
When input voltage is consistent When input voltage is variable

+V1+V2

+V1 +V1

+V1-V2

0V 0V

At any time during baseline offset, According to the baseline offset time,
+V1 is adjusted to 0 V. value adjusted to 0 V varies.

NOTE
・Baseline offset enables input voltage to be set to 0 V. Before executing
baseline offset, specify signal to be set to 0 V.
・Adjusting input voltage to 0 V by baseline offset does not vary maximum
input voltage and maximum rated voltage to earth. When baseline offset is
applied, pay close attention to maximum input voltage and maximum rated
voltage to earth.
・In process of applying baseline offset to all channels, if setting any channels
fail (input voltage to adjust to 0 V is above +, -10 DIV, WARNING is
displayed. Baseline offset to remaining channels are in effect.

Difference from using zero adjustment

Baseline offset shifts and graphically brings the standard electric potential of
input signal to 0 V. When a variance occurs between the standard electric
potential of testing device and MEMORY HiCORDER standard electric
potential (0 V), baseline offset functions to adjust standard electric potential of
testing device to 0 V.
Zero adjustment adjusts variance in input unit and standardizes MEMORY
HiCORDER standard electric potential to 0 V as 0 position.

+V

0V

Baseline offset captures +V as standard electric potential.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 129
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.3.9 Setting the Low-Pass Filter

・Low-pass filters internal to the input units are set.
・Effective for removing unneeded high-frequency components.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: No low-pass filter is connected.
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of 5
Hz
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of
500 Hz
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of 5
kHz
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of
100 kHz

NOTE Cutoff frequency of low-pass filter is determined by type of input unit.

Unit Low-pass filter
８９３６ OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 kHz
Voltage OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 kHz
８９３７
Temperature OFF, 5, 500 Hz
８９３８ OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 kHz
８９３９ OFF, 10, 30, 300, 3 kHz
８９４０ OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 kHz
８９４６ OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 50 kHz
Voltage OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 kHz
８９４７
Acceleration OFF, 500, 5 kHz

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.3 Making the Settings of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT
 130
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.4 Making the Settings of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP

UNIT
The 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT allows measurement of voltage or
temperature on any channel.

Displays the measurement mode

7.4.1 Setting Input for the VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT

・Choose whether you want to measure voltage or temperature.
・When measuring temperature, select the thermocouple to be used.
・Resetting the system puts it in the voltage mode.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

VOLTAGE: Set for voltage measurement

TMP-＊: Set for temperature adjustment
The thermocouple used is selected at
the same time.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.4 Making the Settings of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
 131
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.4.2 Making the Settings of Voltage Measurement

WARNING A common GND is used for voltage and temperature input on all
channels. Never input voltage and temperature simultaneously, since
doing so could result in damage to the sample being tested.

・Perform the zero adjustment when measuring voltage.

・Allow the unit to warm up for at least 1 hour to ensure that the internal
temperature of the input units has stabilized (see Section 7.3).
・The voltage measurement settings are the same as in the 8936 ANALOG
UNIT.
・The digital filter can be configured when the measurement range is 1 mV to
5 mV.
・The digital filter is a function which eliminates the noise component by
additive averaging inside the amplifier. This results in a data update rate of
about 100 μs.

Setting the digital filter

Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY
1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. The digital filter can be configured when the
voltage axis range is 1 mV to 5 mV.
: Digital filter is enabled.
: Digital filter is disabled.

NOTE

・When using the RANGE key, the flashing

cursor can be located in any field of the
channel to be set.
・Repeat the zero adjustment when the voltage
axis range was changed, when the input unit
was changed, when the power is on/off, or
when the system is set to reset.
・When there is a sudden change in ambient
temperature, the zero position may drift. To
assure continued measurement precision,
perform the zero adjustment again.
・Digital filter settings cannot be determined
from the DISPLAY or CHANNEL 1 screen.
Check through the function key display that
appears when the flashing cursor is moved to
the measurement range item.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.4 Making the Settings of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
 132
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.4.3 Making the Settings of Temperature Measurement

The settings of the waveform display color, waveform display graph type,
magnification/compression ratio along the measurement range, zero position
and low-pass filter are the same as in the 8936 ANALOG UNIT.

Setting the measurement range and drift compensation

Set the measurement range.
Drift compensation is a function that periodically (about once per second)
cancels the variances in the reference voltage that accumulate over time.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys, the RANGE key or
the JOG control to make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
4. Set drift compensation.
Drift compensation can be used with
temperature measurement.
: Drift compensation is enabled.
: Drift compensation is disabled.

NOTE
・Upon resetting the system, the "Input Selection" item is set to Voltage.
・If ambient temperature changes suddenly, loss of thermal equilibrium can
result in measurement error. When this occurs, allow the unit to acclimate
to the new temperature for about one hour, then take measurements after
thermal equilibrium is reached.
・It is recommended that drift compensation be turned ON when using a
thermocouple with small thermoelectromotive force (sensor R, S or B) to
record over an extended period of time in an environment where ambient
temperature fluctuates.
・If the temperature input terminal is exposed to a strong draft, loss of
thermal equilibrium at the input may result in measurement error. When
taking measurements under such conditions, arrange the unit in such a
manner that the input terminal is protected for direct exposure to drafts.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.4 Making the Settings of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
 133
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Setting reference junction compensation

Set reference junction compensation.
When connecting a thermocouple directly to the input module, select [RJC
Internal].
Reference junction compensation is performed within the input module.
When connecting through a reference junction device (e.g., a 0oC control tank),
select [RJC External]
When measuring temperature with thermocouple, temperature differential is
measured between device to be tested and tester terminal. Reference junction
compensation enables direct reading of temperature of device to be tested by
compensating for tester teminal temperature.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Reference junction compensation is
performed internally by the 8937.
(Measurement accuracy is the sum of the
accuracy of temperature measurement plus
reference junction compensation accuracy.)
: Reference junction compensation is not
performed by the 8937. Select this option
when using an external reference junction
compensation unit.
(Measurement accuracy refers only to the
accuracy of temperature measurement.)

Discriminating between internal and external

reference junction compensation
Internal: No underbar appears below C.

External: The underbar appears below C.

Measurement range and upper and lower limits of measurement input

Note that the upper and lower limits of measurement input vary according to
measurement range. Waveform saturation will result if the limits indicated in
the table below are exceeded.
Measurement range 20℃/DIV 40℃/DIV 100℃/DIV 200℃/DIV
Upper limit of 400 800 2000 4000
measurement input
Lower limit of -92℃ -184℃ -460℃ -920℃
measurement input

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.4 Making the Settings of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
 134
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Examples of waveform display measurement according to measurement range

(Zero position: 50%, magnification/compression ratio: ×1, NORMAL screen,
thermocouple: T)
When thermocouple measurement Within thermocouple measurement
range is exceeded range
500℃ 200℃
When upper limit of When display screen
400℃ measurement input scale is exceeded
range is exceeded
Thermocouple: T
Measurement input
range
0℃ 0℃

-200℃

-460℃ -184℃
When lower limit of When measurement
-500℃ -200℃ input lower limit is
measurement input
range is exceeded exceeded

Thermocouple: T Thermocouple: T
Measurement input range: -200℃ to 400℃ Measurement input range: -200℃ to 400℃
Measurement range: 100℃/DIV Measurement range: 40℃/DIV

Determining Measurement Conditions

・Measurement conditions for the measured waveform data can be determined
from the printed listing.
・The settings for the digital filter, drift compensation, reference junction
compensation and the type of thermocouple can be determined.

Drift compensation ON Digital filter ON

Reference junction compensation settings Types of thermocouple

Printed listing

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.4 Making the Settings of the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
 135
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.5 Making the Settings of the 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT

Displays the type of the installed unit

7.5.1 Settings
The settings of the waveform display color, waveform display graph type,
voltage axis range, input coupling, magnification/compression ratio along the
voltage axis, zero position, zero adjustment and low-pass filter are the same as
in the 8936 ANALOG UNIT.
For the settings, see Section 7.3.

7.5.2 Setting the Anti-aliasing Filter (Advanced Version)

The 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT incorporates an antialiasing filter designed to
prevent aliasing distortion. The filter can be set to ON or OFF. The cutoff
frequency of the filter is set automatically, according to the frequency range
setting.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Press the CHAN key to call up the
CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left, and use the function
keys to make the selection.
: Anti-aliasing filter is disabled.
: Anti-aliasing filter is enabled.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.5 Making the Settings of the 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT
 136
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Frequency Range, Frequency Resolution, Window Width,

Corresponding Time Axis Range (Number of FFT points: 1000)

Frequency range Frequency Time axis

[ Hz ] resolution Window width [ /DIV ]
[ Hz ]
400 k *1 1k 1 ms 100 μs
200 k *1 500 2 ms 200 μs
80 k *1 200 5 ms 500 μs
40 k 100 10 ms 1 ms
20 k 50 20 ms 2 ms
8k 20 50 ms 5 ms
4k 10 100 ms 10 ms
2k 5 200 ms 20 ms
800 2 500 ms 50 ms
400 1 1s 100 ms
200 500 m 2s 200 ms
80 200 m 5s 500 ms
40 100 m 10 s 1s
20 50 m 20 s 2s
8 *2 20 m 50 s 5s
4 *2 10 m 100 s 10 s
1.33 *2 3.3 m 5 min 30 s
667 m *2 1.67 m 10 min 1 min
333 m *2 0.83 m 20 min 2 min
133 m *2 0.33 m 50 min 5 min

The cutoff frequency of the antialiasing filter is the same as the selected
frequency range, except for the cases listed below.
*1: Antialiasing filter is OFF.
*2: Cutoff frequency is 20 Hz.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.5 Making the Settings of the 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT
 137
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.6 Making the Settings of the 8939 STRAIN UNIT

This section explains the settings of the 8939 STRAIN UNIT.

The 8939 STRAIN UNIT is a unit for making measurements using a strain
gauge adapter.

Displays the type of the installed unit

7.6.1 Setting the Waveform Display Color

Set the display color for the waveform.
For the setting, see Section 7.3.1.

7.6.2 Setting the Waveform Display Graph Type

Set the display format for the waveform display screen.
For the setting, see Section 7.3.2.

7.6.3 Setting the Measurement Range

・The measurement range for each channel is set.
・The set value denotes the range for 1 DIV vertically.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.6 Making the Settings of the 8939 STRAIN UNIT
 138
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 1 Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window

is not displayed.

Method 2 Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

Press the INPUT RANGE key to set the range for each channel.

NOTE
・The INPUT RANGE key can be used regardless of where the flashing cursor
is located, if the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen is displayed.
・If the variable function is enabled, the size of a waveform on the screen does
not change, even if the measurement range is changed.

7.6.4 Auto-balancing
・This function aligns the reference output level of the adapter with the
specified origin position.
・Allow the unit to warm up for at least approx. one hour to ensure that the
internal temperature of the input units has stabilized.
・It can be specified whether the auto balancing is applied only to a selected
channel or to all channels.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.6 Making the Settings of the 8939 STRAIN UNIT
 139
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Carries out auto-balancing for the selected
channel only.
: Carries out auto-balancing for all of the
strain unit channels.

NOTE
・Connect the sensor, make sure there is no input, and execute auto
balancing.
・Auto-balancing cannot be performed during measurement.
・During auto-balancing, the keys are inactive.
・Repeat the auto-balancing when the setting range was changed, when the
input unit was changed, when the strain gauge adapter was changed, when
the zero position was changed, when the power is on/off, or when the system
is set to reset.
・When there is a sudden change in ambient temperature, the zero position
may drift. To assure continued measurement precision, perform the auto-
balancing again.

7.6.5 Setting the Magnification/Compression Ratio Along the

Measurement Range
・Specifies the magnification/compression ratio for each channel to be used for
display and recording.
・Performs magnification/compression using the center of the screen as
reference.
For the setting, see Section 7.3.5.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.6 Making the Settings of the 8939 STRAIN UNIT
 140
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.6.6 Setting the Zero Position

The position of 0 με is set.
For the setting, see Section 7.3.6.

7.6.7 Setting the Low-Pass Filter

・Low-pass filters internal to the input units are set.
・Effective for removing unneeded high-frequency components.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: No low-pass filter is connected.
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of 10
Hz
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of 30
Hz
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of
300 Hz
: Connect a filter with a cutoff frequency of 3
kHz

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.6 Making the Settings of the 8939 STRAIN UNIT
 141
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT

This section explains the settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT.
The 8940 F/V UNIT measures frequency, count, pulse duty ratio, voltage and
current at each channel (one measurement type is available for each channel).

Frequency: Frequency is obtained from input pulses derived from the

measured waveform.
Count: This is a count of the number of input pulses.
Pulse Duty Ratio: This is the duty ratio of the measured waveform.
Voltage: Measures the voltage waveform
Current: Measures the current waveform

Notes on measuring the pulses duty ratio

Upon measurement of pulses that rise during dead time, the duty ratio is
determined from pulses that follow the dead time; the duty ratio of dead time
pulses is not measured.

Dead time（50 μs）

can not be measured

Displays the measurement mode

7.7.1 Settings
The settings of the waveform display color, waveform display graph type,
magnification/compression ratio along the voltage axis, zero adjustment,
baseline offset and low-pass filter are the same as in the 8936 ANALOG
UNIT.
For the settings, see Section 7.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 142
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.7.2 Setting for Measuring Frequency

Measurement of frequency allows three types of measurements: frequency,
cycle and commercial power supply.
Frequency is between 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz, cycle is between 10 r/min to 1 kr/min
and commercial power supply is P50 Hz or P60 Hz.

Setting the Measurement Mode

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the unit item.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select Frequency.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
: Probe check is performed.

NOTE
For the probe check, see Section 7.7.5.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 143
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Setting the Measurement Range and Hold

Set the measurement range and Hold.
Hold is a function for retaining the preceeding result.
When Hold is enabled (ON), the previously measured value is displayed until
the next frequency measurement is confirmed.
When Hold is disabled (OFF), half of the previously measured value is
displayed if the next frequency measurement is not confirmed within a
specified time (selectable from 10 ms or 1 s). The half value display remains
for as long as the next frequency measurement is not confirmed within the
specified time. When the next frequency measurement is confirmed, the new
value is displayed.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the range item.
3. Use the function keys, the jog control or the
RANGE key to make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

4. Set the Hold.

: Hold the last value until the next frequency
measurement is confirmed.
: Half of the last value is displayed if the next
frequency measurement is not confirmed
within 10 ms.
: Half of the last value is displayed if the next
frequency measurement is not confirmed
within 1 s.

NOTE
・The measurement range can be set to P50 Hz or P60 Hz for commercial
power. Although 0 Hz is the usual zero position, in this case 50 or 60 Hz
becomes the zero position.
・Hold settings cannot be determined from the DISPLAY or CHANNEL 1
screen. Check through the function display that appears when the flashing
cursor is moved to the "range" item.
Hold ON or OFF is printed when doing a list print.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 144
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

About Hold ON/OFF

(1) Hold ON/OFF in the stopping operation
For Frequency and RPM measurement, results are displayed after one
confirmation cycle.
When measuring phenomena such as stopping of a rotating body, if Hold is
ON, stopping cannot be detected because there is no confirmation cycle.
When Hold is OFF, half of the previous measurement value is displayed if the
confirmation cycle does not occur within the specified time (10 ms or 1 s).
Therefore, a condition such as stopping can be estimated by gradually
approaching zero.

Rotation Stops Rotation Stops

Until the next cycle is The previous value is

confirmed, the previous halved. Stopping can be
value is held. confirmed.

Hold ON Hold OFF

(2) The following are differences depending on whether Hold is ON or OFF when the
frequency drops to 0 Hz from a certain frequency, then increases from that point.

Actual Event When Hold is ON

Frequency drops to 0 Hz from a The initial value is held (the signal is
certain frequency, then increases not halved), so the result is as
from that point. shown in the diagram below.

When Hold is OFF (10 ms) When Hold is OFF (1 s)

At frequencies of less than 100 Hz, At frequencies of less than 1 Hz,
the signal is halved. the signal is halved.
200 Hz 2 Hz

100 Hz 1 Hz

0 0

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 145
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Setting the Pull-Up Resistance

・Set the pull-up resistance on or off.
・Pull-up resistance is used when connecting to an open collector output signal.
For normal measurements, disable the pull-up resistance (set to OFF).

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.

3. Use the function keys to make the selection.

: Pull-up resistance is enabled (ON).
(for connection to open collector)
: Pull-up resistance is disabled (OFF).

NOTE
Pull-up settings cannot be determined from the DISPLAY or CHANNEL 1
screen. Check through the function display that appears when the flashing
cursor is moved to the "input coupling" item.
Pull-up ON or OFF is printed when doing a list print.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 146
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Setting the Threshold Value

Set the threshold value.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the threshold
value item.
3. Use the function keys or the jog control to
make the setting.
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

NOTE
Measurement results may differ depending on the threshold setting.
To obtain the correct measurement, set the threshold to match the input
waveform.
Threshold Setting Example
5V
Threshold

0V

-5 V

7.7.3 Setting Integral Measurement

・Set integral measurement.
・Adds input pulse counts.

Setting the Measurement Mode

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the unit item.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select count.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
: Probe check is performed.

NOTE
For the probe check, see Section 7.7.5.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 147
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Setting the Measurement Range

・Set the measurement range.
・For count mode, the unit of measurement is ’c’ (counts).

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the range item.
3. Use the function keys, the jog control or the
RANGE key to make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

Setting the Pull-Up Resistance

See Section 7.7.2.

Setting the Threshold Value

See Section 7.7.2.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 148
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.7.4 Setting for Measuring Pulse Duty Ratio

Setting the Measurement Mode

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the unit item.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select DUTY.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.
: Probe check is performed.

NOTE
For the probe check, see Section 7.7.5.

Setting the Pull-Up Resistance

See Section 7.7.2.

Setting the Threshold Value

See Section 7.7.2.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 149
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.7.5 Setting for Measuring Voltage

The settings of the waveform display color, waveform display graph type,
measurement range, input coupling, magnification/compression ratio along the
voltage axis, zero adjustment, baseline offset and low-pass filter are the same
as in the 8936 ANALOG UNIT.
For the settings, see Section 7.3.

Setting the Measurement Mode

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the unit item.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select Voltage.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

Setting the Pull-Up Resistance

See Section 7.7.2.

Probe Check

・When using the 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE with the 8940 F/V UNIT,
the probe check confirms the 9322 connection and sets the voltage axis scale
multiplier to 1000 times. For frequency, duty ratio and count modes, the
threshold value is multiplied times 100.
・When several 9332s are connected to the 8940 F/V UNIT, the probe check
need be performed only once for all probes.
Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY
1. Move the flashing cursor to the unit item.
2. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select voltage. The probe check may be
performed from the frequency, count or duty
modes.
3. Connect the 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE to
be used and select probe check from the
displayed function keys.

: Probe check is performed.

NOTE
For more details, refer to instruction manual of the 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 150
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.7.6 Setting for Measuring Current

・Measures electric current with clamp on sensor or clamp on probe.
・When starting up MEMORY HiCORDER with 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER,
measuring in parallel with printing this limits number of available channels
for current measurement.
・The settings of the waveform display color, waveform display graph type,
input coupling, magnification/compression ratio along the voltage axis, zero
adjustment, baseline offset and low-pass filter are the same as in the 8936
ANALOG UNIT. For the settings, see Section 7.3.

Setting the Measurement Mode

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the unit item.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select Current.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 151
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Checking the Clamp

・The clamp check needs to be performed when Current mode is selected.
・The clamp check identifies the clamp sensor (probe) for use by the 8940.
Measurement range is determined by the clamp to be used. It must be
performed before current measurement.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Move the flashing cursor to the unit item.
2. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select current.
3. Connect the clamp to be used and select
clamp check from the displayed function keys.
: Clamp check is performed.

NOTE
・Always perform the clamp check before measuring current. Correct
measurement is not possible if the clamp check has not been performed.
・When starting up MEMORY HiCORDER with 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER
and current is selected in over 3 ch, printing is not available. Print after
loading waveform or select less channels for current.
1. When automatic printing and roll mode are set to ON in memory
recorder.
2. When printing is set to ON in recorder, RMS recorder and recorder &
memory.
・For details on the clamp connections, see Section 2.4.4 8940 F/V UNIT.

Setting the Measurement Range

・Measurement range is determined by the clamp to be used.
・See Section 7.7.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.7 Making the Settings of the 8940 F/V UNIT
 152
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.8 Making the Settings of the 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT

This section explains the settings of the 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT.

The 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT is a unit for measuring the voltage waveforms.

Displays the type of the installed unit

7.8.1 Settings
The settings of the waveform display color, waveform display graph type,
voltage axis range, magnification/compression ratio along the voltage axis,
zero position, zero adjustment, baseline offset and low-pass filter are the same
as in the 8936 ANALOG UNIT.
For the settings, see Section 7.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.8 Making the Settings of the 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT
 153
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.8.2 Setting the Input Coupling

The input coupling for the input signal is set.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 or DISPLAY screen.

2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected

channel screen.
3. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
4. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: DC coupling

: The input signal is not connected.

This allows the zero position to be checked.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.8 Making the Settings of the 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT
 154
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT

WARNING DO NOT connect connection cable to the 8947 CHARGE UNIT when
connected to measuring unit to avoid risk of electric shock.
BNC terminal and miniature connecter terminal of each channel share
same GND. Do not connect both at once.
During measuring with measurement mode set to PREAMP or when
level monitor function is in use, electric current (2 mA, +15 V) output is
active. In order to avoid risk of electric shock and damage to testing
device, examine channel mode for connecting sensor and probe to BNC
terminal and either cancel PREAMP or shut down power.
Voltage measurement and internal acceleration pick up sensor share
same terminal. Make sure to check measurement mode before
measuring.
Before using internal acceleration pickup sensor, verify that sensor
ratingis compatible with 8947 CHARGE UNIT rated output (2 mA, +15 V).
Use of Non compatible sensor may cause damage to sensor.

8947 CHARGE UNIT can measure voltage or acceleration in each channel.

(One type of measurement per channel)

Charge:
Measures with electrical charge output piezoelectric
acceleration pickup sensor.
Preamp:
Measures with preamplifier internal acceleration
pickup sensor.
Voltage:
Measures voltage waveform.

System reset defaults to Electrical Charge

setting.

Displays the measurement mode

7.9.1 Settings

The settings of the waveform display color, waveform display graph type,
magnification/compression ratio along the voltage axis, zero position, zero
adjustment, baseline offset and low-pass filter are the same as in the 8936
ANALOG UNIT.
For the settings, see Section 7.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT
 155
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.9.2 Setting for Measuring Acceleration

WARNING Maximum electrical charge input is 500 pC at range 6 high sensitivity

and 50000 pC at range 6 low sensitivity. Make sure input is within the
range to avoid damage to unit.
When selecting Preamp mode and starting up, confirmation message
appears. Check channel connection before proceeding with measuring.
When measuring starts in Preamp mode, electric current (2 A, + 15 V)
output is active. Switching to another mode (Electrical Charge or
Voltage) terminates output. (Not terminated by STOP key.)

Setting the Measurement Mode

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select Charge or Preamp.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

Adjusting Sensor Sensitivity

・Adjust sensor sensitivity.
・Sensor sensitivity is measured as a specific value of the acceleration sensor.
・Sensor sensitivity modifies measurement range. Adjust sensor sensitivity
before setting measurement range (see Section 15.2.7).

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys or the jog control to
make the setting.
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

NOTE
Sensor sensitivity is measured as a specific value of the acceleration sensor.
Adjust sensor sensitivity to sensor to assure accurate acceleration values.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT
 156
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Sensor sensitivity value

Sensor sensitivity set for the 8947 CHARGE UNIT is determined as value per
m/s2. For value per G determined acceleration sensors, adjust sensor
sensitivity value by dividing by 9.8 (m/s2).
Example 1
When sensor sensitivity 1.08 (pC/(m/s2)) is noted, adjust setting value to 1.08.
Example 2
When sensor sensitivity 64.0 (pC/G) is noted,
64.0/9.8 = 6.53 (pC/(m/s2))
adjust setting value to 6.53.

Units
The 8947 CHARGE UNIT measures electrical charge per m/s2.
Scaling function converts measurement into value per G.
Configure scaling settings as below.
[Conversion ratio scaling]
EU/V: 1/9.8 = 0.1020E+00
Offset: 0.0000E+00
EU: G
[2-point scaling]
9.8000E+00 → 1.0000E+00
0.0000E+00 → 0.0000E+00
EU: G
For detais of of the scaling function, see Section 9.4.

Using sensor outside setting range

Sensor sensitivity setting range is between 0.1 to 10 (pC/(m/s2)), 0.1 to 10
(mV/(m/s2)). Scaling allows use of sensor outside setting range.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1 → SCALING (SYSTEM 3)

1. Display CHANNEL 1 screen and set sensor sensitivity. Multiply sensor
sensitivity by appropriate number to determine value for setting.
2. Display SCALING screen and specify out-of-range sensor channel to either
SCI or ENG.
3. Set conversion ratio at the same value as the number for multiplying sensor
sensitivity.
(Example 1) When sensor sensitivity is 23.4 (pC/(m/s2))
Multiply value by 1/2.34 and take 10 (pC/(m/s2)) as sensor sensitivity value as
setting.
Configure scaling.
[Conversion ratio scaling]
EU/V: 10/23.4 = 0.4274E+00
Offset: 0.0000E+00
EU: m/s2
[2-point scaling]
2.3400E+01 → 1.0000E+01
0.0000E+00 → 0.0000E+00
EU: m/s2

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT
 157
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(Example 2) When sensor sensitivity is 0.05 (pC/(m/s2))

Multiply value by 2 and take 0.1 (pC/(m/s2)) as sensor sensitivity value as
setting.
Configure scaling.
[Conversion ratio scaling]
EU/V: 0.1/0.05 = 2.0000E+00
Offset: 0.0000E+00
EU: m/s2
[2-point scaling]
0.0000E+00 → 0.0000E+00
0.0000E+00 → 0.0000E+00
EU: m/s2

Setting the Measurement Range

・Set the measurement range.
・Sensor sensitivity modifies measurement range. Adjust sensor sensitivity
before setting measurement range (see Section 15.2.7).

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys or the jog control or to
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT
 158
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Setting the Input Coupling

The input coupling for the input signal is set.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.

2. Use the function keys to make the selection.

: AC coupling

: The input signal is not connected.

This allows the zero position to be checked.

NOTE

Charge and preamp mode do not enable DC

coupling.

Setting the Anti-aliasing Filter

・Set an antialiasing filter designed to prevent aliasing distortion.
・The cutoff frequency of the filter is set automatically, according to the
frequency range and time axis range settings (see Section 7.5.2).

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Anti-aliasing filter is disabled.
: Anti-aliasing filter is enabled.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT
 159
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.9.3 Setting for Measuring Voltage

Setting the Measurement Mode

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select Voltage.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window.

Setting the Anti-aliasing Filter

・Set an antialiasing filter designed to prevent aliasing distortion.
・The cutoff frequency of the filter is set automatically, according to the
frequency range and time axis range settings (see Section 7.5.2).

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY

1. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Anti-aliasing filter is disabled.
: Anti-aliasing filter is enabled.

For the other settings, see Section 7.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.9 Making the Settings of the 8947 CHARGE UNIT
 160
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.10 Making Logic Input Settings

・Select the display positions for CH A - CH D (1 probe).

・Select the display color for the logic waveform.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Press the CHAN key to call up the
CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Set the display position.
(1) Move the flashing cursor to the "Position"
point of the channel to be set, as shown in
the figure on the left.
(2) Use the function keys to set the position.
: Change the display position.
: Change the display position.

: Logic waveforms are not displayed.

: All logic waveforms are displayed.
: Set to the displayed position number.

The logic waveform display positions are as

follows.
Logic waveform
display position
Position 1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8

3. Set the display color.

(1) Move the flashing cursor to the "1, 2, 3, 4"
item of the channel for which the display
color is to be set, as shown in the figure on
the left.
(2) Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.10 Making Logic Input Settings
 161
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

NOTE
Depending on the waveform display color, the color of the printer output for
either the print function or the hard copy function changes. See the following
table.
Waveform Print function Hard copy function
display color

DARK

DARK

LIGHT

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.10 Making Logic Input Settings
 162
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.11 Copying Channels

・Duplicates selected input channel configurations (voltage axis range, input

coupling, low-pass filter) and variable function and comment settings to other
channels.
・Channels cannot be copied unless same measuring mode is selected in
channels to copy regardless of status of units.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.

2. Use the CH SELECT key to display channel

screen to copy.
3. Use the cursor key and move the flashing
cursor of desired channel number to copy
shown as figure left.
4. Use the function key or the jog control to
select channel to copy.
When for ALL is selected, channel settings
(comments) indicated by a flashing cursor are
copied to all channels.
: Channel number up
: Channel number down

5. Press Execute function key to copy.

NOTE

・When copying input channel configuration,

select for ALL to copy magnification and zero
position.
・Input channel configuration, variable function
and comment settings cannot be copied
together at the same time.
・Depending on the waveform display color, the
color of the printer output for either the print
function or the hard copy function changes.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.11 Copying Channels
 163
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.12 Arbitrary Setting of Voltage Axis Magnification/

Compression and Display Range
(Variable Function)
・The variable function allows the user to modify the waveform position and
size.
・The variable screen serves for setting the lower and upper limit of the
waveform display range.
・The allowable waveform display range between the upper and lower limits is
5000 times larger or smaller the currently set range. If the variable function
is used, the magnification is limited to 1000 times.
・The variable function can be set to ON or OFF for each channel individually.

NOTE
・If the variable function is enabled, the size of a waveform on the screen does
not change, even if the voltage axis range is changed.
・When the set value exceeds the allowable voltage axis range, a warning
message appears following the appearance of the waveform display screen
(e.g., when the measurement starts). After the warning message appears,
the set value is changed so that it falls into the allowable range.

The function can also be combined with the scaling function(*1).

This is useful when wishing to display the sensor output over the full range
(full-span display).
Example
Output from sensor After conversion
1.23 V min. → 0 [EU] min.
5.78 V max. Scaling 10 [EU] max.

The scaling function allows conversion of the voltage output by the sensor into
a desired physical quantity. But unless the setting is changed as shown below,
the display will continue to show the waveform of the sensor output voltage
(with the voltage axis and zero position as set on the channel screen). To use
the full-span display, make the following setting:
Lower limit: 0 [EU]
Upper limit: 10 [EU]

*1: See Section 9.4.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.12 Arbitrary Setting of Voltage Axis Magnification/ Compression and Display Range
 164
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method Screen: CHANNEL 2

1. Press the CHAN key to call up the
CHANNEL 2 screen.
2. Use the CH SELECT key to open selected
channel screen.
3. To use the variable function, move the
flashing cursor to the desired channel, as
shown in the figure on the left.
4. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Variable function is disabled.
: Variable function is enabled.

5. Move the flashing cursor to the position

shown in the figure on the left, and set the
lower and upper limits.
The setting can be made in two ways.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.12 Arbitrary Setting of Voltage Axis Magnification/ Compression and Display Range
 165
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 1
Move the flashing cursor to the respective
columns and select columns individually with
the JOG control or the function keys. (Move the
column with the cursor keys.)
: Value up
: Value down

: Reset. The reset value is determined by the

voltage-axis range, zero position, and
magnification ratio.
: Enter the value using the numeric keys
(Method 2).

Method 2 (Using the numeric keys)

As opposed to method 1, selection is made for
each column individually using the numeric
keypad.
1. Move the flashing cursor to the item to set.

2. Select the numeric keypad using the function

key. The number key layout appears.
3. Enter the parameter.
The cursor can be moved along the columns
using the cursor keys. After the value is input
using the numeric keys, the cursor moves to
the next column.
4. Use the function keys to make the setting.
: Reset
: Enable the input value and escape from the
ten-key input screen.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.12 Arbitrary Setting of Voltage Axis Magnification/ Compression and Display Range
 166
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.13 Input Level Monitor Function

・It is possible to set the voltage axis range and zero position while monitoring
the levels of the all the input waveforms in real time.
・The display is for each of channels 1 to 8 and logic channel groups A to D.
・Only numerical values are displayed during measurement (while the LED above
the START key is lit). A bar graph is also displayed while waiting for trigger.
Method Screen: Display
1. Press the VIEW key.
2. Use the function keys to select level monitor.
3. Use the INPUT RANGE key and the
POSITION key to change the voltage axis
range and zero position respectively.

NOTE

The level monitor is not displayed for the

disabled channel.

Channel 5 Indicates that the input waveform is outside the display range.
Single screen
Channel 3

Logic CHA to CHD

Channel 1
Indicates the instantaneous value
of each channel.
(The instantaneous value is updated
approximately every 500 ms.)
Channel 2

Channel 4 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8

Dual screen

Waveform level Full span

Waveform levels on channels

1 to 8 are displayed from the left.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.13 Input Level Monitor Function
 167
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Quad screen

X-Y screen

Logic level display

: The input is stabilized at the HI level.
: The input varies drastically between the HI and LOW levels.
: The input is stabilized at the LOW level.
: The display is disabled.

NOTE
・These functions cannot be used in FFT function (advanced version).
・These functions cannot be used in RMS Recorder function during
measurement.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.13 Input Level Monitor Function
 168
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7.14 Channel Guide

Views collation of input unit terminals to channels.

Method Screen: CHANNEL 1

1. Call up the CHANNEL 1 screen.
2. Press VIEW key (CH guide) to display
channel guide window.
3. Use any key to close window.

Setting Channels in 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT

When using 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT, input channels are not numbered in
numeric order as 1,2,3,4. Channel number is determined by connection to
units. (See below.) To verify position of channels, see Channel Guide.

1 2 5 6
3 4 7 8

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
7.14 Channel Guide
 169
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 8 2
Trigger Functions 3

5
8.1 Overview
・The term "trigger" refers to a signal which is used to control the timing for
6
recording start or stop.
・The term "triggering has occurred" refers to the state when such a signal has
activated recording start or stop.
7
・Trigger parameters for the various functions are set using the STATUS 2
screen or the DISPLAY screen.
・There are five types of signals which can be used for triggering (as trigger
8
source).

Analog trigger Level trigger 9

The input signal to analog units (CH1 to CH8) When the input signal crosses the trigger level.
is used as trigger source.
Window-in trigger
Logic trigger When the input signal enters the specified range. 10
The input signal to logic channels (CHA to
CHD) is used as trigger source Window-out trigger
When the input signal leaves the specified range.
External trigger
Voltage drop trigger
11
The input signal to the EXT TRIG connector
is used as trigger source. When the commercial power supply voltage falls
lower than the setting level.
Timer trigger
Period trigger 12
Triggering occurs from a preset start time to
a preset stop time. When the signal goes out of a preset period range.

RMS level trigger

Manual trigger
When the input signal crosses a preset level 13
Triggering occurs when the MANU TRIG (rms value).
key is pressed.

14
The manual trigger is always activated when the MANU TRIG key is pressed,
NOTE
regardless of other trigger source settings.
A

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.1 Overview
 170
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Trigger mode setting

This determines whether the trigger is accepted repeatedly after once
completing a measurement operation.

Pre-trigger setting
The pre-trigger setting can be used to record the waveform not only after but
also before triggering has occurred (memory recorder and RMS recorder
functions).

Trigger timing setting

The trigger timing setting refers to which of the start and stop events are
controlled by the trigger (recorder function).

Trigger marker
A trigger marker ( ) appears at the trigger point (the point where a trigger
event occurred) on the waveform.

NOTE
・If the trigger settings (trigger source parameters, pre-trigger) are changed
during recording, the measurement is restarted, using the new settings.
・If setting all of the trigger sources to OFF, the data is captured immediately
after measurement starts (free-run operation).
・During recording, the indication Waiting for trigger is shown on the display
until the trigger settings are met. During this interval, the level monitor is
also shown.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.1 Overview
 171
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
8.2 Setting the Trigger Mode

・The trigger mode determines the way triggering is used to control operation of 2
the 8835-01.
・When all trigger sources are OFF, a recording operation begins immediately
(free-run operation). 3
Method Screen: STATUS 2, DISPLAY
1. Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen. 4
2. Move the flashing cursor to the trig mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
5
: SINGLE
Trigger is registered only once. After
START key was pressed, unit starts 6
waveform recording when triggering occurs
and continues for preset recording length.
Measurement then ends automatically.
: REPEAT
7
Trigger is registered continuously. Unit is
in trigger standby condition when trigger
conditions are not met. Measurement ends
when STOP key is pressed.
8
: AUTO
Trigger is registered continuously. If trigger
conditions are not met within 1 second, 9
waveform recording starts automatically
and continues for preset recording length.
Measurement ends when STOP key is
pressed (memory recorder function only). 10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.2 Setting the Trigger Mode
 172
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.3 Setting the Pre-trigger (Memory Recorder and RMS

Recorder Functions)
・The pre-trigger function serves to record the waveform not only after but also
before triggering has occurred.
・In the memory recorder function, using the recording start point as 0% and
the recording end point as 100%, the trigger point can be specified in percent.
In the RMS recorder function, using the recording start point as 0 DIV, the
trigger point can be specified in DIV (0, 5, 10 DIV).
(1) In the Memory recorder function

Example recording range (recording length)

Trigger point
95%

［95%］:
95% before and 5% after trigger
50% 50%

［50%］:
50% before and 50% after trigger

5%
［5%］:
5% before and 95% after trigger

95%

［-95%］:
Recording begins at point passing 95%
of full recording length after trigger.

(2) In the RMS recorder function

Example recording range (recording length)

Trigger point
20 DIV

［0 DIV］:
Records full recording length after
trigger.
5 DIV
［5 DIV］:
Records 5 DIV before trigger and
remaining (recording length-5) after
trigger.
10 DIV
［10 DIV］:
Records 10 DIV before trigger and
remaining (recording length-10)
after trigger.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.3 Setting the Pre-trigger (Memory Recorder and RMS Recorder Functions)
 173
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

・When all trigger sources are set to OFF, the pre-trigger setting is invalid.
NOTE
・In the RMS recorder function, a trigger can be accepted immediately from
1
the start time. In some cases, therefore, the pre-trigger portion of a
recording may not be available.
・In the RMS recorder function, pre-trigger is invalid if the additional 2
recording is set.

Method Screen: STATUS 2, DISPLAY 3

Memory recorder function
1. Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen.
4
2. Move the flashing cursor to the pre-trig item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the JOG control or the function keys to 5
make the selection.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
6
window.

10

11
NOTE
・When the pre-trigger is set, the trigger will not be registered for a certain
period after the start of measurement. (During this interval, Pre-trigger
standby is shown on the display.) 12
・When the trigger can be registered, the indication Waiting for trigger is shown
on the display.
・On the DISPLAY screen, the selection window is not displayed. 13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.3 Setting the Pre-trigger (Memory Recorder and RMS Recorder Functions)
 174
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

RMS recorder function

1. Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the pre-trig item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Record from the trigger.
: Record from 5 DIV before the trigger.

: Record from 10 DIV before the trigger.

NOTE
In the RMS recorder function, recording stars immediately when triggering
occurs, even if the pre-trigger is set.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.3 Setting the Pre-trigger (Memory Recorder and RMS Recorder Functions)
 175
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
8.4 Trigger Timing (Recorder Function)

・The moment the trigger occurs, the time related to the waveform being 2
recorded can be set.
・Not only the waveform after the trigger but also the waveform before the
trigger can be recorded. 3
Method Screen: STATUS 2
1. Call up the STATUS 2 screen.
4
2. Move the flashing cursor to the timing item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection. 5
: Recording starts when the trigger is
applied.
: Recording starts only when the START 6
key is pressed, and stops when the trigger
is applied.
: Recording starts when the trigger is
applied, and stops when the trigger is 7
applied next.

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.4 Trigger Timing (Recorder Function)
 176
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.5 Setting Trigger Source AND/OR Linking

The analog trigger, logic trigger, and timer trigger can be linked with the
AND/OR logical operators.
OR: Triggering occurs when conditions for one trigger are met.
AND: Triggering occurs when conditions for all triggers are met.

NOTE
If the trigger source is set to AND, and the trigger source setting conditions
have already been met when the START key is pressed, triggering does not
occur. When the conditions are not met once but met subsequently, triggering
occurs.

Method Screen: STATUS 2

1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 2 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the trigger source
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the AND or
OR.
: Link trigger sources with logical operator
OR.
: Link trigger sources with logical operator
AND.

Example The figures below show the difference between the effect of AND/OR linking.

Channel Trigger Trigger level Slope Filter

CH1 Level 0.00 V OFF
CH2 Level 0.00 V OFF

AND linking OR linking

CH1 waveform CH1 waveform

CH2 waveform CH2 waveform

０Ｖ ０Ｖ

CH1 and CH2 level both intersect 0 V line from below CH1 or CH2 level intersects 0 V line from below

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.5 Setting Trigger Source AND/OR Linking
 177
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function

・The analog signal input channels can be used as trigger source.

・The type of trigger that can be used for the various functions is limited.

Available trigger types for each function

Function Memory Recorder RMS
Trigger recorder recorder

Level Yes Yes No

Window Yes Yes No
Voltage drop Yes No No
Period Yes Yes No
RMS level No No Yes

Method Screen: STATUS 2, DISPLAY 0-06

1. Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the trigger
type.

Changing the analog channel on the

DISPLAY screen

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 178
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method
1. Move the flashing cursor to the point shown
in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to select the channel
for which you want to set the analog trigger.
: Channel number up
: Channel number down

8.6.1 Level Trigger (RMS Recorder Function Excluded)

・Triggering occurs when the input signal crosses the preset trigger level
(voltage) with the preset trigger slope ( , ).
・When a trigger filter is used, triggering occurs only within the filter width.
This is useful to exclude noise.

Input waveform

Trigger level Trigger level

Upward trigger direction (slope : ) Downward trigger direction (slope : )

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 179
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Trigger filter
・Triggering occurs when the trigger conditions are met within the filter width.
・This is useful to prevent spurious triggering by noise.
・The filter width is specified by the number of divisions of the memory recorder
function, while it is fixed to 10 ms, which is enabled and disabled using the
ON/OFF keys, for the recorder function.

Rising trigger slope : Filter width

Triggering occurs

Trigger level

Triggering does not occur here

Method Screen: STATUS 2, DISPLAY

1. Select the level trigger.
(1) Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen.
(2) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(3) Use the function keys to select level trigger.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 180
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2. Set the trigger level.

(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.
(On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot
be made with the JOG control.)
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

3. Select the trigger direction (slope).

(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Enables triggering on the leading edge.
: Enables triggering on the falling edge.

4. Set the trigger filter

This setting cannot be made from the display
screen.
(1) Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 2 screen.
(2) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(3) Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the selection.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 181
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

In the recorder function

: Trigger filter is disabled.
: Trigger filter is enabled.
Filter width is 10 ms.

Example
To cause triggering at point A or point B with the sine wave shown below, make
the following settings.
Point A trigger level: 200 mV, trigger direction (slope): rising ( )
Point B trigger level: -600 mV, trigger direction (slope): falling ( )

Ａ
200 mV
0V 0V

Ｂ
-600 mV

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 182
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.6.2 Window-In, Window-Out Trigger (RMS Recorder Function

Excluded)
Window-in trigger
Set upper limit level and lower limit level and activated when the input signal
enters the range between these limits.

Window-out trigger
Set upper limit level and lower limit level and activated when the input signal
leaves this range.

Window-in-trigger Window-out-trigger

Upper limit 上限値

Upper limit

Lower limit Lower

下限値 limit

Method Screen: STATUS 2, DISPLAY

1. Select the window-in or window-out trigger.
(1) Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen.
(2) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(3) Use the function keys to select window-in or
window-out.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 183
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2. Set the lower and upper trigger levels.

(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to set the lower trigger level.
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

(2) Move the flashing cursor to the position

shown in the figure on the left, and use the
JOG control or the function keys to set the
upper trigger level.
(On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot
be made with the JOG control.)

NOTE
The upper trigger level must not be smaller than the lower trigger level, or
the lower trigger level must not be larger than the upper trigger level.

3. Set the trigger filter

・This setting cannot be made from the display
screen.
・Filter width is specified using sampling
points.
(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select the filter width.
In the memory recorder function
OFF: Trigger filter is disabled.
0.1 to 10.0: Trigger filter is enabled.
Filter width is specified using
divisions.
In the recorder function
: Trigger filter is disabled.
: Trigger filter is enabled.
Filter width is 10 ms.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 184
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Example
In order to cause triggering when the signal as shown in the figure below leaves
the hatched area, the following settings are made:

Window-out trigger Upper limit : 1 V, lower limit: -1 V

1V

-1 V

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 185
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.6.3 Voltage Drop Trigger (Memory Recorder Function Only)

・The 8835-01 is designed to measure commercial power supplies (50/60 Hz).
・This unit detects momentary voltage drops in commercial power supplies.
・When the peak of the voltage falls lower than the setting level, the trigger will
occur.

NOTE
・The time axis ranges that can be used are 100 μs to 50 ms/DIV.
・If the conditions are met already when measurement is started, triggering
does not occur. Triggering only occurs if the conditions are removed and
then met again.

Method Screen: STATUS 2, DISPLAY

1. Select the voltage drop trigger.
(1) Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen.
(2) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(3) Use the function keys to select voltage drop.

2. Select the frequency of the measuring

object.
The setting cannot be made on the DISPLAY
screen.
(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the function keys to select the
frequency.
: 50 Hz
: 60 Hz

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 186
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3. Set the trigger level.

The rms value as well as the trigger level are
displayed
(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the JOG control or the function keys
to set the trigger level.
(On the DISPLAY screen, the setting
cannot be made with the JOG control.)
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

Example
For a signal such as shown in the illustration (frequency 50 Hz), the following
applies:
Vmax. < 1.000 V (RMS < 707.1 mVrms)

1/2 cycle

1.000 V
Trigger level

1.000 V
Trigger level

To perform trigger measurement under the above conditions, make the

following setting.
Voltage drop f = 50 Hz Level = 1.000 V (707.1 mVrms)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 187
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.6.4 Period Trigger (RMS Recorder Function Excluded)

The period trigger setting determines the period reference voltage and period
range. This trigger is tripped when the measured period of the rise (or fall) of
the reference voltage exceeds the period range.

NOTE
・The setting for the period range of the period trigger changes depending on
the sampling period.
Lower limit: Ten times the sampling period or more
Upper limit: 20000 times the sampling period or less
・In the recorder function, check the sampling period setting when using the
period trigger.

Method Screen: STATUS 2

1. Select the period trigger.
(1) Call up the STATUS 2 screen.
(2) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(3) Use the function keys to select cycle.

2. Set the period range.

(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the JOG control or the function keys to
set the lower limit of the period.
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

(3) Set the upper limit in the same way.

NOTE

On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot be

made with the JOG control.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 188
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3. Select the trigger direction (slope).

The setting cannot be made on the DISPLAY
screen.
(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the function keys to select the trigger
direction (slope).
: Enables triggering on the leading edge.
: Enables triggering on the falling edge.

4. Set the reference voltage value.

The setting cannot be made on the DISPLAY
screen.
(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the JOG control or the function keys to
make the setting.
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

NOTE
Since a trigger filter is not prepared for the period trigger, triggering may
mistakenly occur due to noise (see the figure below).
To prevent such an event, use an appropriate low-pass filter.

Reference voltage
Direction (slope : )

Reference voltage

Triggering occurs, since the system judges that

the period deviates from the specified range.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 189
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Triggering position of the period trigger

The system monitors the period of the signal that crosses the set reference
voltage. When the monitored period deviates from the set range, triggering
occurs. The trigger position is determined by the set period range and the
measurement signal period.
(1) Signal with a period to be measured that is smaller than the lower limit of the
period trigger (trigger slope: ):
Signal cycle

Reference voltage

Lower limit example 1

Lower limit example 2

When the signal crosses the reference voltage at the set trigger slope before
the lower limit of the set period range appears on the screen, the intersection
is always defined as the triggering position.

(2) Signal with a period to be measured that is larger than the upper limit of the
period trigger (trigger slope: ):
Signal cycle

Reference voltage

Example of upper limit 1

Example of upper limit 2

When the upper limit of the set period range appears on the screen before the
signal crosses the reference voltage at the set trigger slope, the upper limit is
defined as the triggering position. The triggering position is determined by the
position of the upper limit in the period range, as shown in the figure above.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 190
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Example
In order to cause triggering when the signal as shown in the figure below leaves
the period range of 0.9 to 1.1 s, the following settings are made:
Lower limit of the period: 900 ms, Upper limit of the period: 1.1 s,
Reference voltage: 0.000 V

0V Reference voltage

1.2 s
0.95 s 1.05 s 1.1 s
Within the Within the Upper limit of
period range period range the period

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 191
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.6.5 RMS Level Trigger (RMS Recorder Function Only)

・The commercial power supplies, 50/60 Hz and the DC signals can be
measured.
・This trigger occurs when the input signal crosses a predetermined trigger level
(rms value) in a particular direction ("slope": or ).

Input waveform

RMS trigger RMS trigger

level level

Upward trigger direction (slope : ) Downward trigger direction (slope : )

Method Screen: STATUS 2, DISPLAY

1. Select the RMS level trigger.
(1) Call up the STATUS 2 or DISPLAY screen.
(2) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(3) Use the function keys to select RMS.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 192
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2. Set the trigger level.

(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the JOG control or the function keys to
set the trigger level.
On the DISPLAY screen, the setting cannot
be made with the JOG control.
: Value up, large step
: Value up, small step

: Value down, small step

: Value down, large step

3. Select the trigger direction (slope).

(1) Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
(2) Use the function keys to select the trigger
direction (slope).
: Enables triggering on the leading edge.
: Enables triggering on the falling edge.

NOTE
・Set the frequency of the measuring object on the STATUS 1 screen.
・’AND’ cannot be set between the trigger sources using the RMS level trigger
and the logic trigger. When a shift is made from "OR" to "AND," the logic
trigger setting is turned OFF.
・When the trigger source is set as "AND", the trigger is engaged
simultaneously with the start in the following instances.
Upward trigger direction If the input signal is higher
(slope : ) than the trigger level.
Downward trigger direction If the input signal is lower
(slope : ) than the trigger level.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 193
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Example
To cause triggering at point A with the signal as shown in the figure below, make
the following settings.
RMS level: 1.000 V, trigger direction (slope): ( )

1.00 Vr
A

0 Vr

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.6 Using the Analog Trigger Function
 194
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.7 Using the Logic Trigger Function

・The signal of a logic channel can be used as trigger source.

・A trigger pattern and logical operator (AND/OR) are specified, and triggering
occurs when the trigger conditions are met.
・A trigger filter can be specified, so that triggering occurs only when the trigger
conditions are met within the filter width.

Method Screen: STATUS 2

(1) Set the logic trigger
1. Call up the STATUS 2 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select ON.
: Logic trigger is not used.

: Triggering occurs if any one of the logic

input signals conforms to the trigger
pattern.
: Triggering only occurs if all of the logic
input signals conforms to the trigger
pattern.

NOTE
・If the conditions are met already when measurement is started (AND: all
trigger patterns are met, OR: one trigger pattern is met), triggering does not
occur at this slope. Triggering only occurs if the conditions are removed and
then met again.
・’AND’ cannot be set between the trigger sources using the logic trigger and
the RMS level trigger. When a shift is made from "OR" to "AND," the logic
trigger setting is turned OFF.
(2) Set the trigger filter.
Filter width is specified using sampling points.
1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure.
2. Use the function keys or the JOG control to
make the setting.
In the memory recorder function
OFF: Trigger filter is disabled.
0.1 to 10: Trigger filter is enabled.
Filter width is specified using divisions.
In the recorder function
: Trigger filter is disabled.
: Trigger filter is enabled.
Filter width is 10 ms.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.7 Using the Logic Trigger Function
 195
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(3) Set the trigger pattern

・When "CH A" is selected, the setting is for logic input CH A1 - CH A4 from
left to right.
・Make the setting with the function keys.
1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Select 1 - 4 with the function key display.
: Signal disregarded
: Low level signal
: High level signal

Setting example of the logic trigger

(1) If the trigger pattern has been set to "10××" with the operator OR, then
triggering occurs as shown in the figure below.

OR

Trigger pattern

CHA1 1

CHA2 0

CHA3 ×

CHA4 ×

(2) If the trigger pattern has been set to "10××" with the operator AND, then
triggering occurs as shown in the figure below.

AND

Trigger pattern

CHA1 1

CHA2 0

CHA3 ×

CHA4 ×

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.7 Using the Logic Trigger Function
 196
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.8 Using the Timer Trigger Function

・This function serves to activate recording at preset times.

・Triggering can be performed at constant intervals within a preset start time
and stop time.

Time interval Time interval

Start time Stop time

The internal trigger (analog trigger etc.) can be made active for the preset
time interval only.
→ Set the time interval to 0.

Method Screen: STATUS 2

(1) Set the timer trigger
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 2 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the timer source
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select ON.

(2) Set the start and end time

1. Move the flashing cursor to the start item.
2. Use the function keys or the JOG control to
make the setting.
: Value up, 10-units
: Value up, 1-units

: Value down, small step

: Value down, 10-units
: Use current time as start time or end time.

3. Move the flashing cursor to the stop item.

4. Use the function keys or the JOG control to
make the setting.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.8 Using the Timer Trigger Function
 197
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(3) Set the trigger interval (day, hour, minute, second)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the interval item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys or the JOG control to
make the setting.
Available time ranges are between 0 day 0
hour 0 minute 0 second to 31 days 23 hours
59 minutes 59 seconds.

NOTE
・Set the start time and end time to a point after the pressing of the START
key.
・When the trigger mode is set to "Single", only one trigger event is valid for
the start time. The settings for time interval and end time are invalid (when
timer trigger only is ON).
・When trigger sources have been linked with OR, all trigger sources that are
ON are valid. Therefore triggering may occur even before the start time, and
trigger standby and measurement may continue even after the stop time.
・When trigger sources have been linked with AND, trigger standby is
enabled at the measurement start time and at each time interval, and
triggering will occur when all trigger conditions other than timer trigger are
met simultaneously.
・To perform recording at regular intervals, establish the following settings.
Trigger mode: continuous
Trigger source linking: AND or OR
Other trigger sources: all OFF
Between end of recording and standby, triggers are invalid while processing
is taking place (auto save, auto print, waveform display process, calculation
process) and therefore data may not be recorded at regular intervals with
some measurement setting.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.8 Using the Timer Trigger Function
 198
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Relation between timer trigger and AND/OR linking

(1) When trigger sources are set to OR
All trigger sources are valid. If other trigger sources have been set, triggering
can also occur before the start time or after the stop time.
Invalid (overlaps with recording)
Measurement start

Level trigger
slope:

Start time
Stop time
Timer trigger
Interval

Recording length

(2) When trigger sources are set to AND

・Measurement is carried out from the start time to the end time. Triggering
occurs at the preset intervals if the conditions for the other trigger sources
are also met at these points.
・If the interval has been set to 0s, triggering occurs at any point between the
start and stop time, if if the conditions for the other trigger sources are met.
Invalid (overlaps with recording)
Measurement Outside of Invalid (not more than one trigger in interval)
start timer trigger
Outside of
timer trigger
Level trigger
slope

AND AND AND

Start time
Stop time
Timer trigger
Measurement
Interval stop

Recording length

NOTE ･ When the trigger mode has been set to SINGLE, only one triggering action
occurs after the measurement was started.
･ To perform recording at regular intervals, establish the following settings.
Trigger mode: continuous
Trigger source linking: AND or OR
Other trigger sources: all OFF

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.8 Using the Timer Trigger Function
 199
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.9 Using the External Trigger Function

・An external signal can be used as trigger source.

・The EXT TRIG connector is used for this purpose.
・The external trigger is activated by either shorting the EXT TRIG terminal or
applying a falling edge signal going below 2.5 V.

External trigger connector

Method Screen: STATUS 2

1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 2 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: External trigger is not used.
: External trigger is used.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.9 Using the External Trigger Function
 200
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8.10 Manual Trigger

Triggering occurs when the MANU TRIG key is pressed.

NOTE
The manual trigger is always activated when the MANU TRIG key is pressed,
regardless of other trigger source setting.

: Manual trigger is disabled.

: Manual trigger is enabled.

8.11 Trigger Output Connector

・When triggering occurs, a signal is output from the TRIG OUT connector.
・This can be used to synchronize several 8835-01 units.
・For details, see Section 12.6.

NOTE
Pressing the and cursor keys simultaneously to use the auto ranging
function causes a trigger signal to be output. Care is therefore required when
using the auto ranging function when the trigger output connector is in use.
(Only a memory recorder function)

Trigger output connector

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
8.10 Manual Trigger
 201
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 9 2
SYSTEM Screen Settings 3

5
(For all functions)

9.1 Overview 6
The SYSTEM screen serves to set the following items which are common to all
functions. 7
Special settings ・Channel selection
・Start key backup
・Setting the grid 8
・Channel marker function
・Time display
・List and gauge functions
・Printer density
9
・Backlight saver function
・Setting display colors
・Setting the beep sound 10
・Language
・PRINT/EXT.SMPL
Scaling function ・Conversion ratio scaling 11
・2-point scaling
Appending comments ・Title
・Analog channel 12
・Logic channel
Interface settings ・Setting the media
・Setting the screen hard
copy output destination
13
Initialization ・Setting the clock
・Initializing waveform data
・System reset
14
Self check ・ROM/RAM check
・Printer check
・Display check 15
・Key check
・PC card check

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.1 Overview
 202
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.2 How to Use the SYSTEM Screen

・Press the SYSTEM key or the function key to call up the SYSTEM screen.
・On the SYSTEM screen, items common to all functions are displayed.
・Press the SYSTEM key to switch items and then make the setting.

NOTE
If the flashing cursor is moved to the position shown in the figure above after
the SYSTEM key is pressed to call up any of the SYSTEM screens, the other
SYSTEM screens can be called up with the function key.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.2 How to Use the SYSTEM Screen
 203
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]

The following functions are available. 2

(1) Channel selection
(2) START key backup
(3) Setting the grid
3
(4) Channel marker function *
(5) Displaying the time from the trigger point * 4
(6) Setting the List and gauge functions
(7) Printer density
(8) Setting the backlight saver function 5
(9) Setting screen colors
(10) Setting the beep sound
(11) Setting the language
6
(12) Setting PRINT/EXT.SMPL
*: These functions cannot be used in FFT function (advanced version).
7

10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 204
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.3.1 Channel Selection (Memory Recorder Function)

・Assign channels to allocate memory for measurement data.
・The setting is valid only when the memory recorder function is used.
・The smaller the number of channels in use, the longer will be settable
recording length (see Section 14.3).
Method Screen: SYSTEM (SETUP) 11-07
1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET UP
screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position shown
in the figure on the left.
3. Press the function key to make the setting.
: Allocates the memory for measurement data
to channel 1. Measurement cannot be made
on channels 2 to 8. Only logic channel A can
be used.
: Allocates the memory for measurement data
to channels 1 and 2. Measurement cannot be
made on channels 3 to 8. Only logic channels
A and B ca be used.
: Allocates the memory for measurement data
to 4 channels. Measurement cannot be made
on channels 5 to 8. All logic channels can be
used.
: Allocates the memory for measurement data
to 8 channels. All logic channels can be used.

9.3.2 Start Key Backup

・When this function is enabled, the unit will operate as follows: If the power
supply is interrupted during recording operation (while the START key LED is
lit), and then the power supply is restored, the 8835-01 goes back into the
measurement operation mode, and recording is restarted immediately.
・If the trigger function is used, the unit goes into trigger standby mode.
However, this is disabled with the timer trigger.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP) 11-08

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press the function key to make the setting.
: The start key backup function is not used.

: The start key backup function is used.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 205
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
9.3.3 Setting the Grid
・Selects the type of grid shown on the display screen and drawn on the
recording paper. 2
・The following five settings are available: OFF, standard, fine, standard (dark),
fine (dark).
・On the waveform display screen, the standard and fine grids are defined as 3
the standard, and the standard (dark) and fine (dark) grids are defined as the
standard (dark) grids.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP)

4
1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
5
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press the function key to make the setting. 6
: No grid on display and printout
: Standard grid on printout
7
: Fine grid on printout
: Standard (dark) grid on printout
: Fine (dark) grid on printout 8

9
9.3.4 Channel Marker Function
The channel numbers or the comments are printed together with the
waveform on the recording paper (see Section 9.5).
10
Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP) 11-10
1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET 11
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
12
3. Press the function key to make the selection.
: Channel numbers will not be printed for the 13
waveform on the recording paper.
: Channel numbers will be printed for the
waveform on the recording paper.
14
: Comments will be printed for the waveform
on the recording paper.

NOTE This function cannot be used in FFT function (advanced version). 15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 206
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.3.5 Displaying the Time from the Trigger Point (Time Display)
The time from the trigger point and other information can be printed.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Displays the time from the trigger point
(unit: fixed).
: Displays the time from the trigger point
(unit: base 60).
: Displays the number of DIV from trigger
point.
: Displays the time when a waveform is
captured.
NOTE This function cannot be used in FFT function (advanced version).

9.3.6 List and Gauge Functions

When a waveform is printed (except for screen hard copies), the gauge can be
printed out at the beginning, and a listing can be printed out at the end.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP) 11-12

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: No gauges or listing
: Print listing only

: Print gauges only

: Print both gauges and listing

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 207
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
9.3.7 Setting the Printer Density
・Serves to set the printer density.
・The density can be set in five steps. 2
・Select the setting which yields the most easy to read printout.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP) 11-12 3

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position 4
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
5
: Print light
: Print semi-light

: Print standard density 6

: Print semi-dark
: Print dark
7

9.3.8 Setting Backlight Saver Function 8

・When this function is enabled, LCD backlighting is turned off automatically if
no key is pressed for the preset interval. 9
・Pressing any key will turn the display on again.
・This increases the service life of the backlight.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP) 10

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
11
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection. 12
: Increase time.
: Decrease time.
: Disable the backlight saver function.
13
OFF: The display is shown continuously.
1 to 30: The display automatically goes off 14
after the preset interval (minutes).

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 208
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.3.9 Setting the Display Colors

・Serves to set the display color.
・The display color can be selected from among the display colors 1 to 8 and the
customer color 9 which can be set as desired.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SETUP)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Display color number up
: Display color number down
: Call up the custom setting screen

Custom setting (setting the color as desired)

1. Change the R.G.B. setting values of each
item on the screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the item for
which you want to change the setting values,
and use the JOG control or the function keys
to make the settings.
3. The setting values inside the window applies
to the colors of the particular window.
When a value is changed, the color of the
area corresponding to this item changes.
: Value up
: Value down
: Exit from the custom setting screen

NOTE
・When system reset is executed, set colors are initialized and become the
same color as that of display color 1.
・Only one customer color type can be set as desired.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 209
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.3.10 Setting the Beep Sound

Serves to set the beep sound.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET UP
screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Beep is not heard.

: Beeps at error, warning, and failure of

measuring waveform area decision (advanced
version) and waveform parameter decision
(advanced version).
: Beeps at start, trigger, stop, completion of
automatic save, error, warning, and failure
of measuring waveform area decision
(advanced version) and waveform parameter
decision (advanced version).

9.3.11 Setting the Language

Serves to set the display language.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: The display language is Japanese.

: The display language is English.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 210
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.3.12 Setting PRINT/EXT.SMPL

・Selecting external printing/external sampling terminal.
・System reset defaults to external printing.
PRINT: Enables external printing in all functions. By setting time axis range
(frequency in FFT) to External in memory recorder and FFT (advanced
version), it functions as external sampling terminal.
EXT.SMPL: Functions as external sampling terminal. (Memory recorder and
FFT only)

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Use for external printing and external
sampling terminal.
: Use for external sampling terminal.

NOTE
In memory recorder and FFT (advanced version), setting time axis range
(frequency in FFT) to External determines use of external sampling terminal
even when PRINT is selected.
For external printing, set time axis range (or frequency) to another setting
other than External.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.3 Special Function Settings [ SETUP ]
 211
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]

・The scaling function can be used to convert an output voltage from a sensor or
similar into a physical quantity.
・Two types of scaling functions are available.
Method 1 (conversion ratio scaling)
Scaling is performed by specifying a physical quantity to correspond to a 1 V
input signal (conversion ratio: EU/V), an offset value, and the unit (EU:
Engineering Units). This will cause the measurement voltage to be converted
into the selected units.
Method 2 (2-point scaling)
Scaling is performed by specifying two input signal points (voltage values) and
the conversion values for these two points in engineering units (EU). This will
cause the measurement voltage to be converted into the selected units.
・The gauge scale (maximum and minimum values of horizontal axis) and A/B
cursor measurement values are displayed in the scaled units.
・Scaling can be performed for every channel.
・The scaling function can be used with the variable function.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 2 (SCALING)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
SCALING screen.

2. Move the flashing cursor to the position

shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Use conversion ratio scaling

: Use 2-point scaling

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 212
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.4.1 Conversion Ratio Scaling

Scaling is performed by specifying a physical quantity to correspond to a 1V
input signal (conversion ratio: EU/V), an offset value, and the unit (EU:
Engineering Units). This will cause the measurement voltage to be converted
into the selected units.

EU

Conversion is performed using the

incline (conversion ratio) and offset
value.

The setting can be made in two ways.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 213
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 1 Screen: SYSTEM 2 (SCALING)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the channel for
which you want to perform scaling and use
the function keys to make the setting.
: Scaling not used
: Scaling used (specify exponent as integer)

: Scaling used (specify exponent as multiple

of 3)
: Reset.

NOTE
If the exponents of data are integers (SCI), the numeral used as the cursor
value or the value to be printed out will be expressed as it is rather than in
exponential form, provided that it is 0.0001 to less than 100,000.

2. Enter the "Conversion ratio: EU/V" and

"Offset". The setting range for both these
items is -9.9999E+9 to +9.9999E+9.
Move the flashing cursor to each digit and
use the JOG control or the function keys to
enter individual digits.
(Use the cursor keys to move the column.)
: Value up
: Value down

: Reset.
1. Scaling ON/OFF 3. Enter engineering unit (EU)
: Enter the value using the numeric keys.
2. Set conversion ratio and offset

3. Enter the "Unit name: EU".

Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left and enter the
required unit. See Section 9.4.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 214
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 2 (Using the numeric keys)

As opposed to method 1, selection is made not for each column individually
but globally using the numeric keypad.
1. Move the flashing cursor to the channel for
which you want to perform scaling and use
the function keys to change the setting to
ON.
: Scaling not used
: Scaling used (specify exponent as integer)

: Scaling used (specify exponent as multiple

of 3)
: Reset.

NOTE
If the exponents of data are integers (SCI), the numeral used as the cursor
value or the value to be printed out will be expressed as it is rather than in
exponential form, provided that it is 0.0001 to less than 100,000.

2. Move the flashing cursor to the value which

you want to enter, and select TEN-KEY INPUT
using the function key. The number key
layout appears.
3. Enter the "Conversion ratio: EU/V" and
"Offset". The setting range for both these
items is -9.9999E+9 to +9.9999E+9.
The cursor can be moved along the columns
using the cursor keys. After the value is input
using the numeric keys, the cursor moves to
the next column. (The parameters can be
input using the function keys.)
: Value up
: Value down

: Reset
: Escape from the ten-key input screen.

4. Enter the "Unit name: EU".

Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left and enter the
required unit. See Sections 9.4.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 215
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.4.2 2-Point Scaling

Scaling is performed by specifying two input signal points (voltage values) and
the conversion values for these two points in engineering units (EU). This will
cause the measurement voltage to be converted into the selected units.

EU

SCH
Conversion ratio and offset value are
calculated from 2 points.
SCL

VL VH Ｖ

The setting can be made in two ways.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 216
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 1 Screen: SYSTEM 2 (SCALING)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the channel for
which you want to perform scaling and use
the function keys to make the setting.
: Scaling not used
: Scaling used (specify exponent as integer)

: Scaling used (specify exponent as multiple

of 3)

NOTE
If the exponents of data are integers (SCI), the numeral used as the cursor
value or the value to be printed out will be expressed as it is rather than in
exponential form, provided that it is 0.0001 to less than 100,000.

2. Enter the two points.

・Enter the voltage value on the left and the
corresponding converted value on the right.
・The setting range is -9.9999E+9 to
+9.9999E+9.
Move the flashing cursor to each digit and
use the JOG control or the function keys to
enter individual digits.
(Use the cursor keys to move the column.)
: Value up

1. Scaling ON/OFF : Value down

3. Enter engineering unit (EU)
2. Set voltage value conversion value : Reset
: Enter the value using the numeric keys.

3. Enter the "Unit name: EU".

Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left and enter the
required unit. See Sections 9.4.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 217
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 2 (Using the numeric keys)

As opposed to method 1, selection is made not for each column individually
but globally using the numeric keypad.
1. Move the flashing cursor to the channel for
which you want to perform scaling and use
the function keys to change the setting to ON.
: Scaling not used
: Scaling used (specify exponent as integer)

: Scaling used (specify exponent as multiple of

3)

NOTE
If the exponents of data are integers (SCI), the numeral used as the cursor
value or the value to be printed out will be expressed as it is rather than in
exponential form, provided that it is 0.0001 to less than 100,000.

2. Move the flashing cursor to the value which

you want to enter, and select TEN-KEY INPUT
using the function key. The number key
layout appears.
3. Enter the two points (for details, refer to
Method 1).
The cursor can be moved along the columns
using the cursor keys. After the value is input
using the numeric keys, the cursor moves to
the next column. (The parameters can be
input using the function keys.)
: Value up
: Value down

: Reset
: Escape from the ten-key input screen.

4. Enter the "Unit name: EU".

Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left and enter the
required unit. See Sections 9.4.3.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 218
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

NOTE
･ When the 2-point scaling is used, scaling is performed using the following
equation.

ＶＨ: Voltage high point ＳＣＨ: Scaling high point

ＶＬ: Voltage low point ＳＣＬ: Scaling low point

・The ranges for the parts enclosed in dotted lines are as follows.
-9.9999E+9 ≦ value of enclosed part ≦ -1.0000E-9
Value of enclosed part = 0
-1.0000E-9 ≦ value of enclosed part ≦ +9.9999E+9

A setting outside of the above range cannot be made.

Relationship between scaling function and variable function

・Convert the measured value to a physical quantity.

Scaling setting ・Set the unit.

Variable setting ・Set the upper and lower limits to be used after conversion
to a physical quantity.

・Results are the same regardless of the order in which and are set.
・In , set the variable function with the value after scaling.
(Set the unit (EU) on the SCALING screen.)

NOTE
･ When using both the scaling and variable functions, the upper and lower
limits for the variable display after scaling are as follows.
-9.9999E＋29 ≦setting value ≦ -1.0000E - 29
Setting value = 0
+1.0000E-29 ≦ setting value ≦ +9.9999E+29

･ When a setting outside of the above range is attempted, a warning indication

is given.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 219
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.4.3 Unit Entry Procedure

The unit (EU) after scaling is entered.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 2 (SCALING)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Enter the unit.
: Select from the unit list.
: Clear the set unit.

3. Enter the unit name.

For details on unit input, see Section 9.5.5.

4. When List is selected, the unit setting is

selected by the displayed function keys.
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection window.

: Enter the selected unit .

: Cansel.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 220
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.4.4 Copy Settings

Scaling settings can be copied from one channel to another, by specifying
either a conversion ratio or two points.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 2 (SCALING)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the channel
number of the copy destination channel.
2. Use the function keys or the Jog/Shuttle
control to specify the copy target channel.
Selection of "for ALL" enables the settings
(comments) for the channel with the flashing
cursor to be copied to all channels
: Select next higher channel.
: Copy source channel.

: Select next lower channel.

Specifies the copy Specifies copy :Execute.

destination channel source channel

3. Press the Execute function key to copy.

In the example at the left, CH1 settings are
copied to CH2.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 221
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.4.5 Scaling Setting Example

The example below shows the scaling function

of the strain unit.
When a sensor having a gage ratio of 2 (the
conversion ratio is characterized as "3G =
1200 με(micro strain)") is used:

Scaling method：2-point scaling

Setting：SCI or ENG
Converting value：1200（με）→3（scale）
0（με） →0（scale）
unit (eu)：G

1600 4 Through the use of the scaling function, the

1200 3 signal from the sensor can be obtained in the
800 2 form of a physical quantity.
・Cursor values A and B, respectively, show
［V］ ［G］
0 0
the physical quantities.
・If the gage is turned on before the printout
is made, the gage is output in a physical
-800 -2
quantity.

-1600 -4

The example below shows the type of scaling

when the measurement range is set to 10 A
using the 9018 CLAMP ON PROBE.

Scaling method：2-point scaling

Setting：SCI or ENG
Converting value：0.2（V）→10（scale）
0（V）→10（scale）
unit (eu)：A

0.2 10
Through the use of the scaling function, the
signal from the sensor can be obtained in the
0.1 5.0
form of a current value.
［V］ ［A］ ・Cursor values A and B, respectively, show
0 0 the current values.
・If the gage is turned on before the printout
-0.1 -5.0 is made, the gage is output in a currnt
value.
-0.2 -10

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.4 Scaling Function [ SCALING ]
 222
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]

Two types of comment are available.
(1) Title comment input
Title comments of up to 40 characters can be
included on the recording paper.
If "COMMENT" or "SET & COMMENT" is
selected, this title comment will be included on
the recording paper in all functions.
(2) Input of comments for each channel
Comments of up to 40 characters can be
included on the recording paper on each
channel.
If "COMMENT" or "SET & COMMENT" is
selected, this comment will be included on the
recording paper in all functions.

NOTE
When the printer format is "numeric data", the setting items are not printed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]
 223
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.5.1 Title Comment Input

・Title comment input is described.
・Three types of title comment are available.

1. SET: Function, time axis range, magnification/compression ratio along the

time axis, date and time of trigger
2. COMMENT: Comment of up to 40 characters
3. SET & COMMENT: Both 1 and 2

Method Screen: SYSTEM 3 (COMMENT)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
COMMENT screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Standard printout is performed.
: Setting item is printed.

: Comment is printed.
: Both item and comment are printed.

4. When the flashing cursor is moved with the

CURSOR keys, the following function key
indication appears.
: Display the comment input window.
: Clear the currently displayed comments.

For details on comment input, see Section

9.5.5.
When "COMMENT" or "SET & COMMENT" is
selected, the comments are printed for the
report print (see Section 10.7.7).
NOTE

The printer-recording format is set to numeric,

and setting items are not printed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]
 224
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.5.2 Analog Channel Comment Input

・Analog channel comment input is described.
・Three types of analog channel comment are available.

1. SET: Full-span voltage for each channel, voltage axis range,

magnification/compression ratio along the voltage axis, zero position,
low-pass filter setting
2. COMMENT: Comment of up to 40 characters
3. SET & COMMENT: Both 1 and 2

Method Screen: SYSTEM 3 (COMMENT)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
COMMENT screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Standard printout is performed.
: Setting item is printed.

: Comment is printed.
: Both item and comment are printed.

4. When the flashing cursor is moved with the

CURSOR keys, the following function key
indication appears.
: Display the comment input window.
: Clear the currently displayed comments.

For details on comment input, see Section 9.5.5.

When "COMMENT" or "SET & COMMENT" is
selected, the comments are printed for the report
print (see Section 10.7.7).
NOTE

The printer-recording format is set to numeric,

and setting items are not printed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]
 225
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.5.3 Moving to the Analog Channel Comment Input Screen or

the Logic Channel Comment Input Screen

Method

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position

shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Move to the analog channel comment
input screen.
: Move to the logic channel comment input
screen.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]
 226
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.5.4 Logic Channel Comment Input

・Logic channel comment input is described.
・One type of logic channel comment is available.

COMMENT
Comments can be entered separately for every channel.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 3 (COMMENT)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
COMMENT screen.
2. Call up the logic channel comment input
screen
3. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
4. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Standard printout is performed.

: Comment is printed.

5. When the flashing cursor is moved with the

CURSOR keys, the following function key
indication appears.
: Display the comment input window.
: Clear the currently displayed comments.

For details on comment input, see Section

9.5.5.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]
 227
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.5.5 Character Entry Procedure

The procedure for entering the characters for the comments, units, etc. is
described.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 3 (COMMENT)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position in
which you want to enter the comment.
2. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Enter a comment.

: Clear a comment.

3. Use the cursor keys to select the character,

and press the F1 (set) key to enter it.
・Use the JOG control to move the cursor.
JOG control: Moves the cursor in the
character entry field
Cursor: Move the the character selection
cursor.
・The VIEW key performs backspacing.
4. When the all the characters are entered,
press the F5 (quit) key.

A comment made on one channel can be copied onto another channel. This
can be done for either an analog or logic channel.

Method
1. Move the flashing cursor to the channel for
which you want to enter the comment.
2. Use the function keys to select the channel
to be copied.
: Channel number up

: Channel number down

: Copy the comments for the selected
channel.

Indicates the copy source channel

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]
 228
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.5.6 Description of Window Contents

Reset: Recalls an unedited comment in
comment input mode. Recalls the
default units in unit input mode.
Space: Enter a space.
BS: Performs backspacing (same as the
VIEW key.
<<: Moves the input position to the left (same
as the JOG control).
>>: Moves the input position to the right
(same as the JOG control).
Overwrite / insert: Switches the mode between
overwrite and insert

Reset, Space, BS, <<. >>, Overwrite

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.5 Adding Comments to a Graph [ COMMENT ]
 229
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)

・Settings for various interfaces

・The output destination for the COPY key can be set (see Section 9.6.1).
・The output destination for the PRINT key can be set (see Section 9.6.2).
・GP-IB settings can be performed when the 9558 GP-IB CARD is installed
(see Section 9.6.3).
・RS-232C card settings can be performed when the 9557 RS-232C CARD is
installed (see Section 9.6.4).
・LAN settings can be performed when the 9578 10BASE-T LAN CARD is
installed. High-speed data transfer between the 8835-01 and a PC, and
remote control from a PC, can be performed over the LAN when the 9578
10BASE-T LAN CARD and the 9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR software are
installed. (see Section 9.6.5)
Please refer to the 9578 10BASE-T LAN CARD and 9333 LAN
COMMUNICATOR Instruction Manual for details.

A BMP file name can be entered when the COPY key output destination is set to
floppy disk, PC card or interface.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 4 (INTERFACE)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the BMP file name
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
2. Enter the BMP file name. Default name is
"IMAGE."
For details on the procedure for entering the
characters, see Section 9.5.5.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 230
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.6.1 Setting the Output Destination by the COPY Key

The screen data output destination when the COPY key is pressed is
specified.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 4 (INTERFACE)

: Output to internal printer.
: Output to external printer.

: Output to floppy disk (BMP format).

: Output to PC card (BMP format).
: Output using the interface (BMP format).

NOTE

The 9559 PRINTER CARD is required to print

on an external printer (see Section 10.7.8).

When the external printer is the output destination, select the control code.
: Uses ESC/P as the control code.

: Uses ESC/P raster as the control code.

Select the printing size (external printer only).

: Print normal size.

: Print at 1.5 times magnification.

When the internal printer is not the output destination, select the color of the
output destination.
: Output color data.
: Output gray-scale data.

: Output monochrome data.

: Output reverse monochrome data.

NOTE
・When the output destination specified excluding internal and external
printer and the color is set to monochrome, the screen is displayed in
monochrome while data saving is in progress.
・Stores a file in the directory currently selected on the file screen.
・Refer to printer manual for control code selections.
・A file stored in the BMP format is not readable by the 8835-01.
・When the LAN interface is selected, only Color and Monochrome output
destination color selections are available.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 231
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.6.2 Setting the Output Destination by the PRINT Key

The measurement data output destination when the PRINT key is pressed is
specified.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 4 (INTERFACE)

: Output to internal printer.
: Output to external printer.
: Print data is automatically transferred to
the data collection server on the LAN (when
connected to a LAN).
NOTE

The 9559 Printer Card is required to print on

an external printer. See Section 10.7.8.

When the external printer is the output destination, select the control code.
: Uses ESC/P as the control code.

: Uses ESC/P raster as the control code.

When the external printer is the output destination, select the color of the
output destination.
: Output color data.

: Output monochrome data.

Select the printing size.

: Print normal size.

: Print at 1.5 times magnification.

NOTE
・Even if the information that has been input using the PRINT key is to be
output to the external printer, automatic printing or real-time printing is
performed on the internal printer rather than the external printer.
・Refer to printer manual for control code selections.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 232
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.6.3 GP-IB Interface Settings

When the GP-IB interface has been selected,
and the 9558 GP-IB CARD is connected, the
following items must be set.

NOTE

・Settings are not displayed unless the 9558

GP-IB CARD is connected.
・For more details, refer to its instruction
manual.

1. Mode
Set the mode. Move the flashing cursor to the
position shown in the figure on the left, and
use the function keys to make the selection.
: ADDRESSABLE
: TALK ONLY
: DISABLE

2. Address
Set the address. Move the flashing cursor to
the position shown in the figure on the left,
and use the JOG control or the function keys
to make the setting.
(0 to 30)
: Address up
: Address down

3. Header
Set the header. Move the flashing cursor to
the position shown in the figure on the left,
and use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Header information is not appended.

: Header information is appended.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 233
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.6.4 RS-232C Interface Settings

When the RS-232C interface has been
selected, and the 9557 RS-232C CARD is
connected, the following items must be set.
NOTE

・Settings are not displayed unless the 9557

RS-232C CARD is connected.
・For more details, refer to its instruction
manual.

1. Transfer rate
Set the transfer rate. Move the flashing cursor
to the position shown in the figure on the left,
and use the function keys to make the
selection.

2. Data word length

Set the data word length. Move the flashing
cursor to the position shown in the figure on
the left, and use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Set the data word length to 8 bits.

: Set the data word length to 7 bits.

3. Parity
Set the parity. Move the flashing cursor to the
position shown in the figure on the left, and
use the function keys to make the selection.
: No parity
: Even parity
: Odd parity

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 234
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4. Stop bit
Set the stop bit. Move the flashing cursor to
the position shown in the figure on the left,
and use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Set to 1 bit.

: Set to 2 bits.

5. Delimiter
Set the delimiter. Move the flashing cursor to
the position shown in the figure on the left,
and use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Set to LF.

: Set to CR+LF.

6. Header

Set the header. Move the flashing cursor to

the position shown in the figure on the left,
and use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Header information is not appended.

: Header information is appended.

7. Flow control
Set the flow control. Move the flashing cursor
to the position shown in the figure on the left,
and use the function keys to make the
selection.
: None
: Software handshake
: Hardware handshake

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 235
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.6.5 Setting the LAN Interface

■ LAN Interface
The 8835-01 MEMORY HiCORDERs provide the LAN functions below by
using a LAN card inserted in the PC card slot.

Supporting the 9333

When using the HIOKI 9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR, you can remotely
control the 8835-01 on a PC or use the Auto Save function to save 8835-01
data on a PC via the 9333. For details, refer to the instruction manual
provided with the 9333.

Communications Command
The 8835-01 can be operated using common RS-232C/GPIB communications
commands. The 8802 port is set as the command input port by default. To
control the 8835-01, create a program and connect TCP via this port. For
details, see the Application Disk (CD-R.)

■ Compatible LAN Card

The LAN cards below are compatible with the 8835-01. (As of April 2003)
HIOKI 9578 10BASE-T LAN CARD *
KOREGA FEther II PCC-TXD
For the latest information, visit the HIOKI website.
*: Sales of the HIOKI 9578 10BASE-T LAN CARD have been discontinued.
Please use the commercially available LAN cards recommended by HIOKI.

■ Setting

This section describes the setting procedure.

Set up the 8835-01 and connect the cable in the sequence below.
1. Insert a LAN card.
2. Set up the LAN parameters in "SYSTEM 4." (Do not connect the cable yet.)
For details, see "Setting Individual Parameters" below.
3. After setting all the parameters, press F5 [Enter].
4. Connect the LAN cable to the 8835-01 and the network.

Be sure to make the settings above before connecting the 8835-01 to the
network. Note that making these settings with the 8835-01 connected to the
network may result in illegal information being sent to the network-for
example, if the same IP address as that of another device on the network is
selected.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 236
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Preparations for Setting Parameters

When connecting to an existing network, the following parameters must be set
up. Ask the administrator (department) of the network system to assign the
following in advance:
* Host name and address of the 8835-01
Host name (up to 12 characters) :
IP address : . . .
Subnet mask : . . .
* Gateway
Gateway : Used/not used
IP address (when using gateway) :
* TCP/IP Port No. : X (default: 880X)
(Specify the three leftmost digits of the four digits. Numbers 0 to 9 in the
least significant digit are used by the 8835-01 or reserved. Specify the port
No. when default numbers 8800 to 8809 are not available.)
When setting up a network when only using a PC and recorders, not
connecting to an existing network, for example, set the parameters as shown
below.
IP address of PC : 192.168.0.1
IP address of 1st recorder : 192.168.0.2
2nd : 192.168.0.3
3rd : 192.168.0.4
4th : 192.168.0.5
↓ ↓
Host name : Enter the desired name (each host name must be unique).
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Gateway : OFF
Port No. : 880x

Setting Individual Parameters

Once the LAN card is inserted, setting parameters appear on the SYSTEM 4
INTERFACE screen as shown below. Move the cursor to a parameter you
want to set up. After making all necessary setting changes, press F5 [Enter] to
confirm. Otherwise, the changes will not be reflected.

Host Name
Set the name to represent the 8835-01 on the network. Choose a unique name
that is different from those of other devices on the network. When using the
9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR, note that the host name is used to identify a
directory on the PC.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 237
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

IP Address
Set the IP address of the 8835-01.
The IP address is used to identify individual devices on a network. Set a
unique address that is different from those of other devices on the network.
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask is used to divide an IP address into a network address and host
address. Set the subnet mask the same way that subnet masks of other
devices on the network are set up.
Gateway ON/OFF and IP Address
Set the default gateway (default router).
Turn this ON and specify the IP of the device serving as a gateway when the
8835-01 communicates with a device (PC) on a network other than its own
network. When the PC is on the same network, use the default gateway of the
PC. When the 8835-01 is connected one-to-one with a PC or both are
connected to the same hub, a gateway is not necessary. Turn it off.

Data Acquisition Server IP

Specify the PC that runs the 9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR, with which the
8835-01 communicates. This setting is required for acquiring data using the
9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR.
When acquiring data using the 9333:
* To send measurement data (saved by using the Auto Save function) to the
9333, set Media on Status 1 screen to COMMUNI (LAN). (Real-time transfer
of measurement data is not available.)
* To send an Auto Print image to the 9333, set Auto Print destination on
Status 1 screen to COMMUNI (LAN).
* To send parameter calculation results to the 9333, set Result Save on Status
3 screen to COMMUNI (LAN).
* To send a screen image by using the COPY key, set Copy Destination on
System 4 screen to COMMUNI (interface).
* To send a print image by using the PRINT key, set Output Destination on
System 4 screen to COMMUNI (interface).

Port No.
The 8835-01 uses TCP/IP for communications. TCP/IP allows multiple
connections for different types of communications. A port number identifies
each connection. The 8835-01 uses port numbers 8800 to 8809.
* 8800 (8835-01 as the server.) : Used by the 9333 remote control application.
* 8801 (8835-01 as the client) : Used by the 9333 data acquisition
application.
* 8803 (8835-01 as the server) : Used with communications commands.
* 8802 to 8809 : Reserved
You need not edit the port number setting, unless some ports are not available
due to security reasons or not available on the PC with which the 8835-01
communicates.
This sets the three leftmost digits only. The rightmost digit (from 0 to 9) is
used by the 8835-01 or reserved.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 238
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Delimiter and Header ON/OFF

Used when applying control by using communications commands.
Header ON/OFF sets whether to add a header in the response to a command.
Delimiter sets whether to use LF or CR+LF for the response to a command.
Both LF and CR+LF are accepted in command transmission. Communications
commands are transmitted by connecting to port 8802 (default) of the 8835-01
using TCP and sending a character string.

■ Connection
After completing the setting above, connect the devices.
* Connecting the 8835-01 to an existing network
Connect the LAN connector of the 8835-01 to the hub using a straight LAN
cable or the 9642 LAN CABLE.
* Connecting the 9941/42 to a PC one-to-one
A cross cable or straight cable and a cross connector are required. (The 9642
straight cable is supplied with a cross connector.)
A 100BASE cable is required for connecting to a 100BASE network using
the 100BASE card.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.6 Interface Settings (Media Settings)
 239
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.7 Initialization [ INITIALIZE ]

Setting the clock (TIME SET), clearing waveform data (DATA INITIALIZE),
and initialization of setting items (SYSTEM RESET) are available.

Method 1 Screen: SYSTEM 5 (INITIALIZE)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
INITIALIZE screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the setting
item, and press the function key to make
the selection.

For details on items, see Sections 9.7.1 to

9.7.3.

9.7.1 Setting the Clock [ TIME SET ]

This unit incorporates a calendar with automatic leap year compensation and
24-hour clock.
The clock is used for the following functions:
・Display of year/month/day/hour/minutes/seconds on the screen
・Timer trigger function
・Trigger time list printout

Method 1 Screen: SYSTEM 5 (INITIALIZE)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
INITIALIZE screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the year, month,
day, hour, minute items of (1) TIME SET, as
shown in the figure on the left, and use the
JOG control or the function keys to make the
settings.
: Value up
: Value down

3. Press F5 [ SET ] to start the clock.

Seconds are reset to 00.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.7 Initialization [ INITIALIZE ]
 240
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method 2 Screen: SYSTEM 5 (INITIALIZE)

(For correcting errors of less than 1 minute)
1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
INITIALIZE screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to any of the year,
month, day, hour, minute items of (1) TIME
SET, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press F4 [30secadjust] to make the setting.
When F4 [30secadjust] is pressed, the seconds
are handled as follows.
00 - 29 seconds: Minutes are unchanged and
seconds are reset to 00.
30 - 59 seconds: Minutes are advanced by 1
and seconds are reset to 00.

9.7.2 Clear Waveform Data [ WAVE DATA CLEAR ]

Clears and initializes waveform data stored in memory.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 5 (INITIALIZE)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
INITIALIZE screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to (2) WAVE DATA
CLEAR, as shown in the figure on the left,
and make the setting.
3. Press F1 [exec].

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.7 Initialization [ INITIALIZE ]
 241
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.7.3 System Reset [ SYSTEM RESET ]

・Resets all settings other than communication-related settings (GP-IB, RS-
232C, LAN) to the factory default values.
・The same effect can be achieved by turning power to the unit on while holding
down the STOP key.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 5 (INITIALIZE)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
INITIALIZE screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the (3) SYSTEM
RESET item, as shown in the figure on the
left, and make the setting.
3. Press F1 [exec].

NOTE
To reset all settings, including communication-related settings, to the factory
default values, turn the power on while simultaneously pressing the START
and STOP keys.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.7 Initialization [ INITIALIZE ]
 242
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.8 Self Check

The self-check routine of this unit includes the following five items.
(1) ROM/RAM check
(2) Printer check
(3) Display check
(4) Key check
(5) PC card check

Method Screen: SYSTEM 6 (SELF CHECK)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SELF
CHECK screen.
2. Check each item. See Sections 9.8.1 to 9.8.5.

NOTE

When the result of a self-check is "NG", or if

another problem is observed during the test,
the unit should be returned for servicing.

9.8.1 ROM/RAM Check

・This test checks the internal memory (ROM and RAM) of the 8835-01.
・The test is non-destructive; it does not affect the contents of RAM.
・The result is displayed as follows. OK: Passed, NG: Failed

Method Screen: SYSTEM 6 (SELF CHECK)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Press F1 [exec] to check the ROM and
RAM.

NOTE

・During the test, all keys are disabled.

・When "OK" appears, the test result was
normal.
3. When the test is completed, press any key
to return to the self-test setting screen.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.8 Self Check
 243
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.8.2 Printer Check

・This test checks the printer operation.
・The printer head is cleaned.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 6 (SELF CHECK)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to make the
selection.
: Ckeck the printer operation.

: Clean the printer head.

Hold down this key for approx. 5 seconds.

NOTE

To cancel the test pattern printout, press the

STOP key.

9.8.3 Display Check

・This test checks the display.
・Two check patterns (solid-color display check (*1) and gradation check (*2)) are
available.
*1: Solid-color display check
Display solid red, green, blue, black, and white screens, respectively.
*2: Gradation check
Display the gradated colors red, green, and blue, respectively.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 6 (SELF CHECK)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Press F1 [exec] to check the display.
3. Press any key to move to the next check.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.8 Self Check
 244
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

9.8.4 Key Check

This test checks the key operation.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 6 (SELF CHECK)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Press F1 [exec] to start the test.
3. Press any key on the front panel, and the
corresponding field on the display changes to
reverse.
4. Turn the JOG and SHUTTLE controls at least
one turn fully clockwise and
counterclockwise and press each of the keys
at least once, and the test is completed.

NOTE
・If any key is defective, the key test cannot not be completed normally.
・In this case, press the START key and the STOP key together to return to
the SELF CHECK screen.
・The START key and Select key also serve for testing the LED function.

9.8.5 PC Card Check

This test checks the PC card and displays the information.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 6 (SELF CHECK)

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Press F1 [exec] to check the PC card.

NOTE
In the case of the interface card, its identification is displayed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
9.8 Self Check
 245
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 10 2
Printout of Waveform Data 3

5
10.1 Overview
Waveform data can be printed out in two formats: waveform or numeric.
6
A smooth print function is available for waveform printout (memory recorder
function only).
7
The following printing modes are available:
・Manual print
・Auto print 8
・Real-time print
・Partial print
・Screen hard copy 9
・List print
・Report print
・External printer
10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.1 Overview
 246
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.2 Selecting Waveform or Numeric Print

・This item lets the user select waveform or numeric print.

・Making this setting is required for manual print, auto print, real-time print,
and partial print.

Waveform

Numeric

Waveform print

Method Screen: STATUS 1 in each function

1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select waveform.
: Perform waveform print

: Perform numeric print

4. In the memory recorder function, the

smooth print function can be set. Use the
function keys to make the selection.
: Smooth printing is disabled.

: Smooth printing is enabled.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.2 Selecting Waveform or Numeric Print
 247
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Numeric print 1
Method Screen: STATUS 1 in each function
1. Press the STATUS key to call up the 2
STATUS 1 screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the print mode
item, as shown in the figure on the left. 3
3. Use the function keys to select numeric data.
: Perform waveform print
4
: Perform numeric print

5
4. Move the flashing cursor to the print interval
item. 6
5. Use the JOG control or the function keys to
select the print interval.
7
: Move the cursor up in the selection window.
: Move the cursor down in the selection
window. 8

NOTE
・When the print interval longer than the recording length is set, only the 10
first do is printed.
・In the recorder and RMS recorder functions (except 5 s/DIV), the maximum
and minimum values are printed (see Section Appendix 3.4). 11
・In the recorder and RMS recorder functions, the print interval is 1 to 100
DIV before a waveform is captured. The print intervals of 0.01 to 0.5 DIV
can be selected after a waveform is captured.
12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.2 Selecting Waveform or Numeric Print
 248
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.3 Using the Smooth Print Function (Memory Recorder

Function Only)

・When waveform print is selected, the smooth print function can be used.
・When smooth print is enabled, density along the time axis increases by a
factor of 2, to achieve a smooth waveform shape. Print speed will decrease.
・This option can be selected when using the memory recorder function.

Smooth print OFF

Smooth print ON

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.3 Using the Smooth Print Function (Memory Recorder Function Only)
 249
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Method Screen: STATUS 1 1

1. Press the STATUS key to call up the
STATUS 1 screen.
2
2. Move the flashing cursor to the smooth print
item, as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection. 3
: Normal printing is carried out.

: Smooth printing is enabled.

4

10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.3 Using the Smooth Print Function (Memory Recorder Function Only)
 250
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.4 Setting the Grid

・Selects the type of grid shown on the display screen and drawn on the
recording paper.
・The following five settings are available: OFF, standard, fine, standard (dark),
fine (dark).
・The display on the display screen is as follows:
Standard, fine: standard
Standard (dark), fine (dark): standard (dark)

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press the function key to make the setting.
: No grid on display and printout
: Standard grid on printout

: Fine grid on printout

: Standard (dark) grid on printout
: Fine (dark) grid on printout

10.5 Channel Marker Function

The channel numbers or comments are printed together with the waveform on
the recording paper.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 1 (SET UP)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SET
UP screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Press the function key to make the selection.
: Channel numbers will not be printed for the
waveform on the recording paper.
: Channel numbers will be printed for the
waveform on the recording paper.
: Comments set for each channel will be
printed for the waveform on the recording
paper (refer to Section 9.5).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.4 Setting the Grid
 251
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
10.6 Adding Comment to Printout

Two types of comment are available. 2

(1) Title comment input
Title comments of up to 40 characters can be included on the recording paper.
If "COMMENT" or "SET & COMMENT" is selected, this title comment will be 3
included on the recording paper in all functions.

(2) Input of comments for each channel 4

Comments of up to 40 characters can be included on the recording paper on
each channel.
If "COMMENT" or "SET & COMMENT" is selected, this comment will be 5
included on the recording paper in all functions.

Method Screen: SYSTEM 3 (COMMENT)

1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the
6
COMMENT screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position 7
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Standard printout is performed. 8
: Setting item is printed.

: Comment is printed. 9
: Both item and comment are printed.

10
4. When [ COMMENT ] or [ SET&CMT ] is selected,
enter the comment.
Only the comment is entered for each logic 11
channel.
For details, see Section 9.5.

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.6 Adding Comment to Printout
 252
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.7 Printing Procedure

The following printing modes are available:

・Manual print ( PRINT key, DISPLAY screen)
・Auto print (set with STATUS screen)
・Real-time print (set with STATUS screen)
・Partial print (A/B cursors, PRINT key, DISPLAY screen)
・Screen hard copy ( COPY key)
・List print ( PRINT key, any screen except DISPLAY screen)
・Report print ( FEED key + COPY key, DISPLAY screen)
・External printer (print by the external printer)

10.7.1 Manual Print (All Functions)

This mode serves to print waveform data from the internal memory.
Memory recorder:
Measurement data from one measurement (entire recording length) are
printed.
Recorder:
Measurement data stored in memory before the end of measurement are
printed (2000 divisions max.).
RMS Recorder:
Measurement data stored in memory before the end of measurement are
printed (2000 divisions max.).

Method Screen: DISPLAY

After the measurement is completed, press the PRINT key.
・Since data are stored, they can be printed as often as desired.
・When magnification/compression was used, the print reflects this condition.
NOTE
Information about settings and scale can also be printed at the same time (see
Section 9.3.6).

Gauge List

Both the list and gauge functions are used.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.7 Printing Procedure
 253
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.7.2 Auto Print (Memory Recorder)

Print is carried out automatically after a waveform has been captured for the
specified recording length.

Method Screen: STATUS 1

1. Press the STATUS key to call up the STATUS
screen 1.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the auto print item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Disable auto print

: Enable auto print

4. Press the START key to start the

measurement.
Print is carried out automatically after a
waveform has been captured for the specified
recording length.

NOTE
・Information about settings and scale can also be printed at the same time
(see Section 9.3.6).
・If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is applied (see Section 10.7.4).

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.7 Printing Procedure
 254
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.7.3 Real-Time Print (Recorder, RMS Recorder)

The input waveform and data are printed continuously in real time.

Method Screen: STATUS 1

1. Call up the STATUS screen 1.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the printer item,
as shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to make the selection.
: Disable real-time print print

: Enable real-time print print

4. When measurement starts, waveform

appears on screen and print starts.

NOTE
・At a time axis range setting of 200 ms/DIV or faster, the waveform data will
be printed out later.
・While the printer always outputs the data at the measurement
magnification in recording mode, the waveform on the screen is reduced in
size at the ratio shown in the table below, depending on the time-axis range.
Range Compression ratio
50 ms/DIV × 1/2
20 ms/DIV × 1/10
10 ms/DIV × 1/20
・When time axis range is between 10 ms - 200 ms/DIV and recording length
is set to CONTINUOUS in recorder function, printer defaults to OFF.
・If the A/B cursors are used, partical save isn’t applied.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.7 Printing Procedure
 255
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.7.4 Partial Print (All Functions)

This function prints the waveform between the A and B cursors (vertical or trace
cursors).
・Memory recorder
Specified range (out of entire data recorded from a measurement) is printed.
・Recorder, RMS Recorder
Specified range (out of last 2000 divisions (magnification: ×1) of data in
memory) is printed.
The function is available also when the A/B cursors are currently outside the
range displayed on screen.
For details regarding the use of the A/B cursors, refer to Section 11.2.
Printing is possible also when the print format is currently set to "numeric".

Method Screen: DISPLAY

1. Position cursor A at the start point of the
range to be printed.
2. Move cursor B to the right. When the cursor
is at the rightmost edge of the screen, the
waveform scrolls to the left, and cursor A
scrolls with it.
3. Specify the end point of the range with
cursor B. Then press the PRINT key. The
specified range is printed, also if cursor A is
currently off screen.

NOTE
・The range is printed also if the positions of cursor A and cursor B are
reversed.
・When only the cursor A is used, the waveform data from the position of
cursor A to the end of the data is printed.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.7 Printing Procedure
 256
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.7.5 Screen Hard Copy (All Functions)

The display contents of the STATUS screen, CHANNEL screen, DISPLAY
screen, SYSTEM screen, and FILE screen can be printed as is.

Method
1. Call up the desired screen.
2. Press the COPY key.

NOTE
・The screen hard copy function is not available during measurement.
・The following four types of copy output destination are available.
Internal printer: Built-in printer
FD: Data are stored on floppy disk.
PC: Data are stored on PC card.
Communication: Data are sent using the interface.
See Section 9.6.1.

10.7.6 List Print (All Functions)

The settings for the various functions made with the STATUS screen,
CHANNEL screen etc. can be printed in list format.

Method Screen: Respective function setting screen, except DISPLAY screen

While the setting screen (STATUS, CHANNEL, SYSTEM) is displayed, press
the PRINT key.

NOTE
・The list to be printed contains the setup conditions for the acquired
waveforms. Even if the settings are changed following wave acquisition, the
contents of the list remain unchanged.
・Only data entered in channel of the list is in analog waveform.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.7 Printing Procedure
 257
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.7.7 Report Print (All Functions)

・This function prints the waveform range shown on the display, along with the
active settings.
・If the A and B cursors are displayed on the screen, they are also printed.
・When "COMMENT" or "SET & COMMENT" is set, the comments are also
printed (see Section 9.5).

Method Screen: DISPLAY

Call up the desired display screen and press the FEED key and COPY key
simultaneously. (Press and hold the FEED key and then press the COPY
key.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.7 Printing Procedure
 258
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

10.7.8 External Printer (Color Print)

Using the 9559 PRINTER CARD, waveform data can be output on A4-size
sheets from the external printer in color or monochrome.
PRINT key: Prints out waveform data or numerical data.
COPY key: Prints out the screen hard copy.

Connecting the PRINTER CARD Connect the printer card to the unit.
For details on connection, see Section 13.3.2.

Setting the external printer ・Turn on the external printer.

・Load A4-size sheets and prepare the printer for printing.

Setting the Interface For details on settings, see Section 9.6.

Output destination Set the output destination by PRINT key and COPY key
to external printer.
Output color Select color or monochrome.

Control code Set the control code ("ESC/P" or "ESC/P Raster") according
to the printer to be used.
Printing size Select the printing size (normal or 1.5 times).

Saving the data in the memory Save "newly measured data" or "data saved to the media" in
the internal memory of the unit.
For details on load, see Section 13.4.5.

Specifying the printout range Press the DISP key; the display screen will appear. Using
cursors A and B, the print range can be specified.
For information on how to use cursors A and B, see Section
11.2.

Printing starts

PRINT key When the PRINT key is pressed, the waveform data is
printed out.
COPY key When the COPY key is pressed, the data shown on the
LCD is printed out.

NOTE
With respect to the following items, the external printer differs from the
internal printer:
・The gauge is printed out for every page.
・When the display format is the X-Y screen, waveform data is printed out in
monochrome.
・For details on settings, see Sections 9.6.1 and 9.6.2.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
10.7 Printing Procedure
 259
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 11 2
Using the A/B Cursors / 3
Waveform Scrolling
4

11.1 Overview 6
The following three types of A/B cursors are available:
・Line cursor (vertical)
7
・Line cursor (horizontal)
・Trace cursor
8
The scroll function can be used to view a waveform.

10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.1 Overview
 260
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

11.2 Using the A/B Cursors

The A/B cursors can be used to read a time difference, frequency, or potential
difference on screen. (When scaling is used, the difference is displayed in the
scaling value. See Section 9.4.)
The following three types of A/B cursors are available:
・Line cursor (vertical): Used to read time, a period, or a frequency.
・Line cursor (horizontal): Used to read a voltage value of the specified channel.
・Trace cursor: Used to read the value at the point where the cursor crosses the
waveform of the specified channel.
If the A/B cursors are used, partial print and partial save are applied.

11.2.1 Line Cursor (Vertical, Horizontal) (All Functions)

The value at cursor A and cursor B, and the value between the two cursors
can be determined.

Value Vertical cursor Horizontal cursor

t time from the trigger point
A or B 1/t frequency taking t as the V voltage difference from 0 V
period
t time interval between the
A and B cursors V voltage difference between
B-A
1/t frequency taking t as the the A and B cursors.
period

11.2.2 Trace Cursor

・The value at the point where the cursor crosses the waveform can be
determined.
・The trace point moves on the waveform of the specified channel.
A or B value
t: Time from trigger point to trace point
V: Potential difference from 0 V

B - A value
t: Time difference between the trace points
V: Potential difference between the trace points
In the recorder and RMS recorder functions (except 5 s/DIV), the maximum
and minimum values are displayed (see Section Appendix 3.4).
In additional recording, the junction between data is invalid data.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.2 Using the A/B Cursors
 261
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
11.2.3 Using the Cursors
Method Screen: DISPLAY 19-04, 05
2
1. Move the flashing cursor to the csr item.
2. Use the function keys to select the cursor
shape. 3
: Disable A/B cursors
: Line cursor (vertical: t, 1/t)
4
: Line cursor (horizontal: V)
: Trace cursor (the point where the cursor
crosses the waveform) 5

To use the line cursor (vertical)

6
(1) Select F2 [ ] (Line cursor, vertical) key.

(2) Press the SELECT key so that the A.B CSR 7

LED lights up.
(3) Rotate the JOG control to move the cursor.
8

To use the line cursor (horizontal)

10
(1) Select F3 [ ] (Line cursor, horizontal)
key.
11
(2) The channel select option appears. Use the
flashing cursor to select the channel for
which you want to read the voltage value
with the A/B cursors. You can specify
12
different channels for the two cursors.
(3) Press the SELECT key so that the A.B CSR 13
LED lights up.
(4) Rotate the JOG control to move the cursor.
14
NOTE
・The channel select option does not appear when using the vertical line
cursor.
・Only channels for which a waveform is being displayed can be specified.
・By specifying a different channel for the A and B cursors, a potential 15
difference between the waveforms in the respective channels can be
determined.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.2 Using the A/B Cursors
 262
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

To use the trace cursor

(1) Select F4 [ TRACE CURSOR ].
(2) The channel select option appears. Use the
flashing cursor to select the channel for
which you want to read the trace point with
the A/B cursors. You can specify different
channels for the two cursors.
(3) Press the SELECT key so that the A.B CSR
LED lights up.
(4) Rotate the JOG control to move the cursor.
・t or V at the cursor position can be
determined.
・When the vertical cursor or trace cursor is
used, cursor measurements are possible also
when one of the cursors is currently off
screen.
NOTE When the SELECT key is used to activate the A/B cursor mode, the trace
cursor can be used, also if it was set to OFF.

Reference When the vertical cursor or the trace cursor is off screen, the VIEW key can
be used to check the cursor position within the total recording length (see
Section 3.1.7).

Moving the cursor

1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to select the cursor to
be moved.
: Use one cursor only
: Move the A cursor only

: Move the B cursor only

: Move both the A and B cursors

3. Rotate the JOG control to move the cursor.

(If the A.B CSR LED does not light up, the
cursor cannot be moved.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.2 Using the A/B Cursors
 263
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4. When the cursor is of the line-cursor 1

(horizontal) or trace-cursor type, select the
analog channel from which values are to be
read. Use the function keys to make the
selection.
2
: Channel number up

: Channel number down 3

Using A cursor only:
When ALL is selected, the value is to be read. 4

5
Auto-scroll
・If turning the the SHUTTLE control fully and holding the control for a few
seconds, the indication Auto scroll appears on the function key display and 6
the waveform continues to scroll even if releasing the control.
・Auto-scroll is canceled by pressing any key.
7

10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.2 Using the A/B Cursors
 264
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

11.3 Scrolling the Waveform

The waveform on the display can be scrolled horizontally.

Method Screen: DISPLAY

1. Press the SELECT key so that the WAVE
LED lights up.
2. Use the JOG/SHUTTLE control to scroll the
waveform.

Auto-scroll
・If turning the the SHUTTLE control fully and holding the control for a few
seconds, the indication Auto scroll appears on the function key display and
the waveform continues to scroll even if releasing the control.
・Auto-scroll is canceled by pressing any key.

Waveform scrolling
When the waveform is scrolled, the screen status and waveform position are
as illustrated below.

Displayed screen
Position display by the VIEW key

Scrolling the
waveform to
the right

Displayed screen

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.3 Scrolling the Waveform
 265
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
11.4 Zoom Function
(Memory Waveform Only in the Memory Recorder Function and
2
the Recorder and Memory Function*)
This function divides the display screen into two screens (upper and lower),
and allows the waveform on the upper screen to be magnified along the time 3
axis and displayed on the lower screen.

In the recorder and memory function*, the following operations are required. 4
1. Capture the waveform in the recorder and memory function.
2. Change the function to the memory recorder function.
3. The memory waveform is continuously relayed.
4. Zooming affects this waveform.
5
*: Advanced version

Method Screen: DISPLAY 6

1. Press the DISP key to call up the DISPLAY
screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
7
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select zoom. 8
: Time axis direction magnification up
: Time axis direction magnification down

: Zoom function is used.

9
When the zoom function is selected, the
display is split into two horizontally tiled 10
screens.
The waveform before the zoom mode was
activated is displayed on the upper screen 11
Standard screen (standard screen). The lower screen shows
Magnified range the zoomed waveform (zoom screen).
4. Use the JOG control or the function keys to 12
set the magnification ratio.
The lower screen’s display magnification is
always larger than the upper screen’s display 13
magnification.
〔 〕brackets on the upper screen indicate the
waveform range displayed on the lower
screen.
14

15
Zoom screen

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.4 Zoom Function
 266
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

: Time axis direction magnification up

: Time axis direction magnification down

: Enables operations on the standard screen

: Enables operations on the zoom screen
: Terminates the zoom function

5. To terminates the zoom function, press the

function key [close].

NOTE
・The A/B cursors can be used only for the waveform on the lower screen.
・During the zoom function, pressing the PRINT key prints the waveform on
the lower screen. (The waveform becomes that of the one screen display. If
the A/B cursors are used, partial print is applied.)
・The time axis direction magnification indicates the magnification in relation
to the original waveform both in the case of the standard display and the in
the case of the zoom display.
・The display magnification of the lower display can only be set at a value
that exceeds the magnification of the upper display. (E.g., if the upper
magnification is ×1, the lower can only be set to ×2, 5 or 10. If the upper is
×10, this should be decreased to ×5 and the lower set to ×10.)
・Scrolling the waveform with the jog button is executed on the lower display.
When the lower waveform is scrolled, the brackets indicating the range of
the upper display also move.
(When the lower waveform is scrolled beyond the range indicated at the top,
redisplay the upper waveform. Display it so that the range displayed at the
bottom is at the center of the screen.)
・When the zoom function is used, the logic waveform display positions are
indicated on the screen provided they are 1 to 4. If 5 to 8, the positions are
not indicated.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.4 Zoom Function
 267
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

11.5 Vernier Function

・Using fine adjustment, the input voltage can be matched to a desired reading.
・For example, an actual input voltage of 1.8 V can be converted to a 2.0 V
reading.

Method Screen: DISPLAY

1. Press the DISP key to call up the DISPLAY
screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
3. Use the function keys to select the vernier
function.
Use to magnify and to compress. The
adjustment range is from 1/2 to 2 times of
the original waveform.

: Cancels the vernier function. (The original

waveform returns.)
: Magnifies the waveform.
Displays the magnified waveform.
: Compresses the waveform.
Displays the waveform with no
× vernier scaling.
Displays the compressed waveform.

NOTE
The vernier function is not applicable to a waveform after waveform
processing*. *: Advanced version

Example: Changing a 1.8 Vp-p waveform to a 2.0 Vp-p waveform

The actual captured waveform Adjusted to 2 Vp-p using the vernier function.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.5 Vernier Function
 268
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
11.5 Vernier Function
 269
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 12 2
External Input/Output 3
Connectors / Key Lock
4
Function
5

6
12.1 Overview
7
The input/output connectors of the 8835-01 serve the following functions:
・Measurement start/stop, printer output control
・External sampling signal input 8
・Trigger signal input/output

The KEY LOCK switch can be used to temporarily disable the other controls 9
of the 8835-01.

Key lock switch

10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.1 Overview
 270
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

12.2 External Start/Stop

CAUTION
･ To prevent damage to the unit, take care never to exceed the voltage rating
of the inputs. The external I/O terminal and the 8835-01 have a common
GND.

Input/output terminal Maximum input voltage Maximum rated voltage

to earth
EXT TRIG
START/STOP -5 to +10 VDC
PRINT/EXT SMPL
Not insulated
TRIG OUT -20 V to +30 VDC
GO 100 mA max.
NG 200 mW max.

Using the external START/STOP terminals, recording start/stop can be

controlled for all functions.
START terminal Measurement starts when a signal is input here.
STOP terminal Measurement and printing stop when a signal is input
here.

Signal input method

・Short the terminal to ground, or input a pulse signal (High level: 2.5 to 5.0 V,
Low level: 0 to 1.0 V) or a square wave signal.
・Control is activated at the falling edge of the input waveform (active Low).

Voltage range High level: 2.5 to 5.0 V

Low level: 0 to 1.0 V
Pulse width High level: min. 20 ms
Low level: min. 30 ms
Maximum input voltage -5 to 10 V

5V
min. 20 ms20 ms
min.

High High 10 kΩ
2.5 to2.5
5.0toV5.0 V

2 kΩ

Low Low
0 to 1.00Vto 1.0 V
min. 30 ms
min. 30 ms

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.2 External Start/Stop
 271
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Using the terminals

1
1. Push the tab with a flatblade screwdriver or similar.

3
2. While keeping the tab depressed, insert a stripped wire
into the connector opening. 4

6
3. Release the tab to lock the wire.

9
Recommended wire Single strand: 1.0 mm dia. (AWG #18)
Multi-strand: 0.75 mm2
Usable limits Single strand: 0.3 to 1.0 mm dia. (AWG #26 to #18) 10
Multi-strand: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (AWG #22 to #20)
Strand diameter: minimum 0.18 mm
Standard insulation
stripping length
10 mm 11

Single strand 1.0 mm diameter

12
(can be used 0.3 to 1.0 mm dia.)
10 mm
13

14
Multi-strand 0.75 mm2
(can be used 0.3 to 0.75 mm2）
10 mm
15
Diameter per strand:
minimum 0.18 mm dia.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.2 External Start/Stop
 272
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

12.3 External Printing/Sampling

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the unit, take care never to exceed the voltage rating of
the inputs.

・The external print/sampling terminal is used for controlling a printer or for

external sampling. External sampling can be used with the memory recorder
and FFT functions.*
・The external print/sampling terminal can be enabled as either an external
print terminal or an external sampling terminal (see Section 9.3.12).
・The external printer terminal function is enabled when a system reset is
performed.
When the external print terminal function is enabled:
・Printing starts at the falling edge (active low) of the input waveform.
・Operation is the same as the PRINT key.
・When the time axis range (memory recorder) or frequency range (FFT*) is
set to External, the external sampling terminal function is enabled.
When the external sampling function is enabled:
・External signals are input and sampled at the desired rate.
・Sampling occurs at the rising edge (active high) of the input waveform.
・For the memory recorder function, set the time axis range to External (see
Section 4.2.2).
・For the FFT function,* set the frequency range to External.
Signal Input Procedure
Either short the terminal to ground, or apply a pulse or square wave at 2.5 to
5V (high) and 0 to 1.0V (low).
Voltage range 2.5 to 5.0V HIGH level (print and sampling)
Zero to 1.0V LOW level (print and sampling)
Pulse width At least 20 ms HIGH, at least 30 ms LOW (print)
At least 0.5 μs HIGH and LOW (sampling)
Max. input voltage -5 to 10V (print and sampling)

External Printing External Sampling

min.20ms min.2μs
HIGH
2.5 to 5.0 V HIGH
2.5 to 5.0 V
__________ 10 kΩ
PRINT /EXE.SMPL

2 kΩ
LOW LOW
0 to 1.0 V 0 to 1.0 V 150 pF
min.30ms
min.0.5μs

Using the terminals

See Section 12.2.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.3 External Printing/Sampling
 273
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
12.4 Using the External Trigger Input (EXT TRIG)
2
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the unit, take care never to exceed the voltage rating of
the EXT TRIG input.
3
･ An external signal can be used as trigger source.
･ Several 8835-01 units can be synchronized for parallel operation. 4
(see Section 9.3.12)
･ Use the 9305 TRIGGER CORD for connection.

Signal input method

5
・Short the terminal to ground, or input a pulse signal (High level: 2.5 to 5.0 V,
Low level: 0 to 1.0 V) or a square wave signal. 6
・Triggering is activated at the falling edge of 2.5 V of the input waveform or
using a terminal short (active Low).

Voltage range High level: 2.5 to 5.0 V

7
Low level: 0 to 1.0 V
Maximum input voltage -5 to 10 V
8
Connector type miniature phone jack, 3.5 mm dia.

min.1ms
10 kΩ
10
High
2.5 to 5.0 V 2 kΩ
150 pF
11
Low
0 to 1.0 V
min.2μs 12

NOTE
The external trigger input (EXT TRIG) cannot be used, unless the external 13
trigger is enabled on the STATUS 2 screen.

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.4 Using the External Trigger Input (EXT TRIG)
 274
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

12.5 Using the External Trigger Output (TRIG OUT)

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the unit, take care never to exceed the voltage rating of
the TRIG OUT input.

･ When triggering occurs, a signal is output from this connector.

･ Several 8835-01 units can be synchronized for parallel operation.
･ Use the 9305 TRIGGER CORD for connection.

Trigger output signal

Signal type open-collector signal, active Low
Output voltage High level: 4.0 to 5.0 V
range Low level: 0 to 0.5 V
Pulse width min. 10 ms.
Maximum input voltage -20 to +30 V, max. 100 mA, max. 200 mW
Connector type miniature phone jack, 3.5 mm dia.

5V

10 kΩ

4.7 kΩ High
4.0 to 5.0 V

4.7 kΩ
Low
0 to 0.5 V min. 10 ms

NOTE
When the auto range function is activated, a trigger output signal is
generated. This should be taken into consideration when using both the
trigger output and the auto range function. (Memory recorder function only)
(see Section 4.3.2)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.5 Using the External Trigger Output (TRIG OUT)
 275
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
12.6 Using the Evaluation Outputs (GO), (NG)
2
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the unit, take care never to exceed the voltage rating of
the GO and NG outputs.
3
When waveform evaluation or waveform parameter evaluation is used, a
signal is output from these connectors when the result is GO (pass) or NG
(fail). 4
Output signal
Signal type open-collector signal, active Low 5
Output voltage High level: 4.0 to 5.0 V
range Low level: 0 to 0.5 V
Maximum input voltage -20 to +30 V, max. 100 mA, max. 200 mW 6

Evaluation output interval (min. 70 ms) 7

The evaluation outputs are shown in the following table. Between these states,
there is an interval during which the next data are read and waveform data
are created. The duration of this interval is inversely proportional to the time 8
axis and proportional to the recording length.

Output
Evaluation result 9
GO NG
GO Low level High level
ＮＧ High level Low level 10
5V

10 kΩ
11
――― ―――

GO, NG Evaluation in progress

4.7 kΩ High
4.0 to 5.0 V 12
4.7 kΩ
Low
13
0 to 0.5 V min. 70 ms

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.6 Using the Evaluation Outputs (GO), (NG)
 276
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Evaluation interval (approx. 20 ms)

Both the GO and NG outputs are High level. Evaluation is carried out during
this interval.

Example (NG output)

GO GO
High
4.0 to 5.0 V

NG NG
Low
0 to 0.5 V
min. 70 ms approx. 20 ms

NOTE
The waveform area evaluation and waveform parameter evaluation functions
can be used only in the advanced version.

12.7 Using the Key Lock Function

・This function disables all front-panel controls of the 8835-01.

・The function serves to prevent unintended changes to settings during a
measurement.

Method 1. Set the KEY LOCK switch to ON.

2. To cancel the function, set the KEY LOCK switch to OFF.
(The key lock function will not be canceled by turning the power off and on.)
・When the key lock function is active, the indication "KEY LOCK" is shown
on the display.
・If the backlight saver function is used and the display backlight turns off, it
can be turned on again by touching any key. The function assigned to the
key will not be activated.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
12.7 Using the Key Lock Function
 277
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 13 2
Storing, Retrieving and 3
Deleting Waveform Data
4
and Measurement Settings
5

6
13.1 Outline
7
・A floppy disk or PC card can be used to store and retrieve measurement and
setting data.
・The floppy disk must be initialized (formatted) before using it (see Section 8
13.2.3).
・If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is applied (see Section 13.4).
・Only a limited number of files can be stored in the directory (see Section 9
13.4).

10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.1 Outline
 278
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

13.2 Handling the Floppy Disk

A floppy disk can be used to store and retrieve measurement and setting data.
The floppy disk must be initialized (formatted) before using it.

NOTE
If the write-protect tab on the floppy disk is in the set position, the following
operations can not be performed.
・Initialize
・Store
・Delete
・Make dir
・Del dir
Move the write-protect tab to the unset position.

Write-protect
set position

Write-protect
unset position

13.2.1 Floppy Disk

CAUTION
・If a floppy disk is inserted upside down, backwards, or in the wrong direction,
the floppy disk or the unit may suffer damage.
・Do not remove the floppy disk while the floppy disk unit is operating (the LED
on the floppy disk unit is on).
・Before shipping the unit, always remove the floppy disk.

3.5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disks can be used.

The following floppy disk formats can be used:
720 KB (IBM PC/AT compatible), 1.2 MB (NEC PC-9801 series), 1.44 MB
(IBM PC/AT compatible or NEC PC-9801 series with 3-mode drive)
NOTE
・2DD floppy disks formatted in PC9801 640 K-byte format cannot be used.
・When loading data to personal computer via floppy disk, verify that floppy
disk formatted in MEMORY HiCORDER is recognized on desktop.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.2 Handling the Floppy Disk
 279
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
13.2.2 Using the Floppy Disk Drive

CAUTION
・Take care to insert the floppy disk with correct orientation. 2
・Do not remove the floppy disk while the LED on the floppy disk unit is on.
The floppy disk or the unit may suffer damage.
3
How to insert a floppy disk:

Hold the disk with its written-on face to the left and push it all the way into 4
the slot in the proper orientation.

9
How to remove a floppy disk:

Press the button as shown in the figure below and the disk is ejected.
10

11
LED

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.2 Handling the Floppy Disk
 280
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

13.2.3 Initializing (Formatting) the Floppy Disk

The floppy disk must be initialized (formatted) before using it.

The floppy disk initialization (formatting) method is described below.

Method
1. Press the FILE key to call up the FILE
screen. Move the flashing cursor to the
position shown in the figure on the left, and
use the function keys to select FD.

2. Use the CURSOR keys to move the flashing

cursor to the position shown in the figure on
the left.
3. Use the function keys to select FORMAT.

4. The format modes appear on the function key

display.
Use the function keys to select the floppy
disk format mode.
: Format in 2DD (720 KB) format.
: Format in 2HD (1.2 MB) format.
: Format in 2HD (1.44 MB) format.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.2 Handling the Floppy Disk
 281
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
5. Use the function keys to select execution.
6. Use the function keys to select whether to
execute or not. 2
: Execute the format procedure.
: Cancel the format procedure.
3

NOTE
When loading data to personal computer via floppy disk, verify that floppy 5
disk formatted in MEMORY HiCORDER is recognized on desktop.

6
13.3 Handling the PC Card
PC cards can be used for interface and to save measurement and settings 7
data.

WARNING Use only PC Cards sold by HIOKI. 8

Compatibility and performance are not guaranteed for PC cards made by
other manufacturers. You may be unable to read from or save data to
such cards. 9

When formatting a PC card on a PC, use the FAT-16 format. Formatting a

NOTE
card in FAT-32 format may result in incompatibility problems.
10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.3 Handling the PC Card
 282
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

13.3.1 PC Card

CAUTION
・Printing is not possible if the recording paper is loaded wrong-side up.
・To avoid damage to the product, be sure to remove the PC card before
shipping.

・The 8835-01 is compatible with optional PC cards (compact flash, RS-232C

card, GP-IB card, printer card, LAN card).
・Please use the following optional PC cards (compact flash) for saving data.
9626 PC CARD (32 M)*
9627 PC CARD (64 M)*
9726 PC CARD (128 M)
9727 PC CARD (256 M)
9728 PC CARD (512 M)
9729 PC CARD (1 G)
*: discontinued product

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.3 Handling the PC Card
 283
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
13.3.2 Using the PC Card Slot (PC Card with a Cable Only)

CAUTION
When making the connection, the cable connector and PC card should be 2
properly aligned, so that the connector can be pushed in straight. Do not exert
strong force on the PC card connector, to prevent the possibility of damage
and contact problems. 3
Cable and PC card connection
1. Pass the PC card protector through the connection cable, as shown below. 4

Fig. 13.1 Passing protector through connection cable

7

2. Plug the PC card end of the connection cable into the PC card. The top side 8
of the cable connector (marked with a ▲) should match the top side of the
PC card, as shown below.

PCMCIA socket side

9
PC card

10
Ｐrotector
Lock

Locking spring
11
Connection cable

12
Front markings

Fig. 13.2 Connection cable and PC card connection

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.3 Handling the PC Card
 284
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Inserting the PC card

CAUTION
If a PC card is inserted upside down, backwards, or in the wrong direction, the
PC card or the unit may suffer damage.
To avoid damage to the PC card or connector, observe the cautions listed
below.
・Inserting the card with the wrong orientation or in other ways than described
above.
・Inserting the card while attached to the connection cable.
・Moving the 8835-01 while the connection cable is connected to the card.
・Pulling the card out by the cable or exerting excessive force on the
connector.
・Placing objects on the connection cable connector.

1. Insert the PC card in the PC card slot on the 8835-01. Verify that the ▲
mark on the card points in the correct direction as shown below, and make
sure that the card is properly seated in the slot.
The PC card is keyed to prevent wrong insertion, but exerting excessive
force may damage the card or the slot.

Fig. 13.3 PC card insertion

2. Attach the PC card protector to the 8835-01 as shown below.

Fig. 13.4 Attaching the protector

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.3 Handling the PC Card
 285
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Removing the PC card

CAUTION
・Do not press the eject button before removing the PC card protector.
・Do not remove the PC card while the PC card unit is operating.
・To avoid damage to the product, be sure to remove the PC card before
shipping.

1. Remove the PC card protector as shown below.

Fig. 13.5 Removing the protector

2. To remove the PC card, press the eject button as shown below.

Fig. 13.6 Removing the PC card

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.3 Handling the PC Card
 286
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy

Disk or PC Card

13.4.1 Overview

This section explains how to use the SAVE, LOAD, INFO, and DELETE
commands and how to create, change, and delete a directory.

13.4.2 FILE Screen

・The FILE screen appears when the FILE key is pressed.
・The general operation flow is shown below.

Press the FILE key to call up the FILE screen.

Use the function keys to select the floppy disk or PC card.

Select the command.

Execute

13.4.3 What Can Be Recorded and How Much

(1) Setting state (FUNCTION)
1. It is possible to record the setting state for each of the functions: the
memory recorder function, the recorder function, and the RMS recorder
function.
2. When a setting state is read into the 8835-01, it is restored in the unit.
Size of recording in each function
Size of recording for the
setting state
Normal 512 bytes × 24 ＝ 12288 bytes
Advanced version
(After the 9540-01 FUNCTION 512 bytes × 28 ＝ 14336 bytes
UP DISK is installed)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 287
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

(2) Measurement data (WAVE)

1. It is possible to save the measurement data of a waveform which has been

captured.
2. When measurement data is read into the 8835-01, the waveform data
recorded on the floppy disk or PC card is put into the designated memory
channel.
3. When the measurement data of a waveform is recorded, its setting state
(the recording length, time axis, voltage axis, scaling and comments) is also
simultaneously recorded. Because when this is loaded the unit is set to the
condition when the measurement data was recorded, it can be checked by
being listed. (see "File contents" in Section 13.4.5.) (Logic channels CHA to
CHD are considered as one channel in any function.) For the size of a file,
see Section Appendix 5.
(3) Screen hard copy (BMP)
The each screen display of the 8835-01 can be stored in the bit map file (BMP)
format.
Size of a file
Color setting Size of a file
color, gray-scale 308,278 bytes
monochrome, reverse monochrome 38,462 bytes

・The bit map file is one of the standard graphic type of the WINDOWS*,
therefore by using the graphic software, this file format can be used.
・For setting the output destination of the screen display data, see Section
9.6.1.
*: The WINDOWS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

NOTE
・The number of bytes depends on the floppy disk or PC CARD format.
・Data stored in the BMP format is not readable by the 8835-01.
・If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is applied (see Section 13.4).

13.4.4 Selecting the Media Type

The media type is specified.
1. Press the FILE key to call up the FILE
screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to make the selection.
: Floppy disk media are used.
: PC card media are used.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 288
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

13.4.5 Detailed Explanation of the Commands

1. SAVE
・Unit settings and measurement data can be stored on floppy disk.
・They are stored in the directory currently selected on the file screen.
・Waveform data can be stored as binary or text data.
・Use of cursors A and B enables partial saving.
・The floppy disk must be initialized (formatted) before using it (see Section
13.2.3).
NOTE
・Since only a limited number of files (including directories) can be created in
the root directory, subdirectories should be created to enable the creation of
multiple files.
・For a subdirectory, see "7. MKDIR."
・Data stored in the text format is not readable by the 8835-01.
・X-Y waveforms in the recorder function cannot be saved in TEXT format.
・If the data quantity is too large, it may not fit on a floppy diskette or PC
Card. For the size of a file, see Section Appendix 4.

Method
1. Press the FILE key to call up the FILE
screen.
2. Use the CURSOR keys to move the flashing
cursor to the position shown in the figure on
the left, and use the function keys to select
SAVE.

3. Move the flashing cursor to the position

shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to select the store format.
: Data are stored as binary data.
: Data are stored as text data.
: Store settings.

NOTE ・The TEXT format is intended for reading by a PC. Select BINARY for
reading by the 8835-01.
・X-Y waveforms in the recorder function cannot be saved in TEXT format.
Also, the waveforms cannot be saved automatically.
・When the characters below are used in a file, the file cannot be handled on
a PC running Windows 2000 or XP. Do not use these characters when
handling a file on your PC.
+, =, [, ]

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 289
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4. Move the flashing cursor to the position

shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to select the channel for storing
data.
: Channel number up

: Channel number down

NOTE

Select ALL to save all displayed channels.

Undisplayed channels are not saved.

5. Move the flashing cursor to the position

shown in the figure on the left, and enter the
file name (see Section 9.5.5).
6. Press the (exec) function key.
To save the waveform data in the specified
format, press the F1 (Yes) key. To abort
saving, press the F2 (No) key.
NOTE

If the A/B cursors are used, partical save is

applied.

Entering the file name

Select from file name entry options in function key display.
Enter: Type in name.
File list: Characters highlighted with line cursor are entered as file name.
Title: Comment in title comment is entered as file name.
Start up: Name for auto setup function is entered as file name.

Method
1. Move the flashing cursor to File name.
2. Each pressing of the F3 function key display
selected file name entry.
When selecting file list, use the cursor key to
move the line cursor to select file.
: Switches entry selection.

3. Press Character Entry in function key display

to rename file. (see Section 9.5.5.)

NOTE
・When loading comment in title comment as file name, first 8 characters are
entered as file name.
・When name for auto setup function is entered as file name, extension is not
attached. Extension apporpriate to file Category is attached during save.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 290
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

File name extension

If no file name extension (3 characters after period) is entered, the following
extensions are automatically assigned, according to the stored data type.

Extension Meaning
MEM Memory recorder binary data file Yes
REC Recorder binary data file Yes
RMS RMS recorder binary data file Yes
XYC X-Y CONT recorder binary data file Yes
SEQ* Sequential save index file Yes
MUL* Multi-block index file Yes
TXT Text data file No
SET Setting data file Yes
ARE* Waveform decision area Yes
BMP Bitmap (.bmp) file No
FFT* FFT binary data file Yes
R_M* Recorder and memory index file Yes

Yes: Files can be read into the unit.

No: Reading is not possible.
*: Advanced version

Automatic file name assignment

If the file name is entered as a blank ( . ), it is assigned automatically
according to the following principle.
Auto save Waveform data, screen data Parameter calculation result
［AUTO .Extension］ ［NONAME .Extension］ ［MEASURE .TXT］
［AUTO1 .Extension］ ［NONAME1 .Extension］ ［MEASURE1.TXT］
↓ ↓ ↓
［AUTO10 .Extension］ ［NONAME10.Extension］ ［MEASUR10.TXT］
↓ ↓ ↓
［AUTO100 .Extension］ ［NONAM100.Extension］ ［MEASU100.TXT］
↓ ↓ ↓
［AUTO5000.Extension］ ［NONA5000.Extension］ ［MEAS5000.TXT］

NOTE
In automatic save, file is titled with a number following the file name
specified in the STATUS screen of each function. Leaving the file name
untitled in the STATUS screen enters AUTO in file name.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 291
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Directory and file numbers available for saving

Limit
Media Type
Root Sub
720 K 112 5000
FD 1.2 M 192 5000
1.44 M 224 5000
PC card Flash ATA 512 to 1024 5000

File contents
The file contents depend on the file type.
○: The data is saved to the file. Settings for the 8835-01 are always enabled
during reading.
△(*1): The data is saved to the file. During reading, settings for the 8835-01
are enabled only in case of "new load."
×: The data is not saved to the file.
WAVE (Binary)
SET (Setting)
MEM REC RMS
Function ○ ○ ○ ○
Time axis range ○ ○ ○ ○
Recording length △ △ △ ○
Format △ △ △ ○
Roll mode △ ○
Overlay △ ○
Printer format △ △ △ ○
Smooth print △ ○
Auto print △ ○
Auto save △ △ △ ○
Trigger settings △(*2) △(*2) △(*2) ○

*1: When the waveform data functions in the 8835-01 are the same as those to
be read and all settings on the 8835-01 are to be enabled, deletes the
waveform data from the unit and load the new data.
*2: Trigger settings for each channel: ○
Other trigger settings: △

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 292
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Partial Save
・When the A/B cursors are active (vertical or trace cursors), partial saving is
enabled.
・Waveform data between the A and B cursors is saved (the order of the
cursors does not matter).
・When only the A cursor is active, the portion of the waveform from the A
cursor to the end of the waveform is saved.
・Partial saving is enabled even if the A and B cursors are off screen due to
waveform amplitude or scrolling.
・Refer to Section 11.2, Using the A/B Cursors, for more information on cursor
operation.
・Partial save is possible according to operating conditions, as shown in the
following table.

Text data thinning setting

When the store format is set to text data, thinning can be set as follows.
Setting items
OFF: No thinning is carried out.
1/n (n = 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000):
The number of data is reduced. Only one data per n data is stored, using
sequential ordering.

NOTE
・Not enough data for thinning results in creating a single data file.
・Thinning is not available in FFT (advanced version).

Text data save example

Text data is saved as following.
Function determines data saving methods.
"COMMENT","8835-01 MEM DATA" : Comment character string, data type
"DATE","04-09-1999" : Date (month-day-year)
"TIME","10:10:00" : Time
"NUM_SIGS", 3 : Number of signals
"INTERVAL", 1.000E-06 : Horizontal axis interval
"HORZ_UNITS", "S" : Horizontal axis unit
"VERT_UNITS", "S", "V", "V" : Vertical axis unit
"SIGNAL","TIME", "ACH 1", "ACH 2" : Signal name
"DATA" : Saving data.
+0.000000E+00, -5.9375E-03, +9.3750E-04
+1.000000E-06, -5.6875E-03, +7.5000E-04

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 293
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Example 1: When saving analog 4 ch & logic 4 ch in memory recorder

(memory recorder, memory data with recorder&memory, FFT function)
"COMMENT","8835-01 MEM DATA"
"DATE","04-09-1999"
"TIME","10:10:00"
"NUM_SIGS", 9
"INTERVAL", 1.000E-06
"HORZ_UNITS", "S"
"VERT_UNITS", "S", "V", "V", "V", "V", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit"
"SIGNAL","TIME", "ACH 1", "ACH 2", "ACH 3", "ACH 4", "LCHA1", "LCHA2",
"LCHA3", "LCHA4"
"DATA"
+0.000000E+00, -5.9375E-03, +9.3750E-04, +2.3500E-03, -9.3750E-04, 1,1,1,1
+1.000000E-06, -5.6875E-03, +7.5000E-04, +2.4125E-03, -1.0312E-03, 1,1,1,1
+2.000000E-06, -5.5000E-03, +6.2500E-04, +2.3688E-03, -1.0437E-03, 1,1,1,1
+3.000000E-06, -5.5000E-03, +6.2500E-04, +2.4000E-03, -1.1750E-03, 1,1,1,1
+4.000000E-06, -5.3750E-03, +4.3750E-04, +2.4000E-03, -1.1687E-03, 1,1,1,1
+5.000000E-06, -5.6250E-03, -5.1875E-03, +1.0250E-03, -1.2187E-03, 1,1,1,1
+6.000000E-06, +4.3750E-04, -7.6875E-03, -1.1250E-03, -9.3750E-05, 1,1,1,1
+7.000000E-06, +2.1875E-03, -6.1875E-03, -1.6875E-03, +8.0000E-04, 1,1,1,1
+8.000000E-06, +1.5625E-03, -6.5000E-03, -2.0687E-03, +1.1687E-03, 1,1,1,1
+9.000000E-06, +1.3750E-03, -6.3750E-03, -2.2500E-03, +1.3125E-03, 1,1,1,1
+1.000000E-05, +1.3750E-03, -6.2500E-03, -2.2875E-03, +1.4250E-03, 1,1,1,1
Example 2: When saving in memory recorder
(recorder, RMS recorder, recorder data with recorder&memory, )
"COMMENT","8835-01 REC DATA"
"DATE","04-09-1999"
"TIME","10:10:00"
"NUM_SIGS",13
"INTERVAL", 1.000E-04
"HORZ_UNITS", "S"
"VERT_UNITS", "S", "V", "V", "V", "V", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit", "Bit"
"SIGNAL","TIME", "ACH 1(Max)", "ACH 1(Min)", "ACH 2(Max)", "ACH 2(Min)",
"LCHA1(Max)", "LCHA2(Max)", "LCHA3(Max)", "LCHA4(Max)", "LCHA1(Min)",
"LCHA2(Min)", "LCHA3(Min)", "LCHA4(Min)"
"DATA"
+0.000000E+00, +2.5000E-03, -8.5000E-03, +1.8125E-03, -8.9375E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+1.000000E-04, +2.2500E-03, -8.8125E-03, +1.8750E-03, -9.1250E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+2.000000E-04, +2.5000E-03, -8.7500E-03, +1.8125E-03, -9.2500E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+3.000000E-04, +2.4375E-03, -8.5000E-03, +2.0000E-03, -9.1250E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+4.000000E-04, +2.5625E-03, -8.6875E-03, +1.9375E-03, -9.3125E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+5.000000E-04, +2.3750E-03, -8.3750E-03, +1.9375E-03, -8.9375E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+6.000000E-04, +2.5000E-03, -8.8750E-03, +2.0625E-03, -8.8750E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+7.000000E-04, +2.3750E-03, -8.8125E-03, +1.8750E-03, -9.0625E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+8.000000E-04, +2.5000E-03, -8.6250E-03, +2.0625E-03, -9.3125E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
+9.000000E-04, +2.3750E-03, -8.3750E-03, +2.0000E-03, -9.1875E-03, 1,1,1,1, 0,0,0,0
NOTE
・Faster sampling than time axis in the screen applies to recorder waveform,
RMS recorder waveform, recorder & memory recorder waveform.
・Loaded data is converted to sampling data adjusted to display screen range.
Maximum value and minimum value between samplings are saved in
memory. However when thinning is applied, data without thinning is saved
as is.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 294
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2. LOAD
・Unit settings or measurement data are transferred from the floppy disk or
PC card to the memory of the unit.
・When loading measurement data, the channel can be specified.

Method
1. Use the JOG control or the CURSOR keys to
select the desired file name.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to select LOAD.

3. Select either of the following loading methods.

: Deletes the waveform data from the unit and
load the new data.
: Load the new data by overwriting the
waveform data already in the unit.
: Cancel the load procedure.

: Change the channel from which to load.

: Change the channel from which to load.

・Data is not loaded to channels that are set to [ - ].

・In the example at left, analog data from CH 1 to 4

Example (none for CH 5 to 8) and logic data from CH A and
[ - ] indicates channels with no data. B (none for CH C and D) are saved to file.
Analog Logic ・CH 1 data is loaded to CH 1 on the recorder, CH 3
data is loaded to CH 2, and CH A and B data is
Save ch [1 2 3 4 - - - - ] [A B - - ] loaded to CH A and B. (Data is not loaded from
Load ch [1 - 2 - - - - - ] [A B - - ] CH 2 or 4.)

Data is not loaded to channels that are set to [ - ].

NOTE
・Waveform data measured using an external sampling cannot be overwrite
and load.
・If the functions and/or time axis range of the data stored in the unit differ
from those of the data to be loaded, a warning message appears to disable
the overwriting and loading process.
・In the X-Y CONT recorder, recorder and memory, and FFT functions
(advanced version), the overwriting and loading function is not available.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 295
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

NOTE
・Data stored in the text or BMP format is not readable by the 8835-01.
・Only the waveform data and setup files created by the 8835-01 can be read.
・(*) When batch saving with the Recorder & Memory, the measurement data
(with REC, MEM extensions) are created together with an index file. When
only the measurement data are read, these are read to the respective
functions. To read to the Recorder & Memory, read the index file.
・(*) Do not change or delete the name of a file to be batch read. The batch
reading may not be executed correctly. (*): Advanced version
・In case of "overwrite load, the settings specified in the 8835-01 take
precedence over other settings (see "File contents" in Section 13.4.5).
Example 1

Recording length of stored Recording length of the 8835-01:

waveform data: 50 divisions 20 divisions

Load

Loaded part

Example 2
Recording length of the 8835-01:
50 divisions
Recording length of stored 20 divisions
waveform data: 20 divisions

Load

Auto setup function

When the power is switched on with a floppy disk or PC card inserted, the
setting up of the 8835-01 is performed automatically by reading the setting
data file called STARTUP. SET on the floppy disk.
The same measurement conditions can be simply established by using this
function.
Method
Define the setup data file name as STARTUP.SET, and save the file to the
root directory of the floppy disk or PC card. The file is read to the 8835-01
when the equipment is turned on.

NOTE
When STARTUP.SET is in both floppy disk and PC card, file is read from
floppy disk.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 296
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3. INFO
File information is displayed.
The settings for the function, recording length, time axis range and trigger
time are displayed.

Method
1. Use the JOG control or the CURSOR keys to
select the desired file name.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to select INFO.

3. Information about the selected file is

displayed, as shown in the figure on the left.

[1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8] [A B C D]
Analog Logic
The above numerals and letters show the channels
to which the data is saved.
For channels having no data, an asterisk "*" is
shown in place of a character.

NOTE
Information about only the files readable by the 8835-01 is displayed.
FUNC: Function
SHOT: Recording length
TIME: Time axis range
TRIG: Trigger time

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 297
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4. DELETE
The file on the floppy disk or PC card is deleted.

Method
1. Use the CURSOR keys or the JOG control to
select the desired file name.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to select DELETE.

3. To delete more than one file, use the

CURSOR keys or the JOG control and move
line cursor to files. Select Choose File in
function key display. Pressing key again
cancels Choose File.
: Specifies file to delete.
: Cancels selecting files to delete.

4. After selecting files to delete, select Confirm

in function key display.
: Confirms files to delete.
: Cancels deleting.

5. Select YES in function key display.

: Deletes selected files.
: Cancels deleting.

NOTE
・Up to 100 files can be deleted at one time.
・Delete appears in function key display when file is selected by line cursor.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 298
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5. Sorting Files
・Sorts files by selecting options in the file screen.
・Options for sorting are file name, data, file size and category (extension).

Method
1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left.
2. Use the function keys to make the selection.
Select reverse function key for reverse sorting.
: Sort by file name.

: Sort by data.

: Sort by file size.

:Sort by category (extension).

NOTE When sorting directory and file together, directory is prioritized.

6. Copying File
Copies file to other media.

Method
(Copy from floppy disk to PC card.)
1. Choose media destination
2. Choose directory destination. (see 8. CH DIR.)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 299
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3. Choose media origin.

4. Select file to copy.

5. Select from function key display F3 .

Function key varies depending on the media
origin.
: Copies file from floppy disk to PC card.
: Copies file from PC card to floppy disk.

6. Select YES in function key display.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 300
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

7. MKDIR
A subdirectory is created.

Method
1. Move the flashing cursor to the position
shown in the figure on the left, and use the
function keys to select MKDIR.

2. Enter the directory name (see Section 9.5).

3. Press the (exec) function key.

NOTE A directory cannot be created, unless the directory name is set.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 301
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

8. CH DIR
A direcory is changed.

Method
1. Use the JOG control or the CURSOR keys to
select the desired directory name.
2. Use the function keys to select CH DIR.

NOTE
・The 8835-01 provides direct movement only one layer up or down in the
directory hierarchy.
・To move to the parent directory, select a directory with "..".

9. RM DIR
・A directory is deleted.
・Deletes directory with files included in directory.

Method
1. Use the JOG control or the CURSOR keys to
select directory to be deleted in the file list.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 302
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2. Use the function keys to select RM DIR.

3. Select Yes in function key display. When
there is a file in the directory, a question is
displayed to confirm deleting or cancel
deleting.
4. Select YES in function key display.
: Delete the selected directory.
: Cancel the deletion procedure.

10. List Print Files

・Prints file list including directory displayed in the file screen.
・Prints file list to the destination designated by PRINT key.

Method 1 Screen: FILE

1. Display file list to be printed.
When printing data in subdirectory, move it
into directory to be printed.
2. Press VIEW key for printing.

NOTE
Data printed by list printing is what is displayed in the file screen.
When printing directory, list of directories is printed, not including data
in directories.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.4 Storing, Retrieving and Deleting Data on the Floppy Disk or PC Card
 303
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

13.5 Using a PC Card on a Personal Computer

13.5.1 Windows 95
Flash ATA card and hard disk card inserted in PC card slot are ready for use
without any other setting.
The SRAM card cannot be used in the initial setup state of Windows 95.
It is necessary to make the following settings.
(1) Open Explorer.
(2) In the Explorer View menu, click Options. In the View tab of the dialog
box, under Hidden Files, select "Show All Files," and click OK to close the
dialog box.
(3) With Explorer, find the file config.sys in the Window 95 folder.
(4) Click the config.sys file, to edit it with Notepad or another editor.
(5) Add the following to the config.sys file.
DEVICE=DRIVE:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\CSMAPPER.SYS
DEVICE=DRIVE:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\CARDDRV.EXE/SLOT=The number of slots
Here the DRIVE is the drive on which Windows 95 is installed.
Example: for a PC/AT compatible
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\CSMAPPER.SYS
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\CARDDRV.EXE/SLOT=2

(6) Restart the computer. Turn the power temporarily off and then on again.
This completes the setting process.
If the settings are correct, the PC card drive will appear as a removable
drive in the "My Computer" folder.

13.5.2 Windows 3.1 and MS-DOS

Install the SRAM card driver supplied with the personal computer.
For more details, refer to its instruction manual.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.5 Using a PC Card on a Personal Computer
 304
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
13.5 Using a PC Card on a Personal Computer
 305
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Chapter 14 2
Specifications 3

5
14.1 General Specifications
6
14.1.1 Basic Specifications
Measurement functions Measurement function Feature Version 7
Memory recorder High-speed data saving Basic version
Recorder Real time recording
RMS recorder For commercial power supplies 8
Recorder & Memory Real time recording & High- Advanced version
speed data saving
FFT Frequency analysis
9
Number of channels 8 analog channels + 16 logic channels
(maximum) (The logic channels are standard equipment for the 8835-01, common
ground with main unit) 10
Memory capacity 4 M words
When 1 channel is in use: 12 bits × 4 M words /channel
When 2 channels are in use: 12 bits ×
When 4 channels are in use: 12 bits ×
2 M words /channel
1 M words /channel
11
When 8 channels are in use: 12 bits × 500 K words /channel
Maximum sampling period 1 μs (all channels simultaneously)
(Maximum sampling speed: 1 MS/s, all channels simultaneously) 12
Time axis accuracy ±0.01% (difference between grid and actual time)
Input method Plug-in analog units
External control connections External trigger input, trigger output, GO/NG output, external
13
start/stop, print input
Time measurement functions Auto calendar with automatic leap year, 24 hour clock
Backup battery and lifetime Used for clock and to preserve settings, approx. 10 years (reference
14
value at 25℃)
To preserve waveforms, more than approximately one hour after
shutting down MEMORY HiCORDER power (requires a minimum of
two minutes upon power up) (reference value at 25℃)
15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.1 General Specifications
 306
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Operational ranges for Temperature: 5℃ to 40℃ (41 F to 104 F)

temperature and humidity Relative humidity: 35% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
Operating place Max. 2000 m (6562 feet) height, indoors
Temperature and humidity Temperature: 23±5℃ (73±9 F)
ranges for assured accuracy Relative humidity: 35% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
Guaranteed accuracy period For 1 year
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃ (14 F to 122 F)
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 20% to 90%RH (with no condensation)
Insulation resistance At least 100 MΩ/500 VDC
Dielectric strength One minute at 1.35 kVAC between the main unit and the power
supply
Value between the input unit and main unit, and between input
units, depends on which units are installed. See Section 15.2.
Power supply Rated power voltage 100 to 120 VAC, 200 to 240 VAC (auto-switching)
Rated power frequency 50/60 Hz
10 to 28 VDC (the optional DC power adapter is used)
(Voltage fluctuations of 10% from the rated supply voltage are taken
into account.)
Maximum rated power AC: 150 VA (55 W) (when 2 8936 ANALOG UNITs are installed)
DC: 80 VA (80 W) (when 2 8936 ANALOG UNITs are installed)
AC: 230 VA (95 W) (when 2 8940 F/V UNITs are installed)
DC: 80 VA (80 W) (when 2 8940 F/V UNITs are installed and 2 ch
current testing is ON)
Dimensions Approx. 285W×220H×132D mm
(11.22"W×8.66"H×5.20"D) (excluding projections)
Mass Approx. 4.5 kg (158.73 oz.)
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2, Measurement Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 4000 V)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.1 General Specifications
 307
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
14.1.2 Recorder

Method of recording Thermosensitive recording method using a thermal line head 2

Recording paper Roll type thermosensitive paper, 110 mm × 30 m (long)
Width of recording Total recording width: 104 mm±0.3 mm (832 dots)
Waveform portion: 100 mm±0.3 mm f.s. (1 DIV=10 mm) 3
Recording speed Approx. 25 mm/s max.
Paper feed accuracy ±1% (25℃, 60%RH)
4

14.1.3 Display 5
Display language Japanese/English (selectable)
Screen 6.4 inch TFT color LCD display (640 × 480 dots) 6
Display resolution In the memory recorder, recorder and RMS recorder functions
(1 DIV = 50 (horizontally) × 40 (vertically) dots)
・Waveform: 10 DIV × 10 DIV f.s.
・Text: 40 characters × 30 lines
7
In X-Y format (1 DIV = 40 dots)
・Waveform: 10 DIV × 10 DIV f.s.
・Text: 40 characters × 30 lines 8
Dots spacing 0.204 (H) × 0.202 (V) mm
Backlight lifetime Approx. 50000 hours
9
NOTE TFT color LCDs characteristically have a few defective pixels that do not
always light, or that remain lit.
We do not consider the presence of six or fewer such defects to indicate a
damaged or faulty display. Please be aware of this in advance.
10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.1 General Specifications
 308
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.1.4 External Data Storage

(1) Floppy disk

Device 3.5-inch floppy disk drive

Capacity ・1.44 MB (2HD) (IBM PC/AT compatible or NEC PC-9801 series
with 3-mode drive)
・1.2 MB (2HD) (NEC PC-9801 series)
・720 KB (2DD) (IBM PC/AT compatible)
Data format MS-DOS format*1
Data stored Settings, measurement data, waveform decision area (advanced
version), screen data
(Measurement data can be saved between cursors A and B.)

(2) PC card

Expansion slot ・PC card standard (1 slot)

・Accepts TYPE I, II, III PC cards
Card types SRAM card, flash ATA card, hard disk drive card (HDD)
Use only PC Cards sold by HIOKI.
Card capacity 32 MB max. (SRAM), 1 GB max. (flash, HDD)
Data format MS-DOS format*1
Data stored Settings, measurement data, waveform decision area (advanced
version), screen data
(Measurement data can be saved between cursors A and B.)
*1: MS-DOS is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

14.1.5 Interface

GP-IB ・Complies with IEEE 488.2-1987

・Remote control including input unit is possible.
・The optional 9558 GP-IB CARD is used. (Option)
RS-232C ・Complies with EIA RS-232C
・Remote control including input unit is possible.
・The optional 9557 RS-232C CARD is used. (Option)
LAN ・Complies with IEEE 802.3i (Ethernet 10BASE-T)
・Remote control including input unit is possible.
・The optional 9578 10BASE-T LAN CARD is used. (Option)
・Commercially available LAN cards (compatible cards) can be used.
・Remote measurement and data collection are possible using the
9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR.
Printer ・Complies with PC-AT centronics
・Color printing available with connection to external printer
・The optional 9559 PRINTER CARD is used. (Option)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.1 General Specifications
 309
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
14.1.6 Others
Accessories Grounded three-core power cord
Ground adapter
1
1
2
Recording paper 1
Protective cover 1
Roll paper attachment
PC card protector
2
1
3
Instruction Manual 1
Waveform viewer(Wv)FD 1
Options 9540-01 FUNCTION UP DISK 4
8936 ANALOG UNIT
8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT
8939 STRAIN UNIT 5
8940 F/V UNIT
8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT
8947 CHARGE UNIT
9439 DC POWER ADAPTER 6
9221 RECORDING PAPER (10 rolls)
9557 RS-232C CARD
9558 GP-IB CARD
9559 PRINTER CARD
9333 LAN COMMUNICATOR
7
9335 WAVE PROCESSOR
9578 10BASE-T LAN CARD
9626 PC CARD 32 M
9627 PC CARD 64 M
8
9726 PC CARD 128 M
9727 PC CARD 256 M
9728 PC CARD 512 M
9729 PC CARD 1 G
9
9388 CARRYING CASE
9320 LOGIC PROBE
9321 LOGIC PROBE
9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE
10
9324 POWER CORD (for logic connector)
9325 POWER CORD (for the 8940 F/V UNIT sensor connector)
9303 PT *
9197 CONNECTION CORD (for high voltage, maximum input voltage 500 V)
11
9198 CONNECTION CORD (for low voltage, maximum input voltage 300 V)
9199 CONVERSION ADAPTOR
9217 CONNECTION CORD (insulated BNC to insulated BNC)
9318 CONVERSION CABLE (for 9270, 9271, 9272, 9277, 9278 and 9279)
12
9319 CONVERSION CABLE (for 3273)
9305 TRIGGER CORD
220H PAPER WINDER
3273 CLAMP ON PROBE
13
9018-10 CLAMP ON PROBE (10 to 500 A, 40 Hz to 3 kHz)
9132-10 CLAMP ON PROBE * (20 to 1000 A, 40 Hz to 1 kHz)
9270 CLAMP ON SENSOR * (20 A, 5 Hz to 50 kHz)
9271 CLAMP ON SENSOR * (200 A, 5 Hz to 50 kHz)
14
9272 CLAMP ON SENSOR * (20/200 A, 5 Hz to 10 kHz)
9277 UNIVERSAL CLAMP ON CT (20 A, DC to 100 kHz)
9278 UNIVERSAL CLAMP ON CT (200 A, DC to 100 kHz)
9279 UNIVERSAL CLAMP ON CT * (500 A, DC to 20 kHz)
15
9555 SENSOR UNIT * (used with the 9270 to 9272, and the 9277 to 9279)
*: Not complied with the CE marking

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.1 General Specifications
 310
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.2 Trigger Unit

Trigger Method Digital comparison
Trigger modes Function Available trigger modes Version
Memory recorder Single, repeat, auto Basic version
Recorder Single, repeat
RMS recorder Single, repeat
Recorder & Memory Single, repeat Advanced version
FFT Single, repeat, auto

Trigger source CH1 to CH8, logic CHA to CHD

・External trigger
・Manual trigger
・Timer trigger
Sources can be set on or off. When all sources are off, the unit is in
the free-run state.
Trigger conditions can be set for each channel individually.
With an external trigger, the triggering occurs on a falling edge of
2.5 V, or when the terminals are shorted together.
Trigger conditions Logical AND or OR of any trigger sources
Trigger types (analog) (1) Level trigger
・Digital setting of voltage values for full scale
・Triggering occurs at rising edge (falling edge) of set value.
(2) Window-in, window-out trigger
・Upper and lower trigger levels can be set.
・Triggering occurs when the waveform enters or leaves the defined
area.
(3) Voltage drop trigger
Triggering occurs when the peak of the voltage falls lower than the
setting level (for commercial power supplies).
(4) RMS level trigger
Digital setting of rms values
Triggering occurs at rising edge (falling edge) of set value (for
commercial power supplies and DC).
(5) Period trigger
The period trigger setting determines the period reference voltage
and period range beyond which the measured rise (or fall) of the set
voltage results in tripping of the period trigger.
Trigger type (logic) Pattern trigger specified by 1, 0, and ×
(× means that either 1 or 0 is fine.)
Trigger filter ・Memory recorder and recorder & memory functions
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0 DIV
・Recorder and X-Y CONT recorder functions (advanced version)
ON, OFF
Trigger level resolution 0.25 % f.s. (f.s. = 10 DIV)
Pre-trigger Memory recorder function, recorder & memory function (advanced
version):
0, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 95, 100, -95 %
RMS recorder function: 0, 5, 10 DIV
Trigger timing Start, stop, start and stop (recorder function)
Trigger output ・Open collector output (with 5 V output voltage, active low)
・Pulse width 10 ms min.
Trigger input and output Mini-jack (3.5 mm dia.)
connectors

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.2 Trigger Unit
 311
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
14.3 Memory Recorder Function
2
Time axis 100, 200, 500 μs/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 ms/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 30 s/DIV
1, 2, 5 min/DIV 3
External
Time axis resolution 100 points/DIV
Sampling period 1/100 of the time axis 4
Recording length Any setting(*1) or preset setting (see below)
20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, 10000(*2), 20000(*3),
40000(*4) DIV 5
Screen・print format Single, dual, quad screen display, X-Y (dot), X-Y (line)
Recording line display 12-color
Superimposition function Provided 6
Waveform magnification/ ・Time axis
compression ×10, ×5, ×2, ×1,
×1/2, ×1/5, ×1/10, ×1/20, ×1/50, ×1/100, ×1/200, ×1/500,
×1/1000, ×1/2000, ×1/5000
7
・Voltage axis
×10, ×5, ×2, ×1, ×1/2
Waveform scrolling Available in the left/right directions 8
Auto-print ON/OFF switchable. Automatically prints the memorized waveform
Manual print Available
Partial print Prints between the A and the B cursors
9
Print smoothing function When set, a smoothed waveform is printed, with twice the density in
the time axis direction.
Logging function Records measured data as digital values
10
Variable function Provided
Vernier function Provided
11
*1: Set from 1 division to the maximum number of divisions at 1-division intervals
*2: When 4 channels are in use
*3: When 2 channels are in use 12
*4: When 1 channel is in use

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.3 Memory Recorder Function
 312
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.4 Recorder Function

Time axis 10(*1), 20(*1), 50(*1),

100(*1), 200(*1), 500 ms/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 30 s/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 30 min/DIV
1 h/DIV
Time axis resolution 100 points/DIV (with the printer)
Sampling period 1, 10, 100 μs, 1, 10, 100 ms (Can be selected, from 1/100 of the time
axis setting)
Recording length Any setting (*2) or preset setting (see below)
20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000 DIV, continuous(*3)
Screen・print format Single, dual, quad screen display
X-Y screen display
Interpolation function Line (other than X-Y), dot, line (X-Y)
Recording line display 12-color
Spatial resolution 40 dots/DIV (with the display)
100 dots/DIV (horizontally), 80 dots/DIV (vertically) (with the printer)
X-Y sampling period Dot: 100 μs fixed, line: 100 μs to 6 ms
Waveform magnification/ ・Time axis
compression ×1, ×1/2, ×1/5, ×1/10, ×1/20, ×1/50, ×1/100, ×1/200
・Voltage axis
×10, ×5, ×2, ×1, ×1/2
Waveform storage Last 2000 divisions of data saved in memory
Can be checked by reverse scrolling and reprinted
Print function Can be set to ON, OFF, or reprint.
Additional recording function ON/OFF (*4)
Logging function Records measured data as digital values
Variable function Provided
Vernier function Provided

*1: Although real-time recording to the recording paper is not possible in the high-
speed range (10 to 200 ms/DIV), the waveforms are stored to the memory and can
therefore be monitored on the screen. The last 2000 divisions of each waveform are
retained in memory before the measurement is complete. If the recording length is
not set to "continuous," the printer can also be operated, enabling the waveforms
to be printed out later.
*2: Set from 1 division to the maximum number of divisions at 1-division intervals
*3: With time axis 10 to 200 ms/DIV, "continuous" is not possible with printer ON.
*4: Additional recording function (recording data without paper)
・When enabled, the memory is regarded as printer paper. Recording starts at the
end of previous data, without erasing them. When the recording length has been
reached, old data will be overwritten.
・When OFF, previous data will be erased. Set to ON if erasing is not desired.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.4 Recorder Function
 313
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.5 RMS Recorder Function

Time axis 5, 10, 30 s/DIV

1, 2, 5, 10, 30 min/DIV
1 h/DIV
Time axis resolution 100 lines/DIV (with the printer)
Sampling period 20 rms data/s (200 μs fixed)
RMS accuracy ±3% f.s. (at 50/60 Hz±2 Hz, DC) (f.s.=10 DIV)
Measuring object Commercial power supplies (50/60 Hz), DC
Recording length Any setting (*1) or preset setting (see below)
20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000 DIV, continuous
Screen・print format Single, dual, quad screen display
Recording line display 12-color
Waveform magnification/ ・Time axis
compression ×1, ×1/2, ×1/5, ×1/10, ×1/20, ×1/50, ×1/100, ×1/200
・Voltage axis
×10, ×5, ×2, ×1, ×1/2
Waveform storage Last 2000 divisions of data saved in memory
Can be checked by reverse scrolling and reprinted
Print function Can be set to ON, OFF, or reprint.
Additional recording function ON/OFF (*2)
Logging function Records measured data as digital values
Variable function Provided
Vernier function Provided
*1: Set from 1 division to the maximum number of divisions at 1-division intervals
*2: Additional recording function (recording data without paper)
When enabled, the memory is regarded as printer paper. Recording starts at the
end of previous data, without erasing them. When the recording length (2000 DIV)
has been reached, old data will be overwritten.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.5 RMS Recorder Function
 314
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.6 Recorder & Memory Function (Advanced Version)

Time axis ・Recorder
500 ms/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 30 s/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 30 min/DIV
1 h/DIV

・Memory
100, 200, 500 μs/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 ms/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 30 s/DIV
1, 2, 5 min/DIV
Time axis resolution 100 points/DIV
Sampling period 1/100 of the time axis.......memory waveform
Recording length Any recording length (*1) or preset setting (see below)
20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 DIV, continuous (recorder)
20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000 DIV (memory)
Screen・print format Single, dual, quad screen display
Display Switchable between recorder and memory waveforms
Printer output During measurement operation, recorder waveform only. After data
capture, printout of recorder waveform as on display or memory
waveform.
Waveform storage (recorder) Last 1000 divisions of data saved in memory
Can be checked by reverse scrolling and reprinted
Additional recording function ON/OFF (*2)
Trigger source CH1 to CH8, CHA to CHD and external trigger (memory)
Trigger mode Single, repeat, timer (recorder)
Ancillary function Sequential save
Variable function Provided
Vernier function Provided
*1: Set from 1 division to the maximum number of divisions at 1-division intervals
*2: Additional recording function (recording data without paper)
At start choose ON or OFF to process recorded data.
OFF: Deletes recorded data and records from the beginning.
ON: Saves recorded data and continues recording.
When total recorded data reaches over 1000 DIV, overwrites previous data
from the beginning.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.6 Recorder & Memory Function (Advanced Version)
 315
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.7 FFT Function (Advanced Version)

FFT channel mode 1 channel FFT, 2 channel FFT

FFT range setting 133 mHz to 400 kHz, external
Dynamic range 72 dB (logical value)
Number of sampling points 1000, 2000, 5000, 10000
Frequency resolution 1/400, 1/800, 1/2000, 1/4000
Antialiasing filter Automatic cutoff frequency selection linked to frequency range
Analysis channel setting 1 channel FFT, 2 channel FFT for any channel
FFT analysis mode setting Storage waveform, linear spectrum, RMS spectrum, power spectrum,
cross-power spectrum, auto-correlation function, histogram, transfer
function, cross-correlation function, unit-impulse response, coherence
function, octave analysis
Display format setting Single, dual screen display, Nyquist display
Window functions Rectangular, hanning, exponential
Display scale Linear scale, log scale, phase
Print function As per the memory recorder function, excluding partial print function
Averaging function Additive average of time and frequency domains, exponential
averaging, peak hold (2, 4, 8 to 4096 samples)
Variable function Provided
Vernier function Not provided

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.7 FFT Function (Advanced Version)
 316
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.8 Advanced Version

It is possible to upgrade the basic version to the advanced version, using the
9540-01 FUNCTION UP DISK available as an option.
Measurement functions Recorder & Memory (real time recording & high-speed data saving)
FFT (frequency analysis)

Computation functions (memory recorder function)

Waveform processing Arithmetic operations, absolute value, exponents, common logarithms,
calculations square roots, moving average, 1st and 2nd derivatives, 1st and 2nd
integrals, time axis parallel shift
Averaging function Memory recorder function: Additive averaging (2, 4, 8 to 256 samples)
FFT function: Simple averaging, exponential averaging, peak hold (2,
4, 8 to 4096 samples)

Waveform decision (memory recorder function)

Waveform area decision Waveform decision based on reference area for Y-T waveform, X-Y
waveform, or FFT results
Decision modes Out: fail if any part of waveform is outside reference area
All out: fail if whole of waveform is outside reference area
Stop conditions GO (pass) stop, NG (fail) stop, GO & NG stop
Printer output or waveform save at stop
Decision output GO and NG outputs on side panel: open collector outputs (with 5 V
output, active low, pulse width 10 ms min.)
Waveform parameter Decision based on setting minimum and maximum values for
decision waveform parameter calculation results

Graphics editor Provided, used for defining an arbitrary reference area for waveform
decisions
Editor commands Paint, parallel shift, lines, eraser, loading waveform, reverse, screen
clear, delete within area, cancel, save new area, close editor

Memory segmentation
Memory segmentation Memory can be segmented among channels.
function
Number of segments Maximum 255
Multi-block
Sequential saving

14.9 Auxiliary Function

Waveform parameter Average value, effective value, peak-to-peak value, maximum value,
calculations time to maximum value, minimum value, time to minimum value,
period, frequency, rise time, fall time, area value, XY area value,
standard deviation

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.8 Advanced Version
 317
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.10 Others

Comment printing Function, channel, input range, zero position, trigger time, DIV and
other information can be printed.
Cursor measurement function Time difference, voltage difference or number of cycles between
cursors A and B, voltage at each cursor, time from trigger
Scaling function Specifiable for each channel
Comment input function Provided
Display copy function Provided
List・gauge functions ON, OFF
Waveform backup function Provided (more than approximately one hour after shutting down
MEMORY HiCORDER power, requires a minimum of two minutes
upon power up)
Starting status backup Provided
function
Auo setup function When the power is turned on, settings and a waveform decision area
stored on a floppy disk can be automatically loaded.
(waveform decision area: advanced version)
Auto save function Provided
Remote control Start, stop and print control terminals (threshold value: 2.5 V ±1 V,
active low, or terminal short)
Auto-range function Provided, selects optimum time axis and voltage axis for input
waveform
VIEW function ・In memory recorder and recorder functions, shows relative positions
of displayed data within recording length and to full-scale point.
・In memory recorder function, when memory segmentation is used,
usage condition of each block is shown (advanced version).
On-line help Pressing the HELP key brings up a brief explanation of procedures for
using the current function or feature.
GP-IB ・Complies with IEEE 488.2-1987
・Remote control including input unit is possible.
・The optional 9558 GP-IB CARD is used.
RS-232C ・Complies with EIA RS-232C
・Remote control including input unit is possible.
・The optional 9557 RS-232C CARD is used.
Key lock function Locks all keys except the KEY LOCK key
LCD back lighting ON, OFF (with the auto OFF function)
List print function ・Settings output after waveform data print (selectable on/off)
・Output by pressing PRINT key other than on display screen
Zoom function Provided (memory recorder function only)
Customer color setting Provided

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.10 Others
 318
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.11 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER Specifications

・Used for operating the unit on DC power.

・Connect DC power adapter output to 8835-01, and connect DC source (battery
etc.) to adapter input.
・Accuracy at 23℃±5℃ (73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after 30-minute
warming-up time
・Guaranteed accuracy period: 1 year

Input voltage range 10 to 28 VDC

Rated output voltage 24 VDC
Output voltage accuracy 24±1 VDC
Rated output current 2.2 A
Efficiency 70% min. (under rated output conditions)
Output over-current Detected at 110%+15% or -5% of rated output current (output shutoff)
protection
Output over-voltage Detected at 115%±5% of rated output voltage (output shutoff)
protection
Maximum rated power 80 VA
Operational ranges for Same as the 8835-01 MEMORY HiCORDER
temperature and humidity
Temperature and humidity -10℃ to 50℃ (14 F to 122 F), 20% to 90%RH (with no condensation)
ranges for storage
Operating place Same as the 8835-01 MEMORY HiCORDER
Output indication Output indicated by the red LED
When used together with AC When both AC power and the 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER are
power supply connected to the 8835-01, AC power has priority.
When AC power shuts off, the 8835-01 switches to DC.
Dielectric strength One minute at 700 VDC (between the input and the output, and
between the input and the main unit)
Insulation resistance 100 MΩ/500 VDC
Dimensions Approx. 152W×92H×54D mm (5.98"W×3.62"H×2.13"D)
Input cable: Approx. 2000 mm±100 mm (78.74"±3.94")
Output cable: Approx. 300 mm±30 mm (11.81"±1.18")
Mass Approx. 770 g (27.2 oz.)
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2
Accessories None

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.11 9439 DC POWER ADAPTER Specifications
 319
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

14.12 System Operation

System operation is explained according to the block diagram.
(1) All system operations are controlled by a 32-bit RISC CPU.
(2) Each input unit incorporates high-speed 12-bit A/D converters which are
connected to the main unit via a photocoupler integrated in each input unit.
Each channel has its own power supply, to assure electrical isolation from the
main unit.
(3) Measurement data stored in memory are processed by the CPU, displayed on
the LCD screen, and output to the printer. Output to floppy disk, the SRAM
card, flash ATA card, GP-IB card, RS-232C card or printer card is also
provided.

Analog unit

Input Photo
CH1 A/D
amplifier coupler
32-bit CPU
Input
Photo
CH2 amplifier A/D coupler

FD
Input Photo
CH7 A/D GP-IB card
amplifier coupler

Input
Photo
CH8 amplifier A/D coupler PC card

Memory control circuit

RS-232C card
Logic input
LCD
Logic
probe
Printer card
Control
4 probes
Stored
RAM
Logic
probe

Block Diagram

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.12 System Operation
 320
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Table 1
Sampling period and maximum recording length for various time axis settings
1. Memory recorder function

Time axis range Max. recording length (*1)

Sampling period
［/DIV］ （40000 DIV）
100 μs 1.00 μs 4s
200 μs 2.00 μs 8s
500 μs 5.00 μs 20 s
1 ms 10.0 μs 40 s
2 ms 20.0 μs 1 min 20 s
5 ms 50.0 μs 3 min 20 s
10 ms 100 μs 6 min 40 s
20 ms 200 μs 13 min 20 s
50 ms 500 μs 33 min 20 s
100 ms 1.00 ms 1 h 6 min 40 s
200 ms 2.00 ms 2 h 13 min 20 s
500 ms 5.00 ms 5 h 33 min 20 s
1s 10.0 ms 11 h 6 min 40 s
2s 20.0 ms 22 h 13 min 20 s
5s 50.0 ms 2 d 7 h 33 min 20 s
10 s 100 ms 4 d 15 h 6 min 40 s
30 s 300 ms 13 d 21 h 20 min 0 s
1 min 600 ms 27 d 18 h 40 min 0 s
2 min 1.20 s 55 d 13 h 20 min 0 s
5 min 3.00 s 138 d 21 h 20 min 0 s

Time axis resolution: 100 points/DIV

(*1): When using one channel only

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.12 System Operation
 321
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Table 2
Time axis resolution and maximum recording length for various time axis settings
2. Recorder function

Time axis range Recording paper Approximate recording

feeding speed time on one roll (30 m)
［/DIV］ of recording paper
10 ms 20 mm/s 30 s
20 ms 20 mm/s 1 min
50 ms 20 mm/s 2.5 min
100 ms 20 mm/s 5 min
200 ms 20 mm/s 10 min
500 ms 20 mm/s 25 min
1s 10 mm/s 50 min
2s 5 mm/s 1 h 40 min
5s 2 mm/s 4 h 10 min
10 s 1 mm/s 8 h 20 min
30 s 20 mm/min 1d1h
1 min 10 mm/min 2d2h
2 min 5 mm/min 4d4h
5 min 2 mm/min 10 d 10 h
10 min 1 mm/min 20 d 20 h
30 min 20 mm/h 62 d 12 h
1h 10 mm/h 125 d

Time axis resolution: 100 points/DIV

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.12 System Operation
 322
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
14.12 System Operation
 323
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

2
Chapter 15 3
Logic and Analog Inputs
4

15.1 Logic Inputs 6

・The logic input is located on the top side of the unit. Up to four probes can be
connected. 7
・Since one logic probe can record 4 channels, the combined maximum recording
capability for logic waveforms is 16 channels.
8
WARNING The 8835-01 has separate inputs for four probes, but the ground lines of
these inputs are not isolated from each other and from the frame ground
of the unit (common ground). 9
Do not connect logic probes other than supplied by HIOKI to the logic
inputs.
10

11

12
Logic input

13
NOTE
If no logic probe is connected, the corresponding logic waveform is displayed
on the screen at high level.
14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.1 Logic Inputs
 324
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.1.1 Logic Probes

■9320 LOGIC PROBE

Input can be swithced between voltage input and contact input. Suitable for a
wide range of applications, from checking electronic circuits to measuring
relay timing.

DANGER The 8835-01 has separate inputs for four probes, but the ground lines of
these inputs are not isolated from each other and from the frame ground
of the unit (common ground). If voltages with different ground levels are
input, probe short-circuiting may occur and lead to accidents.

NOTE
･ Carefully read the documentation supplied with the 9320.
･ The 9306-01 (discontinued) can also be used. Carefully read the documentation
supplied with the 9306-01.

IC clip leads
(Digital input)

Alligator clip leads

(Contact input)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.1 Logic Inputs
 325
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
■ 9321 LOGIC PROBE

・Can be used to detect the on/off status of AC line voltage. Maximum input 2
voltage is 250 V. The probe is suitable for timing measurements of relay
sequencers or similar.
・The probe provides internal isolation between channels and between input and 3
output.

4
DANGER The maximum rated voltage to earth between input and output is 150
Vrms in the low range, and 250 Vrms in the high range. To avoid the risk
of electric shock and damage to the unit, make sure that the voltage 5
between input and output does not exceed this value.

･ Carefully read the documentation supplied with the 9321.

6
NOTE
･ The 9307 (discontinued) can also be used. Carefully read the documentation
supplied with the 9307.
7

10

11

12

13

14

15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.1 Logic Inputs
 326
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.2 Analog Inputs

15.2.1 8936 ANALOG UNIT

Accuracy at 23℃±5℃(73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after zero adjustment after
30-minute warming-up time. Accuracy guaranteed for 1 year.
Measurement ranges 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 mV/DIV 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 V/DIV
DC amplitude accuracy ±0.4% f.s.
Zero position setting range -50 to 150% of the recording width (in full-size representation of the
voltage axis)
Zero position accuracy ±0.1% f.s. (after zero adjustment)
Temperature characteristic Gain: ±0.025%f.s./℃
Zero position: ±0.02%f.s./℃ (after zero adjustment)
Frequency characteristic DC to 400 kHz ±3 dB (DC coupling)
7 Hz to 400 kHz ±3 dB (AC coupling, low cut-off frequency: 7 Hz±20%)
Noise 450 μVp-p typical, 750 μVp-p max. (sensitivity range, with input shorted)
Common mode rejection ratio 80 dB minimum (at 50/60 Hz and with signal source resistance
100 Ω maximum)
Low-pass filter OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 k ±50% (Hz) -3 dB
Input type Unbalanced (input isolated from output)
Input resistance 1 MΩ±1%
Input capacitance 30 pF±10 pF (at 100 kHz)
Input coupling DC, GND, AC
A/D resolution 12 bits
Voltage axis resolution 160 points/DIV
Maximum sampling speed 1 MS/s (sampling period: 1 μs)
Input terminals Insulated BNC terminal
Maximum input voltage 400 V DC max.
Maximum rated voltage to earth 370 V AC/DC (between each input channel and main unit, and between
input channels)
Operational ranges for Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8936 is installed
temperature and humidity
Operating place Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8936 is installed
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃(14 F to 122 F)
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 80%RH maximum (with no condensation)
Effect of radiated radio- ±2% f.s. at 3V/m
frequency electromagnetic field
Effect of conducted radio- ±28% f.s. at 3V
frequency electromagnetic field
Dielectric strength One minute at 3.7 kVAC between the 8936 and the main unit, and
between the 8936 and the input unit
Dimensions Approx. 170W×20H×148.5D mm (6.69"W×0.79"H×5.85"D)
Mass Approx. 290 g (10.2 oz.)
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2, Measurement Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 4000 V)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 327
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
15.2.2 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT
Accuracy at 23℃±5℃ (73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after zero adjustment after
60-minute warming-up time. Accuracy guaranteed for 1 year. 2
Voltage input

Measurement ranges 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 mV/DIV

1, 2, 5 V/DIV
3
DC amplitude accuracy ±0.4% f.s.
Zero position setting range -50 to 150% of the recording width (in full-size representation of the
vertical axis)
4
Zero position accuracy ±0.15% f.s.
Temperature characteristic Gain: ±0.02%f.s./℃
Zero position: ±0.03%f.s./℃ (after zero adjustment)
5
Frequency characteristic DC to 400 kHz (in 1 mV to 5 V/DIV range)
DC to 3 kHz (with digital filter ON in 1 mV to 5 mV/DIV range)
(data update rate: 100 μs±20%) 6
Low-pass filter 5, 500, 5k, 100k ± 50% (Hz) (-3 dB)
Noise 75 μVp-p typical, 120 μVp-p max. (with digital filter OFF in 1 mV/DIV
range) 7
20 μVp-p typical, 30 μVp-p max. (with digital filter ON in 1 mV/DIV
range)
Input terminal BNC terminal
8
Input resistance 1 MΩ±1%
Input capacitance 50 pF±20 pF (at 100 kHz)
Input coupling DC, GND, AC 9

Temperature input
10
Measurement ranges 20, 40, 100, 200℃/DIV
Measurement input range K: -200℃ to 1350℃ R: 0℃ to 1700℃
E: -200℃ to 800℃ S: 0℃ to 1700℃
J: -200℃ to 1100℃ B: 300℃ to 1800℃ 11
T: -200℃ to 400℃
N: -200℃ to 1300℃
Zero position setting range -100 to 100% f.s. (in full-size representation of the vertical axis) 12
Temperature measurement K, E, J, T, N
accuracy ±0.1% f.s.±1.0℃
±0.1% f.s.±2.0℃ (-200℃ to 0℃)
R, S 13
±0.1% f.s.±3℃
B (effective measurement range: 400℃ to 1800℃)
±0.1% f.s.±4℃
Reference junction Selectable internal or external
14
compensation
Reference junction ±0.1% f.s.±1.5℃ (with internal reference junction compensation and
compensation accuracy input terminal in state of temperature equilibrium) 15

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 328
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Temperature characteristic ±0.05%f.s./℃ (sensor: K, E, J, T, N, with drift compensation mode OFF)

±0.25%f.s./℃ (sensor: R, S, B, with drift compensation mode OFF)
±0.04%f.s./℃ (all sensors, with drift compensation mode ON)
Frequency characteristic DC to 1 kHz (data update rate: 250 μs±70%, with drift
compensation mode OFF) (data update rate: 1 s±20%, with drift
compensation mode ON)
Low-pass filter 5, 500 ± 50% (Hz) (-3 dB)
Input terminals 2-terminal terminal block
Input resistance 5.1 MΩ±5%

Common specifications

Common mode rejection ratio 80 dB minimum (at 50/60 Hz and with signal source resistance
100 Ω maximum)
Input type Unbalanced (input isolated from output)
A/D resolution 12 bits
Maximum sampling speed 1 MS/s (However, update rate differs with temperature input.)
Maximum input voltage 30 V rms or 60 V DC
Maximum rated voltage to 30 V rms or 60 V DC
earth
Operational ranges for Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8937 is installed
temperature and humidity
Operating place Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8937 is installed
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃ (14 F to 122 F)
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 80%RH maximum (with no condensation)
Effect of radiated radio- ±2% f.s. at 3V/m (in the 10 mV/DIV range)
frequency electromagnetic
field
Dielectric strength One minute at 400 VAC between the 8937 and the main unit, and
between the 8937 and the input unit
Dimensions Approx. 170W×20H×148.5D mm (6.69"W×0.79"H×5.85"D) (excluding
projections)
Mass Approx. 300 g (10.6 oz.)
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2, Measurement Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 330 V)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 329
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

1
15.2.3 8938 FFT ANALOG UNIT
Accuracy at 23℃±5℃ (73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after zero adjustment after
30-minute warming-up time. Accuracy guaranteed for 1 year. 2
Number of input channels 2
Measurement ranges 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 mV/DIV
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 V/DIV
3
DC amplitude accuracy ±0.4% f.s.
Zero position accuracy ±0.1% f.s. (after zero adjustment)
Temperature characteristic Gain: ±0.025%f.s./℃ 4
Zero position: ±0.02%f.s./℃ (after zero adjustment)
Frequency characteristic DC to 400 kHz ±3 dB (DC coupling)
7 Hz to 400 kHz ±3 dB (AC coupling, low cut-off frequency: 7 Hz±20%) 5
Noise 500 μVp-p typical, 750 μVp-p max. (sensitivity range, with input
shorted)
Common mode rejection ratio 80 dB minimum (at 50/60 Hz and with signal source resistance 100 Ω
maximum) 6
Low-pass filter OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 k ±50% (Hz) -3 dB
Anti-aliasing filter Cutoff frequency (fc) of 20, 40, 80, 200, 400, 800, 2 k, 4 k, 8 k, 20 k,
40 kHz (selected automatically with anti-aliasing filter ON) 7
Attenuation is -66 dB min. at 1.5 fc.
Input type Unbalanced (floating)
Input coupling
Input resistance
DC, GND, AC
1 MΩ±1%
8
Input capacitance 30 pF±10 pF (at 100 kHz)
A/D resolution 12 bits
Maximum sampling speed 1 MS/s (sampling period: 1 μs)
9
Input terminals Insulated BNC terminal
Maximum input voltage 400 V DC max.
Maximum rated voltage to 370 V AC/DC (between each input channel and main unit, and between
10
earth input channels)
Operational ranges for Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8938 is installed
temperature and humidity 11
Operating place Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8938 is installed
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃ (14 F to 122 F)
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 80%RH maximum (with no condensation)
Dielectric strength One minute at 3.7 kVAC between the 8938 and the main unit, and
12
between the 8938 and the input unit
Dimensions Approx. 170W×20H×148.5D mm (6.69"W×0.79"H×5.85"D)
Mass Approx. 290 g (10.2 oz.) 13
Effect of radiated radio- ±2% f.s. at 3V/m
frequency electromagnetic
field
Effect of conducted radio- ±28% f.s. at 3V 14
frequency electromagnetic
field
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010 15
Pollution Degree 2, Measurement Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 4000 V)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 330
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.2.4 8939 STRAIN UNIT

Accuracy at 23℃±5℃ (73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after carrying out auto-
balancing after 60-minute warming-up time. Accuracy guaranteed for 1 year.

Number of input channels 2

Appropriate adapter Strain gauge adapter (bridge resistance: 120 Ω to 1 kΩ)
Bridge voltage 2±0.05 V
Balancing Electronic auto-balancing
Balance adjustment range ±10000με max.
Measurement ranges 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000 με/DIV
DC amplitude accuracy ± (0.5% f.s. + 2 με) (after auto-balancing)
Zero position accuracy ±0.5% f.s. (after auto-balancing)
Zero position setting range -50 to 150% of the recording width (in full-size representation of the
vertical axis)
Temperature characteristic Gain: ±0.05% f.s./℃ max. (after auto-balancing)
Zero position: ±2 με/℃ max. (50, 100 με/DIV ranges),
±0.1% f.s./℃ max. (200, 500, 1000, 2000 με/DIV ranges)
Frequency characteristic DC to 20 kHz +1/-3 dB
Low-pass filter OFF, 10, 30, 300, 3 k ±30% (Hz) -3 dB
A/D resolution 12 bits
Maximum sampling speed 1 MS/s (sampling period: 1 μs)
Maximum allowable input 10 V (DC+AC peak)
voltage
Maximum rated voltage to 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
earth
Operational ranges for Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8939 is installed
temperature and humidity
Operating place Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8939 is installed
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 80%RH maximum (with no condensation)
Effect of radiated radio- ±5% f.s. at 3V/m
frequency electromagnetic
field
Dielectric strength One minute at 400 VAC between the 8939 and the main unit, and
between the 8939 and the input unit
Dimensions Approx. 170W×20H×148.5D mm (6.69"W×0.79"H×5.85"D)
Mass Approx. 250 g (8.8 oz.)
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 330 V)
Accessories Conversion cable × 2 (Compatible sensor connector: PRC03-12A10-
7M10.5 by TAJIMI)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 331
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.2.5 8940 F/V UNIT

Accuracy at 23℃±5℃ (73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after zero adjustment after
30-minute warming-up time. Accuracy guaranteed for 1 year.
General specifications
A/D resolution 12 bits
Vertical axis resolution 160 LSB/DIV
Measurement functions Frequency, count, pulse duty ratio, voltage and current measurement
Maximum sampling period 1 μs (voltage, current and count measurement)
1.125 μs (frequency and pulse duty ratio measurement)
Low-pass filter OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 100 k ±50% (Hz) -3 dB
Input coupling DC, GND, AC (fixed DC coupling except voltage and current measurement)
Pull-up resistance ON/OFF (OFF in current measurement), 10 kΩ
Maximum input voltage 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
Maximum rated voltage to 30 Vrms or 60 VDC (BNC)
earth
BNC terminal Input resistance: 1 MΩ±1% (with pull-up resistance disabled)
(for voltage, frequency, count Input capacitance: 60 pF±20 pF (at 100 kHz)
and pulse duty ratio Input type: Unbalanced (Note: With the 3273 or 3273-50*1, the sensor
measurement) connector terminal is used together.)
Maximum rated voltage to earth: 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
Sensor connector terminal 4 channels can be connected.
(for power supply to measure GND: Common with the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8940 is
current) installed (Note: With the 3273 or 3273-50*1, the BNC terminal is used
together.)
Operational ranges for Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8940 is installed
temperature and humidity
Operating place Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8940 is installed
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃(14 F to 122 F)
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 80%RH maximum (with no condensation)
Effect of radiated radio- ±5% f.s. at 3V/m
frequency electromagnetic field
Dielectric strength One minute at 400 VAC between the 8940 and the main unit, and
between the 8940 and the input unit
Dimensions Approx. 170W×20H×148.5D mm (6.69"W×0.79"H×5.85"D)
(excluding projections)
Mass Approx. 300 g (10.6 oz.)
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2, Measurement Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 330 V)
Options 9318 CONVERSION CABLE (for connection of a clamp-on sensor)
9319 CONVERSION CABLE (for connection of a clamp-on probe)
Compatible current sensors 9270, 9271, and 9272 CLAMP-ON SENSORs
and probe 9277, 9278 and 9279 UNIVERSAL CLAMP ON CTs
3273 , 3273-50*1 CLAMP-ON PROBE
*1: When using the Model 3273-50 with the 8940, bear in mind that the maximum
input of the 3273-50 is 15 Arms.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 332
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Frequency, count and pulse duty ratio measurement

Frequency measurement 0.1, 0.2, 1, 2, 10, 20, 100, 200 Hz/DIV, 1, 2, 10 kHz/DIV
ranges 10, 20, 100, 200, 1k r/min/DIV
Power source frequency ranges: 50 Hz (40 to 60 Hz), 60 Hz (50 to 70 Hz)
Frequency measurement ±0.7% f.s. (100 kHz f.s. range)
accuracy ±0.2% f.s. (other than above)
±0.032 Hz (power source frequency ranges)
Frequency hold ON, OFF (waiting time: 10 ms, 1 s variable)
When hold is OFF, the current measurement value is halved if the next
measurement value is not fixed within the waiting time.
Count measurement ranges 10, 20, 100, 200 counts/DIV, 1, 2, 10, 20, 100, 200 k counts/DIV,
1 M counts/DIV
Pulse duty ratio 100% f.s.
measurement ranges
Pulse duty ratio accuracy ±1% (10 Hz to 10 kHz)
Threshold value (common) -10 to +10 V variable (0.2 V steps)
Frequency measurement DC to 100 kHz (frequency)
ranges (common) DC to 90 kHz (count)
10 Hz to 10 kHz (pulse duty ratio)
Response time (common) 10 μs max. (frequency of 300 Hz or greater, count)
50 μs max. (frequency of 300 Hz or less, pulse duty ratio)
The sampling period of the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8940 is
installed must be added to the above.

Voltage and current measurement

Voltage measurement ranges 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 mV/DIV, 1, 2, 5 V/DIV
Current measurement ranges With the 9270, 9272 (20 A), 9277, 3273 and 3273-50
10, 20, 50 100, 200, 500 mA, 1, 2, 5 10 A/DIV
With the 9271, 9272 (200 A) and 9278
100, 200, 500 mA, 1, 2, 5 10, 20, 50, 100 A/DIV
With the 9279
200*1, 500 mA, 1, 2*1, 5 10, 20*1, 50, 100, 200*1 A/DIV
Frequency characteristic*2 DC to 400 kHz ±3 dB (DC coupling) (When using a sensor, same as the
sensor.)
DC amplitude accuracy*2 ±0.4% f.s. (Using the 9279 ±0.5 %f.s.)
2
Zero position accuracy* ±0.15% f.s. (Using the9279 ±0.2 %f.s.)
Temperature characteristic*2 Gain: ±0.025%f.s./℃
Zero position: ±0.04%f.s./℃ (1, 2, 5 mV/DIV ranges)
±0.03%f.s./℃ (other than above)
Common mode rejection ratio 80 dB minimum (at 50/60 Hz and with signal source resistance
100 Ω maximum)
Noise 150 μVp-p max. (1 mV/DIV range)
1
* : Vertical resolution: 128 LSB/DIV
*2: When measuring current, the accuracy and characteristics of the sensor or probe must be added to
the above.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 333
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.2.6 8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT

Accuracy at 23℃±5℃ (73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after zero adjustment after
30-minute warming-up time. Accuracy guaranteed for 1 year.
Number of input channels 4
Measurement ranges 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 mV/DIV
1, 2, 5 V/DIV
DC amplitude accuracy ±0.5% f.s.
Zero position accuracy ±0.15% f.s. (after zero adjustment)
Temperature characteristic Gain: ±0.05%f.s./℃
Zero position: ±0.02%f.s./℃
Frequency characteristic DC to 100 kHz ±3 dB
Noise 1 mVp-p typical, 2 mVp-p max. (sensitivity range, with input shorted)
Common mode rejection ratio 80 dB minimum (at 50/60 Hz and with signal source resistance 100 Ω
maximum)
Low-pass filter OFF, 5, 500, 5 k, 50 k ±50% (Hz) -3 dB
Input type Unbalanced (input isolated from output)
Input coupling DC, GND
Input resistance 1 MΩ±1%
Input capacitance 15 pF±10 pF (at 100 kHz)
A/D resolution 12 bits
Maximum sampling speed 1 MS/s
Input terminals BNC terminal
Maximum input voltage 30 Vrms or 60 VDC
Maximum rated voltage to 30 Vrms or 60 VDC (between each input channel and main unit, and
earth between input channels)
Operational ranges for Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8946 is installed
temperature and humidity
Operating place Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8946 is installed
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃ (14 F to 122 F)
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 80%RH maximum (with no condensation)
Effect of radiated radio- ±2% f.s. at 3V/m
frequency electromagnetic
field
Dielectric strength One minute at 330 VAC between the 8946 and the main unit, and
between the 8946 and the input unit
Dimensions Approx. 170W×20H×148.5D mm (6.69"W×0.79"H×5.85"D)
Mass Approx. 310 g (10.9 oz.)
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 330 V)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 334
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.2.7 8947 CHARGE UNIT

Accuracy at 23℃±5℃ (73 F±9 F), 35% to 80%RH after zero adjustment after
60-minute warming-up time. Accuracy guaranteed for 1 year.
Electrical charge input
Compatible converter Electrical charge output piezoelectric acceleration pickup sensor
Measurement sensitivity 0.1 to 10 pC/(m/s2)
Measurement ranges 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 k, 2 k, 4 k, 10 k, 20 km/s2/DIV
（0.1 to 0.25 pC/(m/s2)）
2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 k, 2 k, 4 k, 10 km/s2/DIV
（0.251 to 10.5 pC/(m/s2)）
1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 k, 2 k, 4 km/s2/DIV
（0.501 to 1.0 pC/(m/s2)）
400 m, 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 k, 2 km/s2/DIV
（1.01 to 2.5 pC/(m/s2)）
200 m, 400 m, 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 km/s2/DIV
（2.51 to 5.0 pC/(m/s2)）
100m, 200m, 400m, 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400 m/s2/DIV
（5.01 to 10.0 pC/(m/s2)）
* ( ): Measurement sensitivity
Amplitude accuracy ±2% f.s.
Temperature characteristic ±0.2%f.s./℃
Frequency characteristic 1 to 50 kHz (+1/-3 dB)
Low-pass filter 500, 5 kHz ±50% (-3 dB)
Maximum input electrical 500 pC (when range 6 high sensitivity is selected)
charge 50000 pC (when range 6 low sensitivity is selected)
Input terminal Miniature connecter (#10-32UNF)

Preamplifier input
Compatible converter Preamplifier internal acceleration pickup sensor
Measurement sensitivity 0.1 to 10 mV(m/s2)
Measurement ranges 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 k, 2 k, 4 k, 10 k, 20 km/s2/DIV
（0.1 to 0.25 mV/(m/s2)）
2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1k, 2k, 4 k, 10 km/s2/DIV
（0.251 to 0.5 mV/(m/s2)）
1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 k, 2 k, 4 km/s2/DIV
（0.501 to 1.0 mV/(m/s2)）
400 m, 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 k, 2 km/s2/DIV
（1.01 to 2.5 mV/(m/s2)）
200 m, 400 m, 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400, 1 km/s2/DIV
（2.51 to 5.0 mV/(m/s2)）
100 m, 200 m, 400 m, 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, 200, 400 m/s2/DIV
（5.01 to 10 mV/(m/s2)）
* ( ): Measurement sensitivity
Amplitude accuracy ±2% f.s.
Temperature characteristic ±0.2%f.s./℃
Frequency characteristic 1 to 50 kHz (+1/-3 dB) (low cut-off frequency: 1 Hz±50%)
Low-pass filter 500, 5 kHz ±50% (-3 dB)
Operating power 2 mA±20%, +15 V±5%
Input terminal BNC terminal

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 335
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Voltage input
Measurement ranges 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 mV, 1, 2, 5 V/DIV
DC amplitude accuracy ±0.4% f.s.
Zero position accuracy ±0.15% f.s.
Temperature characteristic Gain: ±0.02%f.s./℃
Zero position: ±0.03%f.s./℃ (after zero adjustment)
Frequency characteristic DC to 400 kHz (+1/-3 dB) (DC coupling)
1 to 400 kHz (+1/-3 dB) (AC coupling, low cut-off frequency: 1 Hz±50%)
(in 1 to 5 mV/DIV range)
Noise 75 μVp-p typical, 120 μVp-p max. (in 1 mV/DIV range)
Low-pass filter 5, 500, 5 k, 100 k ±50% (Hz) (-3 dB)
Input resistance 1 MΩ±1%
Input capacitance 200 pF max. (at 100 kHz)
Input coupling DC, GND, AC
Maximum input voltage 30 V rms or 60 V DC
Maximum rated voltage to 30 V rms or 60 V DC
earth
Input terminal BNC terminal

Common specifications
Number of input channels 2 (switching mode: select from electrical charge input, preamplifier input,
voltage input or by channel.)
Input type Unbalanced (input interval floating, floating between input and main
unit GND, common input between voltage input GND and charge input
GND)
Zero position setting range -50 to 150% f.s. (in full-size representation of the vertical axis)
Common mode rejection ratio 80 dB minimum (at 50/60 Hz and with signal source resistance
100 Ω maximum)
Anti-aliasing filter Cutoff frequency (fc) of 20, 40, 80, 200, 400, 800, 2 k, 4 k, 8 k, 20 k,
40 kHz (ON/OFF possible, automatic setting synchronized with time axis
and frequency axis range)
Attenuation is -66 dB min. at 1.5 fc.
Maximum sampling speed 1 MS/s
A/D resolution 12 bits
Operating place Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8947 is installed
Operational ranges for (Same as the MEMORY HiCORDER in which the 8947 is installed)
temperature and humidity
Temperature and humidity Temperature: -10℃ to 50℃ (14 F to 122 F)
ranges for storage Relative humidity: 80%RH maximum (with no condensation)
Dielectric strength One minute at 400 VAC between the 8947 and the main unit, and
between the 8947 and the input unit
Dimensions Approx. 170W×20H×148.5D mm (6.69"W×0.79"H×5.85"D) (excluding
projections)
Mass Approx. 310 g (10.9 oz.)
Effect of radiated radio- ±10% f.s. at 3V/m (in the 10 mV/DIV range)
frequency electromagnetic
field
Standards applying EMC EN61326 ClassA
Safety EN61010
Pollution Degree 2, Measurement Category
(anticipated transient overvoltage: 330 V)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.2 Analog Inputs
 336
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.3 Replacement Procedure

・This section describes how to replace the INPUT UNIT.

DANGER To avoid the danger of electric shock, never operate the unit with an
input unit removed. If you should wish to use the unit after removing an
input unit, fit a blank panel over the opening of the removed unit.

WARNING To prevent electrical shock, before adding or replacing the input unit,
check that the power for the unit is off and the power cord and input
cables are disconnected. The fixing screws must be firmly tightened or
the input unit may not function up to specification, or may even fail.

Fitting a blank panel

NOTE Do not measure with a blank panel removed. Otherwise, the unit internal
temperature becomes unstable and consequently the specifications are not
met.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.3 Replacement Procedure
 337
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.3.1 Replacement Procedure 1

・This section describes how to replace the 8936 ANALOG UNIT, 8938 FFT
ANALOG UNIT, 8939 STRAIN UNIT, 8940 F/V UNIT or 8947 CHARGE
UNIT.
・The following procedure describes how to remove the input unit.
・Install the units by reversing the procedure for removal.

1. Remove the input cables from all input units.

2. Power off the 8835-01 main unit, and disconnect the power cord.
3. Remove the two fixing screws with a Phillips screwdriver, as shown in the
figure below.
4. Grasp the handle and pull the unit out, as shown in the illustration.

15.3.2 Replacement Procedure 2

・This section describes how to replace the 8937 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT or
8946 4 ch ANALOG UNIT.
・The following procedure describes how to remove the input unit.
・Install the units by reversing the procedure for removal.

1. Remove the input cables from all input units.

2. Power off the 8835-01 main unit, and disconnect the power cord.
3. Remove the two fixing screws with a Phillips screwdriver, as shown in the
figure below.
4. Grasp both the BNC connectors and pull the unit out, as shown in the
illustration.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.3 Replacement Procedure
 338
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.4 Input Cables

15.4.1 Connection Cable

CAUTION
・When disconnecting the BNC connector, be sure to release the lock before
pulling off the connector. Forcibly pulling the connector without releasing the
lock, or pulling on the cable, can damage the connector.
・Use designated connection cables only. Other cables may interfere with
proper connection and measurement accuracy.

Use the optional 9197 and 9198 CONNECTION CORDs for the analog input.

9197 CONNECTION CORD 9198 CONNECTION CORD 9217 CONNECTION CORD

（Maximum input voltage: 500 V） （Maximum input voltage: 300 V） （Maximum input voltage: 300 V）

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.4 Input Cables
 339
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.4.2 9322 DIFFERENTIAL PROBE Connection

DANGER When using grabber clips, the 9322’s maximum rated voltage to earth is
1500 V AC/DC; when using alligator clips, it is 1000 V AC/DC. To avoid
electrical shock and possible damage to the unit, never apply voltages
greater than these limits between the input channel terminals and
chassis, or across the inputs of two 9322s.
Maximum input voltage is 1000 VAC/2000 VDC. Do not measure voltage
in excess of these limitations, as doing so may damage the unit or
cause an accident that might result in injury or death.

9322 is a differential probe that connects to input of 8835-01 MEMORY

HiCORDER input unit. For more details, refer to its instruction manual.

Grabber clips

Alligator clips

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.4 Input Cables
 340
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.4.3 9018-10/9132-10 CLAMP-ON PROBE

DANGER Always connect the clamp-on probe to the secondary side of a breaker.
On the secondary side of a breaker, even if the lines are shorted the
breaker can trip and prevent an accident. On the primary side, however,
the current capacity may be large, and in the event of a short-circuit
there may be a serious accident.
Before using the 9018-10/9132-10 CLAMP-ON PROBE, be sure to
carefully read its instruction manual and familiarize yourself with the
operation principles of this product.

The HIOKI 9018-10/9132-10 CLAMP-ON PROBE can be used to perform

current measurement. This probe has a voltage output. The 8835-01 is
designed for voltage input. It cannot be used to perform current measurements
by itself.

Connections
Connect the BNC connector of the 9018-10/9132-10 CLAMP-ON PROBE to the
analog input of the 8835-01. Refer to "2.4 Probe Connection."

9018-10 9132-10

NOTE
･ The 8835-01 will indicate measurement results as voltage.
･ Using the scaling function, units can be converted to "A" for display. See
Section 9.4.
･ When the clamp-on probe is used for measurement, the measurement
precision will be affected both by the 8835-01 precision and clamp-on probe
precision ratings. The same is true for cases where other clamps are used.
･ When using the 9018/9132 CLAMP-ON PROBE, always use the 9199
CONVERSION ADAPTER.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.4 Input Cables
 341
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

15.5 Measurement Errors Caused by Signal Source

Internal Resistance
・If the signal source impedance is higher than the input impedance of the unit,
a measurement error will occur.
・The input impedance of the 8936 ANALOG UNIT is 1 MΩ. If the signal
source impedance is 1 kΩ, an error of about 0.1% will occur.

Rin
Measurement errors＝Es １− ――――― ［V］
Rs＋Rin

Es:Signal voltage
Rs: Signal source resistance
Rin: Input resistance

Rs

Es

Rin

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.5 Measurement Errors Caused by Signal Source Internal Resistance
 342
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
15.5 Measurement Errors Caused by Signal Source Internal Resistance
 343
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

16

Chapter 16 17
Maintenance 18

19

10

11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
 344
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

16.1 Printer Head Cleaning

In normal use, the printer does not require periodic maintenance. However,
depending on usage conditions, the thermal head may become contaminated
by dust or paper scraps. If the print seems light or if there are dropped
sections, clean the head as described below.

Method 1 1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the SELF CHECK screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the Printer check item.
3. Press the F5 [ CLEANING ] key for about 5 seconds. During this interval, the
printer prints 100% black section.
4. If this method does not alleviate the problem, perform the steps of cleaning
method 2 as described below.
* See Section 9.8.2.

Method 2 1. Moisten printer paper on the rear with dehydrated alcohol and set the
paper in the printer. (If the front side of the paper is moistened, discoloring
will occur.)
2. Lower the head-up lever and move the printer paper back and forth to clean
the head.

Moisten this side with cleaning alcohol

NOTE
･ Do not use organic solvents such as thinners.
･ Be sure that the printer is completely dry.
･ After extended use, paper residue (visible as a white powder-like substance)
may accumulate on the roller. While a small amount of residue has no adverse
effect, the roller can be cleaned using a air-blow brush (such as sold as a
camera accessory).
･ Always use the paper cutter integrated in the printer cover to cut printer
paper. If the paper is cut near the thermal head, a large amount of paper
residue may accumulate on the roller.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
16.1 Printer Head Cleaning
 345
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

16
16.2 Removing the Battery Before Discarding
the 8835-01
17
・The 8835-01 incorporates a lithium battery for memory backup.
・Before final disposal of the 8835-01, remove the battery as described below.
18
WARNING To avoid the risk of electric shock, be sure that all cables and the power
cord are disconnected before removing the battery. 19
Dispose of the battery as prescribed in your community.

Removing the battery

5
1. Verify that the power is switched OFF.
2. Disconnect all input cables and the power cord. 6
3. Remove the 8 screws which fasten the rear panel, using a Phillips screwdriver.

10

11
4. Remove the rear panel. The battery is located in the position on the PCB
shown in the figure.
12

13

Lithium battery
14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
16.2 Removing the Battery Before Discarding the 8835-01
 346
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5. Pull the battery up and cut the positive terminal with a wire cutter.
6. Pull the battery further up.
7. Cut the negative terminal (under the battery) with a wire cutter.

Negative terminal

Pull up

Cut
Positive terminal

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
16.2 Removing the Battery Before Discarding the 8835-01
 347
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

16
16.3 Troubleshooting
If the unit does not seem to operate normally, check the following points before requesting
service. 17
Problem Check Ref. page
LED does not light when the unit is
turned on.
Is power cord connected properly?
15, 16 18
Even when the START key is Is the "Pretrigger stanby" message displayed?
pressed, no data is printed. (When pretriggering is activated, triggering does not 173
occur until the current waveform is fully captured.) 19
Has the "Waiting for trigger" message appeared?
170
Check the trigger settings.
There is absolutely no variation in the Is the measurement range setting appropriate? 121 5
recorded waveform.
Has a low pass filter been set? 129
Has the vernier function been set? 267
Has baseline offset been set? 127 6
The printed recording is non-existent. Is the recording paper back to front? 28
Even when the PRINT or the Make sure the destination of the printout created by
COPY key is pressed, no data is pressing the PRINT key or the COPY key is set 230, 231 7
printed. to "Internal Printer."
The printed recording is very faint Are you using the correct recording paper? (9221) ii
During memory recorder operation, This is likely to be an aliasing error. 8
the apparent frequency of the Make the time axis range setting faster. APPENDIX5,
recording is much lower than the For more details see "Time Axis Range Setting" APPENDIX7
expected frequency. and "Aliasing Distortion."
Recording lines are dense or blurred.
9
Input signal contains ripple components. Make 129
suitable filter settings at input unit.
Recording lines are duplicated. When "Dotted line" is selected as the printed line
type in the waveform display color settings, the top
10
and bottom of the line become separated by a 1-dot
gap. With waveforms that have little variation, this 118
can cause waveform printing to appear variously as
one line or as two lines. To correct this, select "Solid
11
line" as the printed line type.
The keys are dead and do not Has the unit been put into the key lock condition
respond. (message "KEY LOCK" appeared?
276
12
Press the KEY LOCK key to clear the key lock
condition.
Is the unit being remotely controlled ("GP-IB
REMOTE" is displayed, if the GP-IB interface is *
13
being used)?
Some channles cannot be used. Is the number of channels to be used restricted? 204
The size of a waveform does not Has the variable function been enabled?
14
change, even if the input range is Disable the variable function. 163
changed.
*: See the 9558 Instruction Manual. A
If none of the above conditions apply, and the cause of the problem is not understood, try
performing a SYSTEM RESET. All the settings will revert to the factory settings. Try the
following operation, 1 or 2.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
16.3 Troubleshooting
 348
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

System reset

Method 1
1. Press the SYSTEM key to call up the Initialize screen.
2. Move the flashing cursor to the Sytem reset item and select Exec.
For details, see Section 9.7.3.

Method 2
Turn the unit on while holding down the STOP key.

16.4 Cleaning the Unit

・Gently wipe dirt from the surface of the unit with a soft cloth moistened
with a small amount of water or mild detergent.
Do not try to clean the unit using cleaners containing organic solvents such
as benzine, alcohol, acetone, ether, ketones, thinners, or gasoline. They may
cause discoloration or damage.
・Wipe the LCD gently with a dry, soft cloth.

16.5 Service

・If damage is suspected, check the "Troubleshooting" section before

contacting your dealer or HIOKI representative.
・Pack the product carefully so that it will not be damaged during shipment,
and include a detailed written description of the problem. HIOKI cannot be
responsible for damage that occurs during shipment.
・Periodic calibration is necessary to verify and maintain accuracy. If
calibration becomes necessary, return the unit to us for maintenance.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
16.4 Cleaning the Unit
 APPENDIX1
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

16

17

Appendix 18

19

5
Appendix 1 Error and Warning Messages
The unit produces two levels of message to indicate problems. These are
6
distinguished as follows.

Error messages 7
(1) The "ERROR" indication appears at the bottom of the screen, followed by the
message. This remains until the cause of the error is removed, or the STOP
key is pressed. 8
(2) If the "beep sound" item on the system screen is set to ON, then the beeper
sounds intermittently while the message is displayed.
9
Warning messages
(1) The "WARNING" indication is displayed on the bottom line of the screen,
followed by the message, but disappears after a few seconds. 10
(2) Warning messages also disappear if any key is pressed.
(3) If the "beep sound" item on the system screen is set to ON, then the beeper
sounds once only when the message is displayed.
11

12

13

14

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 1 Error and Warning Messages APP
 APPENDIX2
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 1.1 Error Messages

ERROR 1: Set printer paper. Printer paper has run out. Reload.
The head up/down lever has been left in the up position.
ERROR 2: Set printer lever.
Lower it.
ERROR 11: Waint printer initiarize. Make sure that the external printer is ready to print.
Make sure that the external printer is connected or the
ERROR 12: Set printer power on
unit is powered on.
ERROR 13: Paper End Printer paper has run out. Reload.
ERROR 14: Printer Error. This indicates an internal printer error.

Appendix 1.2 Warning Messages

No disk is present in the floppy disk drive. Insert
WARNING 70: Insert Floppy disk.
one.
Data cannot be loaded, because it is not a set of data
WARNING 71: Cannot load. (not 8835 data)
created by the 8835-01.
The floppy disk is not a correctly formatted MS-DOS
WARNING 72: Illegal format.
disk, or is a 2DD, 640 KB format disk.
The floppy disk is write-protected. Change the write-
WARNING 73: Write Protected.
protect setting or use a different disk.
WARNING 74: Disk full. There is insufficient space remaining.
File cannot be written or deleted, because it is read-
WARNING 75: File is read only.
only.
Access to disk is not possible because of some low-
WARNING 76: General failure.
level error, such as in formatting or file saving.
WARNING 80: Insert PC card. No card is present in the PC card slot. Insert one.
Data cannot be loaded, because it is not a set of data
WARNING 81: Cannot load. (not 8835 data)
created by the 8835-01.
The PC card is not a correctly formatted MS-DOS
WARNING 82: Illegal format.
disk.
The PC card is write-protected. Change the write-
WARNING 83: Write Protected.
protect setting or use a different card.
File cannot be written or deleted, because it is read-
WARNING 85: File is read only.
only.
Access to card is not possible because of some low-
WARNING 86: General failure.
level error, such as in formatting or file saving.
File cannot be saved because a file of the same name
WARNING 90: File already exists.
already exists. Change the file name.
Only a limited number of files and directories can be
WARNING 91: Directory full
created in the root directory.
WARNING 92: Directory not empty The directory is not empty. Delete files in it.
WARNING 93: Disk full Delete files or use a different media.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 1 Error and Warning Messages
 APPENDIX3
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

WARNING 94: Path name error.

Make sure that the path name does not exceed 127 16
characters.
WARNING 95: Empty directory name. Specify a directory name.

WARNING 96: Directory already exists.

A directory of the same name already exists. Change
the directory name.
17
The floppy disk is a 2DD media. Select the
WARNING 97: 2DD type FD.
appropriate disk format.
The floppy disk is a 2HD media. Select the
18
WARNING 98: 2HD type FD.
appropriate disk format.
WARNING 99: Conditions for OVERWRITE Set the instrument’s measurement data, file function,
are not satisfied. and time axis range settings. 19
WARNING 201: Set printer paper. Printer paper has run out. Reload.
The head up/down lever has been left in the up
WARNING 202: Set printer lever.
position. 5
The auto ranging function has failed. Check the
WARNING 207: AUTO RANGE failure
input signal.
WARNING 208: Cannot SAVE. (Write Move the write-protect tab to the unset position. 6
Protected)
WARNING 209: Cannot SAVE. (Disk Full) Delete files or use a different media.

WARNING 213: Invalid. (MEASUREMENT)

Pressed key is invalid, because parameter processing 7
is ON.
The pre-trigger cannot be set, because the additional
WARNING 214: Invalid. (Pre Trigger)
recording function is set. 8
WARNING 300: Cannot START. Cannot start measurement from SYSTEM screen.
WARNING 301: Invalid (SYSTEM) The key pressed is not valid on the system screen.
When operating DC power supply, auto printing and 9
roll mode are set to ON, current cannot be tested in
WARNING 310: Change auto print
more than 3 ch. Current testing in more than 3 ch
turned auto printing OFF.
When operating DC power supply, printer is set to
10
ON, voltage cannot be tested in more than 3 ch.
WARNING 311: Change print
Voltage testing in more than 3 ch turned printer
OFF.
11
When operating DC power supply, auto printing
WARNING 312: Cannot set. (Auto Print) cannot be set, because current testing is set in more
than 3 ch.
When operating DC power supply, printer cannot be
12
WARNING 313: Cannot set. (Print)
set, because current testing is set in more than 3 ch.
WARNING 324: Ignore in running. Because averaging is used, waveform processing is
(AVERAGE) not carried out during the start operation. 13
WARNING 325: Ignore in running. (WAVE Because a waveform processing calculation is carried
CALC.) out, vernier adjustment cannot be carried out.

WARNING 327: Invalid. (COMPARISON)

Pressed key is invalid, when waveform evaluation is 14
being carried out.
Operation is not possible, since the overlay function is
WARNING 328: Invalid. (OVER LAY)
enabled.
A
Since the format is not SINGLE or XYsing, a
WARNING 329: Wrong format for Comparison
waveform decision is not possible.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 1 Error and Warning Messages APP
 APPENDIX4
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

The recording length is too long for the memory

WARNING 330: Cannot set. (SHOT too long) segmentation function or a waveform processing
calculation to be carried out.
The memory segmentation function cannot be set
WARNING 334: Cannot set. (AVERAGE)
together with the averaging function.
Waveform processing cannot be carried out, because
WARNING 335: Cannot set. (SEQUENTIAL)
memory segmentation function is active.
Waveform processing cannot be carried out, because
WARNING 336: Cannot set. (MULTI BLOCK)
memory segmentation function is active.
Superimpose and waveform decision cannot be
WARNING 337: Cannot set. (ROLL MODE)
carried out, because roll mode is active.
Waveform processing cannot be carried out, because
WARNING 338: Cannot set. (OVER LAY)
overlay function is active.
WARNING 339: Invalid. (STATUS) On the status screen, the key pressed is invalid.
WARNING 345: Cannot set. (AND logic ’AND’ cannot be set between the trigger sources
trigger) using the logic trigger and the RMS level trigger
’AND’ cannot be set between the trigger sources
WARNING 346: Cannot set. (AND rms level )
using the RMS level trigger and the logic trigger.
WARNING 347: Invalid. (Pre Trigger) When the trigger is not set, the pre-trigger is invalid.
In the time axis range of 100 ms to 5 min, the
WARNING 348: Invalid. (V-drop Trigger)
voltage drop trigger is invalid.
The pre-trigger setting cannot be made, since all
WARNING 351: Cannot set. (Free run)
trigger sources are switched off (free run).
WARNING 352: Invalid. (CHAN) On the CHANNEL screen, the key pressed is invalid.
WARNING 353: Cannot set. (time/div:100ms- The time axis range whithin which the voltage drop
5min) trigger can be used is 100 μs to 50 ms/DIV.
When using the memory segmentation function
WARNING 380: No data in Ref. Block
(multi-block), there is no data in the reference block.
When using the memory segmentation function
WARNING 381: Ref. block = Using block (multi-block), the reference block and the block
specified by the "using block" item are the same.
Because there is no waveform data present, it cannot
WARNING 382: No waveform data. be displayed. Start measurement operation to
capture data.
The recording lengths are different for the reference
block and the block specified by the "using block"
WARNING 384: Different Ref. shot.
item. Capture data with the recording lengths set
the same.
WARNING 386: Invalid. (RECORDER) In the recorder function, the key pressed is invalid.
In the X-Y recorder function, the key pressed is
WARNING 387: Invalid. (X-Ycont)
invalid.
No waveform evaluation area. Create waveform
WARNING 388: No comparison AREA
evaluation area.
The printer cannot be used when the time axis range
WARNING 389: Cannot use Printer. is 10 ms to 200 ms/DIV, and the recording length is
"continuous."
WARNING 390: Cannot set over up level. Setting cannot be higher than upper limit.
WARNING 391: Cannot set under low level. Setting cannot be lower than lower limit.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 1 Error and Warning Messages
 APPENDIX5
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

WARNING 392: Cannot set. (Using unit 2ch)

Recording length cannot be set to higher value
because 2 channels are being used. Reduce number of
16
channels.
The settable range for the variable function (captured
voltage range full-scale value×±500) was exceeded. 17
WARNING 396: Out of range. (variable) When this warning appears, the upper and lower
value setting is automatically changed to be within
range.
POINT was set for scaling and the settable range
18
WARNING 397: Out of range. (scaling)
(shown on Section 9.4.2) was exceeded.
WARNING 398: A/B cursor positions invalid. Move A/B cursors to appropriate position.
WARNING 421: Equation contains a syntax Correct equation.
19
error.
Copy function cannot be carried out, because the copy
WARNING 422: Cannot copy the equation.
(Zxx)
source equation contains a Z number higher than the 5
copy target equation.
WARNING 423: Upper value has to be bigger Upper limit must be higher than lower limit.
than lower value.
6
WARNING 610: No interface card. Insert the interface card (PC card).
Operation is not possible, because the recording
WARNING 799: Invalid. (shot:CONT.)
length is set to continuous.
7

Appendix 2 Glossary 8

A/D Conversion of an analog quantity into a digital quantity 9

Aliasing Phantom signal components; a phenomenon that occurs if
sampling frequency is low in relation to the frequency of the
sampled signal (see Section Appendix 3.2).
10
Variance at aliasing In FFT processing when input signal has more than 1/2
frequency component in sampling frequency, non-existing
frequency spectrum is observed caused by aliasing.
Analog Continuous physical quantity such as voltage or current
11
Attenuator Device for reducing the level of a signal
Bit Smallest unit of binary information
12
Byte Unit of information. 1 byte is made up of 8 bits.
Channel (CH) Input signal route
Chassis Metal frame of the unit 13
Comment A string input by the user. Also measurement conditions and
other information printed for all functions.
Common mode Voltage between ground and measurement input line 14
Cutoff frequency Point where the filter output amplitude is 1/ of the input.
Digital Discrete physical quantity
A
DIV (division) Increment on display or printout

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 2 Glossary APP
 APPENDIX6
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Dynamic range Ratio of maximum vs. minimum amplitude that can be

displayed
File A collection of data on a medium such as tape
LED Abbreviation of "light-emitting diode"
Logic-level Waveform expressed as High and Low level
Low-pass filter Filter that passes through only signals below a certain
frequency
Memory A device for storing digital data
MS-DOS Personal computer operating system. MS-DOS is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Offset Amount of shift in relation to 0 V when scaling is used
Open collector Transistor output format. Requires an output increase.
Pre-trigger The condition of the signal before triggering occurred
Probe Signal line for supplying the signal to the input
PT Abbreviation of (voltage) "potential transformer"
Recording length Total amount of sampling data expressed as number of
increments
Ripple component AC component of noise
Sampling Measuring an analog waveform at regular intervals
( Appendix 2.1)
Sampling rate Rate at which sampling carried out; sampling frequency
Scaling Conversion of voltage value into a specified unit
Storage Storing measurement data in the internal memory
Thermal head Print head of thermal printer
Threshold value When turning an analog signal into a logic signal, the level at
which the measured value is divided between High and Low.
Trigger An event that causes a certain action (such as starting or
stopping a measurement) to happen.
Unbalanced input Using a two-pole input in such a way that one pole carries the
signal referenced to the other pole
Word A unit for expressing digital data. The digital data for one input
signal point after conversion.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 2 Glossary
 APPENDIX7
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

16
Appendix 3 Reference

Appendix 3.1 Sampling

17
・The 8835-01 converts the input signal to a digital value, then carries out all
internal processing digitally. This process of converting an analog signal to 18
digital values is termed sampling.
・Sampling measures the magnitude of the signal at fixed time intervals
(sampling periods).
19
Measurement

6
Time
Sampling period 7
・The rate of taking these measurements is termed the sampling rate.
・The units are S/s, read as samples per second.
・This is the reciprocal of the sampling period (1/T). 8
Appendix 3.2 Aliasing
・If the frequency of the signal being measured is significantly higher than the 9
sampling rate, it is possible for sampling to produce an apparent signal which
is actually nonexistent. This phenomenon is termed aliasing.
Actual input signal 10

11

12
Sampling period
Observed waveform
Aliasing occurs because sampling period
13
is longer than input signal period.
・When using the memory recorder function, because the sampling period for
the time axis range may vary widely, care should be taken in setting the 14
range not to produce aliasing.
・The measurement frequency limit is determined by the setting of the time axis
range. In any event, it is always best to use the highest practicable sampling rate. A
・When measuring a repeating signal, using the auto ranging function is
another useful technique.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 3 Reference APP
 APPENDIX8
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 3.3 Measurement Limit Frequency

・As a general rule, to ensure that sampling catches the peaks of a typical sine
wave input on the display, more than 25 samples are required for each input
cycle.
・The measurement limit frequency changes depending on the time axis range.

・
・
３
２
１ ２５
２４
２３
・
・

Signal cycle

Time axis range Sampling period Measurement limit

(/DIV) frequency
100 μs 1μs 40 kHz
200 μs 2μs 20 kHz
500 μs 5μs 8 kHz
1 ms 10μs 4 kHz
2 ms 20μs 2 kHz
5 ms 50μs 800 Hz
10 ms 100μs 400 Hz
20 ms 200μs 200 Hz
50 ms 500μs 80 Hz
100 ms 1ms 40 Hz
200 ms 2ms 20 Hz
500 ms 5ms 8 Hz
1s 10ms 4 Hz
2s 20ms 2 Hz
5s 50ms 0.8 Hz
10s 100ms 0.4 Hz
30s 300ms 0.1333 Hz
1 min (60 s) 600ms 0.0666 Hz
2 min (120 s) 1.2s 0.0333 Hz
5 min (300 s) 3s 0.0133 Hz

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 3 Reference
 APPENDIX9
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 3.4 Recorder Function

・The waveform data is collected under the following condition: one division is
equal to 100 samples.
・One piece of sample data collected using the recorder function contains the
maximum and minimum voltage obtained in the set sampling period.
Therefore, this data is of a certain width.

1 2 3 4･･･････ ･･･････100

One piece of sample data

Maximum voltage

Minimum voltage

1 DIV
Data obtained in the
set sampling period

When a short sampling period is set and the input waveform changes slightly,
a sudden disturbance such as noise will increase the difference the between
the maximum and minimum values. To eliminate this phenomenon, set a long
sampling period.

1 2 3 4･･･････ ･･･････100

One piece of sample data

Maximum voltage

Minimum voltage

1 DIV
【 Set a short sampling period 】

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 3 Reference
 APPENDIX10
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 3.5 RMS Recorder Function

・For the RMS recorder function, the sampling period is fixed to 20 RMS
value data items per second.
・One division is equal to 100 samples.

Calculate one RMS value

141 V Sample the 50 Hz or 60 Hz waveforms at
200μs and calculate one RMS value item
using two-period data.

[ Two-period ]
50 Hz：40 ms 200 sampling data
-141 V 60 Hz：33.4 ms 167 sampling data
Two-period

100 Vrms

(1) Time axis: 5 s/division

Since the sampling period is fixed to 20 RMS-value data items per second, 5
s/division provides 100 RMS-value data items per division. This value is in
agreement with 100 samples per division and, therefore, the voltage axis does not
have a width (upper and lower limits).
(2) Time axis: other than 5 s/division
The maximum and minimum values are specified based on the RMS-value data
(by multiplying 20 RMS-value data items per second by the time-axis range
[s/division]/100), and the data containing these maximum and minimum values are
defined as one item of sample data. When the time-axis range is set to 1
mm/division, the maximum and minimum values are specified in the RMS-value
data (20 x 60 [s/division]/100 = 12), and the data containing these maximum and
minimum values are defined as one item of sample data.
1 2 3 4･･･････ ･･･････100

One piece of sample data

Maximum voltage

Minimum voltage

1 min/DIV

：RMS-value data (20 x 60 [s/division]/100 = 12)

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 3 Reference
 APPENDIX11
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File

Appendix 4.1 Binary Data

・Recording length is the number of division.
・Truncates the decimal portion of the quotient of division.

In the memory recorder and recorder & memory functions (＊.MEM)

File size = header size + data size
Header size = 512 × (6 + number of saved anolog channels + number of saved logic
probes)
Data size = (2 × number of saved anolog channels + (number of saved logic probes + 1)
/2) × (recording length × 100 + 1)
* Truncates the decimal portion of the quotient of division.
Recording length: DIV

Number of saved logic probes

0
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 7,586 12,100 21,128 39,184
50 13,586 24,100 45,128 87,184
100 23,586 44,100 85,128 167,184
200 43,586 84,100 165,128 327,184
500 103,586 204,100 405,128 807,184
1000 203,586 404,100 805,128 1,607,184
2000 403,586 804,100 1,605,128 3,207,184
5000 1,003,586 2,004,100 4,005,128 8,007,184
10000 2,003,586 4,004,100 8,005,128
20000 4,003,586 8,004,100
40000 8,003,586

Number of saved logic probes

1
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 5,585 10,099 14,613 23,641 41,697
50 8,585 19,099 29,613 50,641 92,697
100 13,585 34,099 54,613 95,641 177,697
200 23,585 64,099 104,613 185,641 347,697
500 53,585 154,099 254,613 455,641 857,697
1000 103,585 304,099 504,613 905,641 1,707,697
2000 203,585 604,099 1,004,613 1,805,641 3,407,697
5000 503,585 1,504,099 2,504,613 4,505,641 8,507,697
10000 1,003,585 3,004,099 5,004,613 9,005,641
20000 2,003,585 6,004,099 10,004,613
40000 4,003,585 12,004,099

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX12
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Number of saved logic probes

2
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 6,097 10,611 15,125 24,153 42,209
50 9,097 19,611 30,125 51,153 93,209
100 14,097 34,611 55,125 96,153 178,209
200 24,097 64,611 105,125 186,153 348,209
500 54,097 154,611 255,125 456,153 858,209
1000 104,097 304,611 505,125 906,153 1,708,209
2000 204,097 604,611 1,005,125 1,806,153 3,408,209
5000 504,097 1,504,611 2,505,125 4,506,153 8,508,209
10000 1,004,097 3,004,611 5,005,125 9,006,153
20000 2,004,097 6,004,611 10,005,125
40000 4,004,097 12,004,611

Number of saved logic probes

3
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 8,610 13,124 17,638 26,666 44,722
50 14,610 25,124 35,638 56,666 98,722
100 24,610 45,124 65,638 106,666 188,722
200 44,610 85,124 125,638 206,666 368,722
500 104,610 205,124 305,638 506,666 908,722
1000 204,610 405,124 605,638 1,006,666 1,808,722
2000 404,610 805,124 1,205,638 2,006,666 3,608,722
5000 1,004,610 2,005,124 3,005,638 5,006,666 9,008,722
10000 2,004,610 4,005,124 6,005,638 10,006,666
20000 4,004,610 8,005,124 12,005,638
40000 8,004,610 16,005,124

Number of saved logic probes

4
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 9,122 13,636 18,150 27,178 45,234
50 15,122 25,636 36,150 57,178 99,234
100 25,122 45,636 66,150 107,178 189,234
200 45,122 85,636 126,150 207,178 369,234
500 105,122 205,636 306,150 507,178 909,234
1000 205,122 405,636 606,150 1,007,178 1,809,234
2000 405,122 805,636 1,206,150 2,007,178 3,609,234
5000 1,005,122 2,005,636 3,006,150 5,007,178 9,009,234
10000 2,005,122 4,005,636 6,006,150 10,007,178
20000 4,005,122 8,005,636 12,006,150
40000 8,005,122 16,005,636

Note: Four logic channels are assigned to each unit.

Unit: byte

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX13
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

In the recorder, RMS recorder and recorder & memory functions (＊.REC, ＊.RMS)
File size = header size + data size
Header size = 512 × (6 + number of saved anolog channels + number of saved logic
probes)
Data size = (4 × number of saved anolog channels + number of saved logic probes) ×
(recording length × 100 + 1)
* Truncates the decimal portion of the quotient of division.
Recording length: DIV

Number of saved logic probes

0
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 11,588 20,104 37,136 71,200
50 23,588 44,104 85,136 167,200
100 43,588 84,104 165,136 327,200
200 83,588 164,104 325,136 647,200
500 203,588 404,104 805,136 1,607,200
1000 403,588 804,104 1,605,136 3,207,200
2000 803,588 1,604,104 3,205,136 6,407,200

Number of saved logic probes

1
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 5,585 14,101 22,617 39,649 73,713
50 8,585 29,101 49,617 90,649 172,713
100 13,585 54,101 94,617 175,649 337,713
200 23,585 104,101 184,617 345,649 667,713
500 53,585 254,101 454,617 855,649 1,657,713
1000 103,585 504,101 904,617 1,705,649 3,307,713
2000 203,585 1,004,101 1,804,617 3,405,649 6,607,713

Number of saved logic probes

2
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 8,098 16,614 25,130 42,162 76,226
50 14,098 34,614 55,130 96,162 178,226
100 24,098 64,614 105,130 186,162 348,226
200 44,098 124,614 205,130 366,162 688,226
500 104,098 304,614 505,130 906,162 1,708,226
1000 204,098 604,614 1,005,130 1,806,162 3,408,226
2000 404,098 1,204,614 2,005,130 3,606,162 6,808,226

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX14
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Number of saved logic probes

3
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 10,611 19,127 27,643 44,675 78,739
50 19,611 40,127 60,643 101,675 183,739
100 34,611 75,127 115,643 196,675 358,739
200 64,611 145,127 225,643 386,675 708,739
500 154,611 355,127 555,643 956,675 1,758,739
1000 304,611 705,127 1,105,643 1,906,675 3,508,739
2000 604,611 1,405,127 2,205,643 3,806,675 7,008,739

Number of saved logic probes

4
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 13,124 21,640 30,156 47,188 81,252
50 25,124 45,640 66,156 107,188 189,252
100 45,124 85,640 126,156 207,188 369,252
200 85,124 165,640 246,156 407,188 729,252
500 205,124 405,640 606,156 1,007,188 1,809,252
1000 405,124 805,640 1,206,156 2,007,188 3,609,252
2000 805,124 1,605,640 2,406,156 4,007,188 7,209,252

Note: Four logic channels are assigned to each unit.

Unit: byte

In the FFT function (＊.FFT)

Averaging OFF Averaging ON
Number of points
1 ch FFT 2 ch FFT 1 ch FFT 2 ch FFT
1000 14,096 24,608 16,100 38,620
2000 24,096 44,608 28,100 72,620
5000 54,096 104,608 64,100 174,620
10000 104,096 204,608 124,100 344,620

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX15
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 4.2 Text File

・Recording length is the number of division.
・Truncates the decimal portion of the quotient of division.

In the memory recorder and recorder & memory functions (＊.TXT) (Reference values)
・Recording length is the number of division.
・Truncates the decimal portion of the quotient of division.
File size = header size + data size
Header size = 170 + 27 × saved anolog channels + 64 × number of saved logic probes
Data size = (14 + 13 × saved anolog channels + 9 × number of saved logic probes) ×
(recording length × 100 + 1)
* Truncates the decimal portion of the quotient of division.
Recording length: DIV

Number of saved logic probes

0
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 58,226 84,266 136,346 240,506
50 145,226 210,266 340,346 600,506
100 290,226 420,266 680,346 1,200,506
200 580,226 840,266 1,360,346 2,400,506
500 1,450,226 2,100,266 3,400,346 6,000,506
1000 2,900,226 4,200,266 6,800,346 12,000,506
2000 5,800,226 8,400,266 13,600,346 24,000,506
5000 14,500,226 21,000,266 34,000,346 60,000,506
10000 29,000,226 42,000,266 68,000,346
20000 58,000,226 84,000,266
40000 116,000,226

Number of saved logic probes

1
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 50,259 76,299 102,339 154,419 258,579
50 125,259 190,299 255,339 385,419 645,579
100 250,259 380,299 510,339 770,419 1,290,579
200 500,259 760,299 1,020,339 1,540,419 2,580,579
500 1,250,259 1,900,299 2,550,339 3,850,419 6,450,579
1000 2,500,259 3,800,299 5,100,339 7,700,419 12,900,579
2000 5,000,259 7,600,299 10,200,339 15,400,419 25,800,579
5000 12,500,259 19,000,299 25,500,339 38,500,419 64,500,579
10000 25,000,259 38,000,299 51,000,339 77,000,419
20000 50,000,259 76,000,299 102,000,339
40000 100,000,259 152,000,299

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX16
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Number of saved logic probes

2
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 68,332 94,372 120,412 172,492 276,652
50 170,332 235,372 300,412 430,492 690,652
100 340,332 470,372 600,412 860,492 1,380,652
200 680,332 940,372 1,200,412 1,720,492 2,760,652
500 1,700,332 2,350,372 3,000,412 4,300,492 6,900,652
1000 3,400,332 4,700,372 6,000,412 8,600,492 13,800,652
2000 6,800,332 9,400,372 12,000,412 17,200,492 27,600,652
5000 17,000,332 23,500,372 30,000,412 43,000,492 69,000,652
10000 34,000,332 47,000,372 60,000,412 86,000,492
20000 68,000,332 94,000,372 120,000,412
40000 136,000,332 188,000,372

Number of saved logic probes

3
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 86,405 112,445 138,485 190,565 294,725
50 215,405 280,445 345,485 475,565 735,725
100 430,405 560,445 690,485 950,565 1,470,725
200 860,405 1,120,445 1,380,485 1,900,565 2,940,725
500 2,150,405 2,800,445 3,450,485 4,750,565 7,350,725
1000 4,300,405 5,600,445 6,900,485 9,500,565 14,700,725
2000 8,600,405 11,200,445 13,800,485 19,000,565 29,400,725
5000 21,500,405 28,000,445 34,500,485 47,500,565 73,500,725
10000 43,000,405 56,000,445 69,000,485 95,000,565
20000 86,000,405 112,000,445 138,000,485
40000 172,000,405 224,000,445

Number of saved logic probes

4
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 104,478 130,518 156,558 208,638 312,798
50 260,478 325,518 390,558 520,638 780,798
100 520,478 650,518 780,558 1,040,638 1,560,798
200 1,040,478 1,300,518 1,560,558 2,080,638 3,120,798
500 2,600,478 3,250,518 3,900,558 5,200,638 7,800,798
1000 5,200,478 6,500,518 7,800,558 10,400,638 15,600,798
2000 10,400,478 13,000,518 15,600,558 20,800,638 31,200,798
5000 26,000,478 32,500,518 39,000,558 52,000,638 78,000,798
10000 52,000,478 65,000,518 78,000,558 104,000,638
20000 104,000,478 130,000,518 156,000,558
40000 208,000,478 260,000,518

Note: Four logic channels are assigned to each unit.

Unit: byte

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX17
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

In the recorder, RMS recorder and recorder & memory functions (＊.TXT) (Reference
values)
File size = header size + data size
Header size = 170 + 64 × number of saved anolog channels + 165 × number of saved
logic probes
Data size = (14 + 26 × number of saved anolog channels + 18 × number of saved logic
probes) × (recording length × 100 + 1)
* Truncates the decimal portion of the quotient of division.
Recording length: DIV

Number of saved logic probes

0
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 84,276 136,366 240,546 448,906
50 210,276 340,366 600,546 1,120,906
100 420,276 680,366 1,200,546 2,240,906
200 840,276 1,360,366 2,400,546 4,480,906
500 2,100,276 3,400,366 6,000,546 11,200,906
1000 4,200,276 6,800,366 12,000,546 22,400,906
2000 8,400,276 13,600,366 24,000,546 44,800,906

Number of saved logic probes

1
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 68,369 120,459 172,549 276,729 485,089
50 170,369 300,459 430,549 690,729 1,211,089
100 340,369 600,459 860,549 1,380,729 2,421,089
200 680,369 1,200,459 1,720,549 2,760,729 4,841,089
500 1,700,369 3,000,459 4,300,549 6,900,729 12,101,089
1000 3,400,369 6,000,459 8,600,549 13,800,729 24,201,089
2000 6,800,369 12,000,459 17,200,549 27,600,729 48,401,089

Number of saved logic probes

2
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 104,552 156,642 208,732 312,912 521,272
50 260,552 390,642 520,732 780,912 1,301,272
100 520,552 780,642 1,040,732 1,560,912 2,601,272
200 1,040,552 1,560,642 2,080,732 3,120,912 5,201,272
500 2,600,552 3,900,642 5,200,732 7,800,912 13,001,272
1000 5,200,552 7,800,642 10,400,732 15,600,912 26,001,272
2000 10,400,552 15,600,642 20,800,732 31,200,912 52,001,272

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX18
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Number of saved logic probes

3
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 140,735 192,825 244,915 349,095 557,455
50 350,735 480,825 610,915 871,095 1,391,455
100 700,735 960,825 1,220,915 1,741,095 2,781,455
200 1,400,735 1,920,825 2,440,915 3,481,095 5,561,455
500 3,500,735 4,800,825 6,100,915 8,701,095 13,901,455
1000 7,000,735 9,600,825 12,200,915 17,401,095 27,801,455
2000 14,000,735 19,200,825 24,400,915 34,801,095 55,601,455

Number of saved logic probes

4
Number of saved analog channels
Recording length 0 1 2 4 8
20 176,918 229,008 281,098 385,278 593,638
50 440,918 571,008 701,098 951,278 1,481,638
100 880,918 1,141,008 1,401,098 1,921,278 2,961,638
200 1,760,918 2,281,008 2,801,098 3,841,278 5,921,638
500 4,400,918 5,701,008 7,001,098 9,601,278 14,801,638
1000 8,800,918 11,401,008 14,001,098 19,201,278 29,601,638
2000 17,600,918 22,801,008 28,001,098 38,401,278 59,201,638

Note: Four logic channels are assigned to each unit.

Unit: byte

In the FFT function (＊.TXT) (Reference values)

Analysis mode
Number of points STR, ACR, LIN, RMS,
CCR, IMP PSP, HIS, TRF, OCT (1/1) OCT (1/3)
CSP, CHO
1000 27,190 11,017
2000 54,190 21,817
320 580
5000 135,190 54,217
10000 270,190 108,217

The size in case of one screen. In the case of two screens, add the respective
graph sizes.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 4 Size of a Waveform File
 APPENDIX19
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)

The waveform viewer provides a simplified view of data transferred to a PC by

remote control or data acquisition. The viewer has a CSV conversion function.
Converted files may be read by a spreadsheet program.

■ System requirements
For a PC running Windows 95, 98, Me, Windows NT4.0 SP3 or later, Windows
2000, or Windows XP

■ Installation
Install by the following procedure:
1. When you insert the Application Disk (CD-R) into the CD-ROM drive, the
opening page should appear automatically. If it does not appear, open the
"index.htm" file with your Web browser.
2. Select the language to display (click the English icon).
3. Click the [Wave viewer (Wv)] icon to view Wv specifications and revision
history.
4. Click the [Install] icon at the top right of the page to open the [File
Download] dialog.
5. Click [Open] to display the confirmation dialog to proceed with installation.
6. Click [Next] to open the installation destination selection window.
Click the [Browse] button to change the installation folder.
7. Click [Next] to start installation.
The program is now installed.

Handling the CD-R

CAUTION
・Always hold the disc by the edges, so as not to make fingerprints on the disc
or scratch the printing.
・Never touch the recorded side of the disc. Do not place the disc directly on
anything hard.
・Do not wet the disc with volatile alcohol or water, as there is a possibility of
the label printing disappearing.
・To write on the disc label surface, use a spirit-based felt pen. Do not use a
ball-point pen or hard-tipped pen, because there is a danger of scratching
the surface and corrupting the data. Do not use adhesive labels.
・Do not expose the disc directly to the sun’s rays, or keep it in conditions of
high temperature or humidity, as there is a danger of warping, with
consequent loss of data.
・To remove dirt, dust, or fingerprints from the disc, wipe with a dry cloth, or
use a CD cleaner. Always wipe radially from the inside to the outside, and do
no wipe with circular movements. Never use abrasives or solvent cleaners.
・Hioki shall not be held liable for any problems with a computer system that
arises from the use of this CD-R, or for any problem related to the purchase
of a Hioki product.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX20
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

In the Windows Start menu, select [Programs] - [HIOKI] - [Wv]. This starts
the waveform viewer application.
To close the waveform viewer application, in the [File] menu select [Exit]. You
can also click the Close button at the top right corner of the window.

Toolbar

Click the icons in the toolbar for the respective functions.

From the left, these are: [Open], [Save All], [Save Between Cursors], [Batch
Conversion], [Properties], [Wave Control Panel], [Trace], [Zoom Out], [Zoom
In], and [Exit].
For details of these operations, see the descriptions of the corresponding menu
items.
You can also select the magnification factor for the time axis by selecting on
the toolbar.

Status bar
The status bar shows, from the left, the model name, function, recording
length, time axis, trigger time, pre-trigger and judgment result.

Version information
When making inquiries, the version number will be required.
To check the software version number, in the [Help] menu select [About Wv].

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX21
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 5.1 Waveform Viewer Menus

The following is the complete menu tree of the waveform viewer application.

File Open
Save All
Save Between Cursors
Batch Conversion
Exit
View Toolbar
Status Bar
Wave Control Panel
Properties
Trace
Block List
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Set Magnification
Jump Trig
A Cursor
B Cursor
Time Notation DIV
Sec
Point
Trig
Date
Grid Type None
Standard
Fine
Title
Remarks
Fixed
Capture

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX22
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Right-click with the mouse in the waveform display screen for the following
functions.

Right-click with the Wave Control Panel

mouse
Properties
Trace
Block List
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Set Magnification
Jump Trig
A Cursor
B Cursor
Time Notation DIV
Sec
Point
Trig
Date
Grid Type None
Standard
Detail
Title
Remarks
Fixed
Color Text
Background
Grid
Font
Capture

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX23
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 5.2 Using the Waveform Viewer

Waveform display

To display a waveform it is first necessary to select the file to be displayed.

In the [File] menu, select [Open], to display the file selection dialog box.
Select a waveform file, and click Open to read in the file, and display the
waveform.

Changing the time axis scale (zoom function)

You can change the time axis scale in the display using the menus or toolbar.
In the toolbar, click the [Set Magnification] box, to display the possible zoom
factors: you can then select any desired value.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX24
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Changing waveform scale and position (Waveform Control Panel)

You can adjust the display for each channel separately. In the [View] menu,
select [Wave Control Panel] to display a dialog box.

This indicate the list of channel.

CH When a check mark is present the corresponding channel is
displayed.
Zoom Set the magnification on the voltage axis for the specified channel.
Posn Set the position of the specified channel.
Show Display the specified channel(s).
Hide Do not display the specified channel(s).
Show All Display all channels.
Hide All Do not display all channels.
Color Change the color of the specified channel(s).
Default Set all values of the specified channel(s) to their default values.
Close Close the Waveform Control Panel.

Checking the waveform measurement conditions (Properties)

Select [View], then [Properties] from the menu to display the measurement
settings on the MEMORY HiCORDER.

Checking voltage values (Trace)

Select [View], then [Trace] from the menu to check the time value and
difference of the two cursors (A and B) and the voltage values and differences
of all channels.

File list in index file

Select [View], then [Block List] to check the file list (block number, file name,
time axis range, trigger time) in the index file.
Double-click a file in the list opens a new window in which you can check
waveform in that file.
* This is effective only when reading Sequential, Multi-block, REC&MEM
index files.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX25
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Waveform jump function

Select [View], then [Jump] to jump to the trigger position or the positions of
the A or B cursors.

Time Notation
Select [View], then [Time Notation]. You can select the time notation on the
waveform display screen.

Setting Grid Type

Select [View], then [Grid Type] on the menu to set the type of grid (None,
Standard, or Fine).

Display of Title Comment

Select [View], then [Title] on the menu to display a title comment at the top of
the waveform screen.

Waveform legend view

Select [View], then [Remarks] on the menu to view the unit type of each
channel, measurement mode, measurement range, filters, comments, scaling,
display position, and magnification on the portion below the waveform screen.

Fixing waveform view conditions

Select [View], then [Fixed] on the menu to always view waveforms with the
same color, display position and magnification.
When this item is enabled, the file view settings are disabled.
The standard values for display conditions are automatically saved when the
application is terminated or when the check mark is removed from [Fixed]
menu.

Setting the display colors

Right-click on the waveform display screen, and select [Color], then [Text]
[Background] [Grid] to display a dialog box for setting the respective colors.

Font settings (character size)

Right-click on the waveform display screen, and select [Font], to display the
font setting dialog box. You can then select the font for text on the waveform
display screen.

Waveform display snaps (capture)

Select [View], then [Capture] on the menu to capture waveform display and
copy to clipboard as a bit image. You can paste it into other applications.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX26
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 5.3 Conversion to CSV Format

You can convert displayed waveform data to a CSV format file. Once in CSV
format, the file can be loaded into spreadsheet or other software for further
processing. You can either convert the whole data file or a range selected with
the cursors.
If selecting a range, first set the cursors to the required positions. These are
indicated at the top of the waveform screen by inverted blue and red "▼": drag
these triangles with the mouse to set the range.

Cursor

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX27
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Then to save all of the data, in the [File] menu, select [Save All]; to save the
range only, in the [File] menu, select [Save Between Cursors].
A dialog box appears for setting the file to be saved, and the thinning.

To save in text formats other than CSV (space delimited or tab delimited),
select the desired format from the [Save as type] list.
In the [Thin Out] box, enter the number of original samples corresponding to
one converted value.
Use this when data over a large range (long time interval) is required, but the
whole set of sampled data is not required.
Select [Time Notation] from among [Sec], [Date], [Trig], and [Point].
Enter the name of the file to be saved, and click the [Save] button to convert
the data to CSV format and save the file.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 APPENDIX28
────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Appendix 5.4 Batch Conversion

You can convert multiple waveform files CSV files.

1. Select [File] from the menu bar, then select [Batch Conversion] from the
File menu.
2. Select the desired files from the file list. To select two or more files, left-
click on the desired files while holding down the Shift or Control key.

3. If required, specify the sampling intervals in the [ThinOut] box at which

data is to be converted. Remember that not all data needs to be converted.
This setting is useful when you need data over a broad time span.
4. In the [Output Folder], specify the folder in which to save the CSV files
converted from waveform files. You can specify the desired folder without
typing simply by clicking on the [<<Browse...] button and selecting the
desired folder from the list.
5. To save in text formats other than CSV (space delimited or tab delimited),
select the desired format from the [Output Format] list.
6. Select [Time Notation] from among [Sec], [Date], [Trig], and [Point].
7. Click the [Convert] button. All selected waveform files are converted to CSV
files and saved in the specified folder.

────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Appendix 5 Waveform Viewer (Wv)
 INDEX 1
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Index

-A- -C-
A/B cursors 37, 259 CHAN key 35
A/D APPENDIX5 CH DIR 301
Additional recording 91, 110 Channel Guide 168
Aliasing APPENDIX7 Channel marker 205, 250
Analog trigger 177 CHANNEL screen 117
ANALOG UNIT 19, 33, 118, 326 CHARGE UNIT 25, 34, 154, 334
AND/OR 176, 194 CLAMP-ON PROBE 340
Any recording length 53, 84, 104 Comment 222, 251
Area value 73 Common mode APPENDIX5
Attenuator APPENDIX5 CONNECTION CORD 19, 338
AUTO 171 Continuous X-Y plot 88
Auto print 61, 253 Conversion ratio scaling 212
Auto range function 36, 67 COPY key 39, 230
Auto save 62, 93, 112 Copy 298
Auto setup function 295 Cursor keys 36
Auto-balancing 138 Cutoff frequency APPENDIX5
Auto-scroll 263, 264
Automatic file name assignment 290
-D-
Average value 71
DC POWER ADAPTER 16, 318
DELETE 297
-B-
DIFFERENTIAL PROBE 27, 339
Backlight saver 207 Digital filter 131
Baseline offset 127 Directory 300
Battery 345 DISP key 35
Beep sound 209 Display check 243
Bit map file (BMP) 229, 287 Display color 208
Block diagram 319 DISPLAY screen 66, 95, 114
Bridge voltage 22, 330 DIV (division) 53, APPENDIX5
Byte APPENDIX5 Dot 87, 88
Drift compensation 132
Dual 55, 86, 106

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Index
INDEX 2
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

-E- -I-
Error APPENDIX1, APPENDIX2 INFO 296
Error messages APPENDIX1, APPENDIX2 Initialization 239, 280
External printer 210, 231, 258 Input coupling 122, 153
External sampling 53, 210, 272 Input level monitor function 166
External trigger 199, 273, 274 Installation environment v
Installation orientation 12

-F- Interface 229, 308

Interval 197
Fall time 72
FEED key 39
FFT ANALOG UNIT 19, 33, 135, 329
-J-
FFT function 315 Jog control 37
File contents 291
FILE key 35
Filter width 181, 183
-K-
Fixed recording length 53, 84, 104 Key check 244
Floppy disk 278 Key lock function 276
Format 55, 86, 106, 280
Free-run operation 170, 171
Frequency 72, 103
-L-
Function keys 36 LAN 235
Functional ground terminal 9, 17 Language 209
Fuse 14 LED 37, 38
F/V UNIT 23, 34, 141, 331 Level trigger 178
Line cursor (horizontal) 260

-G- Line cursor (vertical) 260

List and gauge 206
Gauge 206 List print 256, 302
GND 9 Load 294
GO 275 LOGIC PROBE 26, 324
GP-IB 232, 317 Logic trigger 194
Grid 205, 250 Logic waveform 160, 323
Grounding 14 Low-pass filter 129, 140

-H- -M-
Hard Copy 256
Magnification/compression 66, 123
HELP key 35, 41
Manual print 252
Hold 144
Manual trigger 39, 200
Horizontal cursor 260
Maximum input voltage vi, 31, 33, 270
Horizontal scroll bar 39

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Index
 INDEX 3
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Maximum rated voltage to earth vi, 31

Maximum sampling 305
-Q-
Maximum value 71
Measurement limit frequency APPENDIX8 QUAD 55, 86, 106
Memory capacity 305
Memory recorder function 49, 311
-R-
MK DIR 300
Minimum value 71 Real time printing 92, 111, 254
MS-DOS APPENDIX6 Recorder & memory function 314
Recorder function 79, 312, APPENDIX9
Recording length 53, 84, 104
-N-
Recording paper ii, viii, 27
NG 9, 275 Reference junction compensation 133
Numeric data 60, 90, 109 REPEAT 171
Report print 257
Ripple component APPENDIX6
-O-
Rise time 72
Offset APPENDIX6 RM DIR 301
On-line help 41 RMS level trigger 191
Open collector APPENDIX6 RMS recorder function
Overlay 64 99, APPENDIX10
RMS value 71
ROM/RAM check 242
-P- Roll Mode 61
RS-232C 233, 317
PRINT key 39, 231
Partial print 255
Partial save 292 -S-
Partial X-Y plot 58
Safety symbols iii
PC card 281, 286, 303
Sampling APPENDIX7
PC card check 244
Save 288
Peak-to-peak value 71
Scaling function 211
Period 72
Screen hard copy 256
Period trigger 187
Scrolling 264
Power switch 18
Select key 37
Pre-trigger 172
Self-check 242
PRINT/EXT.SMPL 210
Setting state 286
Printer check 243
SETUP 203
Printer density 207
Shuttle control 37
Printer format 59, 89, 108
SINGLE 55, 86, 106, 171
Printer head cleaning 344
Size of a waveform file APPENDIX11
Probe 19, 324
Smooth printing 59, 248
Processing functions 68
Sort 298
Pull-up resistance 145
Standard deviation 73

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Index
INDEX 4
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Start and stop 75, 96, 114, 270

START key 38
Start key backup 204
-V-
Start time 196 Variable function 163
STOP key 38 Vernier function 267
Stop time 196 Vertical Cursor 260
Storage APPENDIX6 VIEW 39
Storage capacity 49 Voltage axis range 121
STRAIN UNIT 22, 33, 137, 330 Voltage drop trigger 185
System reset 241, 348 Voltage transformer 33
SYSTEM screen 201 VOLTAGE/TEMP UNIT 20, 33, 130, 327

-T- -W-
Thermal head 344 WARNING APPENDIX1,APPENDIX2
Threshold value 146 WAVE DATA CLEAR 240
Time axis range 52, 82, 102, 320 Waveform Viewer (Wv) APPENDIX19
Time interval 196 Waveform display color 118
TIME SET 239 Waveform processing calculation 4
Time to maximum value 71 Window-in trigger 182
Time to minimum value 72 Window-out trigger 182
Timer trigger 196 Word APPENDIX6
Time value 206 Write-protect 278
Title comment 223, 251
Trace cursor 260
Trigger direction 180, 188, 192
-X-
Trigger filter 179, 194 X-Y area 74
Trigger functions 169 X-Y plot 57
Trigger level 178, 186
Trigger marker 170
-Z-
Trigger mode 171
Trigger output 200, 274 Zero adjustment 126
Trigger pattern 195 Zero position 124
Trigger position 40 Zoom function 265
Trigger source 176
Trigger timing 175
- Others -
2-point scaling 215
-U-
4 ch ANALOG UNIT 19, 33, 152, 333
Unbalanced input APPENDIX6
Unit 219
Use Channel 204

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Index
 HIOKI 8835-01 MEMORY HiCORDER
Instruction Manual

Publication date: November 2006 Revised edition 9

Edited and published by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION

Technical Support Section

All inquiries to International Sales and Marketing Department

81 Koizumi, Ueda, Nagano, 386-1192, Japan
TEL: +81-268-28-0562 / FAX: +81-268-28-0568
E-mail: [email protected]
URL http://www.hioki.co.jp/

Printed in Japan 8835B981-09

All reasonable care has been taken in the production of this manual, but if you
find any points which are unclear or in error, please contact your supplier or
the International Sales and Marketing Department at HIOKI headquarters.
In the interests of product development, the contents of this manual are subject
to revision without prior notice.
Unauthorized reproduction or copying of this manual is prohibited.
HEAD OFFICE
81 Koizumi, Ueda, Nagano 386-1192, Japan
TEL +81-268-28-0562 / FAX +81-268-28-0568
E-mail: [email protected] / URL http://www.hioki.co.jp/
HIOKI USA CORPORATION
6 Corporate Drive, Cranbury, NJ 08512, USA
TEL +1-609-409-9109 / FAX +1-609-409-9108

8835B981-09 06-11H

Printed on recycled paper